Skip to main content

Full text of "The adventures of a country boy at a country fair"

See other formats


NYPL  RESEARCH  LIBRARIES 


3  3433  08235763  7 


xe5 

op  a 

ntru 


5-0 


^Mi/////..^!;*' 


^A<//i»., 


J 


k-  ^r' 


K- 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/adventuresofcounOOotis 


ih  i-^^ 


Vv  ^ur.:N 


^ll^DEN  FOUNDATION^ 
K  ^ 


it!  ^ 


®r  of  l®hy  Ivh^  Etc'.  ^=^ 


raATED 


QOS' 


C^ 


^o 


THE  NEW  YORK 
PUBLIC  LIBRARY 

9421584 

ASTOR,  LENOX  AND 

TILDEN  FOUNDATIONS 

R  1936  L 


Copyright,  1893, 
By  Charles  E.  Brown  &  Co. 


$.  J.   PiRKHILL   4   CO.,    PRINTERS 
BOSTON 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER.  PAGE. 

I.— A  Young  Fakir 9 

II.— An  Old  Fakir 18 

III.— A  Friend 27 

IV.— Uncle  Nathan 36 

v.— The  Fair 45 

VI. -A  Clue 54 

VII.— The  Clerk 63 

VIII.— The  Jewelry  Fakir 72 

IX.  — A  Brave  Rescue 81 

X. — An  Encounter 90 

XL— Long  Jim 99 

XIL— A  Discovery 108 

XIII. — Amateur  Detectives 117 

XIV.— The  Rendezvous 126 

XV. — Sam's  Adventures 135 

XVI. —Missing 144 

XVII.— A  Terrible  Night 153 

XVIII.— A  Narrow  Escape 162 

XIX.— The  Arrest 171 

XX.— A  Proposition 180 

\       XXr.— With  the  Burglars 189 

"^      XXIL— A  Disaster 198 

*!^  XXIIL— A  Second  Arrest 207 

>     XXIV.- A  Third  Arrest ••••...  .216 

';;^      XXV.-On  Bail 225 

'«^    XXVL— The  Fakirs'  Party 234 

'"^  XXVIL— In  Hiding 243 

^XXVIII.— A  Failure 252 

S    XXIX.— The  Testimonial 261 

p     XXX.— The  Trial 270 

■-C    XXXL— An  Arrival 279 

'^   XXXIL— In  Conclusion 288 


TEE  ADVEjYTUBES  OF  A  COUKTUY 
BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR. 


CHAPTER  I. 
A    YOUNG  FAKIR. 

"I'M  going  to   try  it.     Deacon  Jones    says  I  can 

1  have  the  right  to  run  both  things  for  ten  dol- 
lars, and  Uncle  Nathan  is  going  to  lend  me  money 
enough  to  get  the  stock." 

"What  scheme  have  you  got  in  your  head  now, 
Teddy  Har greaves?"  and  Mrs.  Fernald  looked  over 
her  spectacles  at  the  son  of  her  widowed  sister,  who 
was  literally  breathless  in  his  excitement. 

"I'm  going  to  run  a  cane  an'  knife  board  at  the 
Peach  Bottom  fair,  and  try  to  make  money  enough 
to  pay  the  debt  mother  owes  on  the  place." 

"You're  crazy — mad  as  a  March  hare!  The  idea 
of  a  child  like  you  setting  yourself  up  to  earn  three 


10  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

or  four  hundred  dollars,  when  your  father  worked 
all  his  life  and  couldn't  get  so  much  together." 

Mrs.  Fernald  really  appeared  to  be  angry,  and  she 
really  believed  there  was  good  cause  why  she 
should  lose  her  temper.  The  thought  that  little 
Teddy — a  "  whiflet"  slie  called  him— should  set  up 
his  opinion  in  such  matters  against  his  elders,  and 
attempt  to  earn  in  one  season  an  amount  which 
Seth  Hargreaves  had  never  been  able  to  repay  dur- 
ing his  thirty-six  years  of  life,  was  so  preposterous 
that  the  good  lady  looked  upon  the  boy's  assertion 
as  positive  proof  that  he  was  not  only  ready  but 
willing  to  "fly  in  the  face  of  Providence." 

"  I  shall  try  it  all  the  same,"  Teddy  replied  in  a 
most  provokingly  matter-of-fact  tone,  "an'  I'm  go- 
ing down  to  see  Uncle  Nathan  this  very  minute." 

"  Very  well,  and  I  consider  it  my  bounden  duty 
to  advise  jomy  mother  to  keep  you  in  the  house  un- 
til the  fair  is  ended,"  Aunt  Sarah  said,  as  she  took 
from  its  peg  the  well-worn  gingham  sun-bonnet. 

Teddy  had  no  desire  to  prolong  the  conversation, 
which  had  been  begun  simply  because  his  aunt  in- 
sisted on  knowing  where  he  had  been,  but  hurried 
away  from  the  gate  on  which  he  had  been  swing- 
ing while  Mrs.  Fernald  questioned  him,  as  if  fear- 
ful lest  she  might  try  to  detain  him  until  the  matter 
could  be  settled  according  to  her  own  ideas  of  pro- 
priety. 

"  I  can  have  the  right  to  run   what   I   want  to. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  11 

every  day  the  fair  lasts,  for  ten  dollars,  an'  now,  if 
you  lend  me  fifteen,  I'll  be  all  right,"  the  boy  cried 
as  he  burst  into  Nathan  Hargreaves'  store,  just  as 
the  old  gentleman  was  adding  a  trifle  more  sand  to 
the  sugar,  in  order  to  compensate  for  what  might 
possibly  have  been  spilled  by  the  careless  clerk. 

"Oh,  it's  fixed,  eh?  And  you're  really  goin'  to 
turn  fakir?"  Uncle  Nathan  asked,  wrinkling  his 
face  into  the  semblance  of  a  laugh,  but  remaining 
silent,  as  if  fearing  to  waste  even  such  a  cheap 
thing  as  mirth. 

"What's  a  fakir?" 

"  A  man,  or  a  boy,  for  that  matter,  who  goes  out 
to  sell  things  as  you  count  on  doin',  if  I'm  fool 
enough  to  let  you  throw  away  fifteen  good  dollars 
of  mine." 

"But  you  promised  to  lend  me  the  money." 

"An'  I'm  going  to  do  it;  but  that  don't  make  me 
any  less  a  fool  jest  because  I'm  holdin'  to  my  word. 
Tell  me  what  you  count  on  doin',  an'  then  we'll 
come  down  to  the  business  end  of  the  scheme." 

"  I'll  pay  the  ten  dollars  I've  got  to  Deacon  Jones 
for  the  right  to  run  the  games,  an'  with  what  you 
lend  me  I'm  goin'  to  Waterville  an'  buy  a  whole  lot 
of  knives  an'  canes.  There's  a  storekeeper  over 
there  who  promises  to  sell  that  kind  of  goods  for 
less  than  they  cost  him." 

"An'  he's  lyin'  when  he  says  it.  People  don't  do 
business  for  the  fun  of  it;  but  that's  neither  here 


13  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

nor  there  so  far  as  our  trade  is  concerned.  I'm  goin' 
to  give  you  the  fifteen  dollars  now — it's  a  power  of 
money  for  a  boy  of  your  size,  Teddy — ,  an'  if  you 
make  anything,  as  I  allow  you  will,  I'm  to  have 
eighteen  dollars  back ;  don't  forget  that  part  of  the 
trade." 

"I'll  stand  to  what  I  aofreed,  Uncle  Nathan,  and 
you  shall  be  paid  the  very  day  the  fair  closes." 

"Here  it  is,"  and  with  a  sigh  which  was  almost  a 
groan  Uncle  Nathan  took  from  a  fat  calfskin  wal- 
let three  five-dollar  bills,  adding,  as  he  handed 
them  to  Teddy:  "Be  careful  of  it,  my  boy,  for  I'm 
puttin'  almost  too  much  confidence  in  a  child  of 
your  size,  an'  nobody  knows  how  distressed  I'd  be 
if  anything  happened  to  prevent  your  paying  it 
back." 

Teddy  placed  the  money  carefully  in  the  inside 
pocket  of  his  vest,  and,  after  promising  for  at  least 
the  hundredth  time  that  it  should  be  repaid  by  the 
close  of  the  following  week,  hurried  home  confi- 
dent in  the  belief  that  he  was  on  an  extremely  short 
road  to  wealth. 

Mrs.  Hargreaves  was  by  no  means  as  sanguine  as 
her  son  concerning  the  success  of  the  scheme,  and 
actually  appeared  frightened  when  Teddy  showed 
her  the  money  he  had  received  from  his  Uncle 
Nathan,  who  was  reputed  to  be  the  "closest-fisted" 
merchant  to  be  found  within  a  day's  ride  of  Peach 
Bottom  Run. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  13 

"If  you  should  lose  it,  Teddy,  and  be  unable  to 
pay  him  back  at  the  exact  time  you  promised,  it 
would  be  the  undoing  of  us,  for  we  could  never  ex- 
pect to  get  another  dollar.  I  know  he  is  not  gener- 
ous, but  have  always  believed  that  if  we  should  be 
in  yet  more  straitened  circumstances  he  would 
give  us  some  assistance.  He  has  neither  charity 
nor  mercy  for  any  one  who  does  not  pay  a  little 
more  than  his  just  debts " 

"But  I  shall  give  back  every  cent  of  this,  mother, 
so  don't  look  as  if  you  were  in  such  distress.  I  want 
to  go  to  Waterville  to  buy  my  stock  in  the  morn- 
ing, an'  am  counting  on  walking.  It's  only  seven 
miles,  an'  I'll  save  fifty  cents  by  traveling  on 
shanks'  mare." 

"I  will  have  breakfast  ready  by  four  o'clock;  but 
you  must  come  back  on  the  stage,  Teddy." 

"Yes,  if  I  feel  very  tired;  but  I  don't  know  of 
any  easier  way  to  earn  a  dollar  than  by  walking 
both  ways." 

The  young  "fakir"  believed  he  knew  exactly 
what  kind  and  amount  of  stock  he  wished  to  pur- 
chase on  the  following  day,  therefore  he  had  no 
preparations  to  make  for  the  journey  save  to  get 
his  limbs  in  the  best  possible  condition  for  the 
tramp  by  retiring  very  early,  in  order  to  "  scoop  in" 
plenty  of  sleep. 

The  thought  of  the  success  which  should  attend 
him  in  his  new  venture  kept  his  eyes  open  a  long 


14  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

while  after  getting  into  bed,  and  when  he  finally 
succeeded  in  crossing  over  to  the  land  of  Nod, 
dreams  of  the  fortune  to  be  made  during  the  com- 
ing week  visited  his  brain,  and  remained  there  until 
his  mother's  voice  summoned  him  to  breakfast. 

The  sun  had  not  yet  come  up  from  behind  the 
hills  when  he  was  trudging  sturdily  along  over  the 
dusty  road,  carrying  a  generous  luncheon  tied  in  a 
snowy-white  napkin,  and  with  his  money  secured 
by  many  pins  in  the  lining  of  his  cap. 

"Be  careful  not  to  lose  it,  for  your  Uncle  Nathan 
would  never  forgive  you,"  his  mother  had  said,  and 
he  cried  cheerily,  as  he  walked  swiftly  down  the 
lane  to  the  highway : 

"There's  no  fear  of  anything  like  that  happen- 
ing; the  bills  can't  get  away  without  my  knowing 
it  so  long  as  they  stay  here,"  and  Teddy  pulled  his 
cap  yet  more  closely  down  on  his  head. 

In  a  trifle  more  than  two  hours  he  was  at  Water- 
ville,  wondering  why  the  stores  were  not  open,  no 
matter  how  early  it  was,  when  such  an  important 
customer  as  himself  came  to  town. 

Since  the  merchants  were  evidently  ignorant  of 
his  arrival,  as  was  evidenced  by  the  fact  that  their 
places  of  business  yet  remained  closed,  there  was 
no  more  profitable  occupation  for  him  than  to  eat  a 
second  breakfast,  which  he  proceeded  to  do,  using 
a  hand-truck  on  the  depot-platform  as  a  seat. 

The  train  which  left  New  York  on  the  evening 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  15 

before  had  arrived  some  time  previous,  and  the 
station  was  temporarily  deserted  by  all  save  a  boy 
of  about  Teddy's  age,  who  was  walking  to  and  fro 
in  an  aimless  manner. 

By  the  time  the  young  "  fakir"  had  finished  his 
second  biscuit  he  noticed  that  the  stranger  was 
watching  him  narrowly,  and,  holding  forth  the 
napkin  with  its  generous  store,  he  asked : 

"Have  one?" 

"I  don't  care  if  I  do,"  said  the  boy,  carelessly, 
and  he  continued : 

"I  reckon  you  live  'round  here?" 

"No,  I  jest  come  up  from  Peach  Bottom  Run,  an' 
am  waiting  for  the  stores  to  be  opened." 

"Why,  you're  from  the  same  place  where  the  fair 
is  goin'  to  be  held." 

"No;  I  live  at  the  Run,  an' the  fair  is  over  to 
Peach  Bottom,  most  five  miles  from  my  house.  Are 
you  goin'  there?" 

"  I  should  reckon  I  was.  Why,  I'm  goin'  to  help 
run  it." 

"You  are?"  and  Teddy's  mouth  opened  wide  in 
astonishment. 

"Yes,  sir-ree,  an'  you  fellers  will  be  jest  about 
crazy  when  I  tell  you  what  I've  come  to  do." 

"Don't  flash  it  upon  us  too  quick,  for  we  wanter 
kind  of  keep  our  wits  about  us  till  the  fun  is   over." 

The  tone  of  sarcasm  in  Teddy's  voice  appeared  to 
nettle  the  stranger. 


16  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"I've  come  down  here  to  give  away  a  steamboat 
what's  worth  hve  hundred  dollars." 

"Then  there  ain't  any  need  for  you  to  go  any 
farther,  'cause  I'm  willin'  to  take  it  now." 

"If  you  won't  be  so  smart  I'll  tell  you  about  it," 
was  the  dignified  reply.  "There's  a  firm  out  in  De- 
troit what's  goin'  to  do  that  very  thing  to  the  feller 
that  can  guess  how  much  she  weighs,  an'  I've  been 
hired  to  help  the  man  who  is  comin'  down  to  Peach 
Bottom  to  show  off  a  lot  of  boats." 

"What  are  you  goin'  to  do?"  and  now  Teddy  was 
interested. 

"  Row  around  in  the  creek  while  he  looks  out  for 
the  stuff  in  the  fair.  It  won't  be  any  more'n  fun, 
an'  if  you'll  come  over  I'll  take  you  out." 

"I  don't  s'pose  you  could  help  me  guess  how 
much  the  steamer  weighs,  could  you?" 

"There  ain't  anybody  as  can  do  that,  'cause  you 
see  she  ain't  built  yet ;  but  you  can  find  out  all 
about  it  by  lookin'  on  the  fair  grounds  for  the  cir- 
culars what  the  Davis  Boat  and  Oar  Company  of 
Detroit  will  throw  around,  an'  if  there's  somethin' 
else  you  wanter  know  jest  ask  for  Sam  Balderston ; 
all  the  folks  will  know  me  before  I've  been  there 
ver}^  long." 

"  I'm  going  to  work  at  the  fair  myself,"  Teddy  re- 
plied, and  then,  in  response  to  his  new  friend's 
questions,  he  gave  him  all  the  particulars  of  his 
proposed  venture. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  17 

"I  reckon  you'll  get  along  all  right,  an'  come  out 
way  ahead,  if  some  of  these  smart  fakirs  don't  try 
to  get  the  best  of  you.  Say,  why  can't  I  go  to  your 
house,  an'  stay  till  it's  time  to  ^o  over  to  the  fair? 
I'll  pay  my  way." 

"If  mother's  willin',  I'd  like  to  have  you,  an'  I 
don't  believe  she'll  care.  Now,  I've  got  to  buy  my 
stuff.     Where'll  I  meet  you  afterward?" 

"I'm  goin' with  you,"  Sam  said,  in  a  matter-of- 
fact  tone.  "I  know  a  good  deal  about  such  things, 
an'  won't  see  you  cheated." 

Teddy  hardly  thought  he  was  in  need  of  any  as- 
sistance ;  but  since  he  did  not  want  to  offend  this 
fellow  who  was  concerned  in  giving  away  a  steam- 
boat, he  could  not  well  refuse,  therefore  the  two 
started  up  the  street  together. 


18  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  II. 

AN  OLD  FAKIR. 

SAM  had  very  much  advice  to  give  during  the 
short  walk,  and  while  the  greater  portion  of  it 
was  worthless,  there  were  bits  which  might  be  of 
value  to  the  young  "  fakir. " 

"Don't  buy  anything  till  you  have  seen  all  there 
is  in  town,  an'  then  you'll  know  which  is  the  clieap- 
est,"  Sam  repeated  several  times,  with  an  air  of 
wisdom,  and  Teddy  believed  this  to  be  a  good 
idea. 

With  this  object  in  view  the  two  boys  walked 
from  store  to  store,  examining  that  particular  qual- 
ity of  canes  and  knives  which  Teddy  thought 
would  be  best  suited  to  his  purpose,  and  Sam  had 
no  hesitation  in  criticising  the  goods  boldly,  until 
more  than  one  of  the  clerks  lost  his  temper  entirely 
and  refused  to  show  the  full  stock. 

"If  you  go  on  this  way,  Sam,  we  won't  get  the 
business  done  to  day,  an'  I  want  to  send  the  stuff 
down  in  the  stage,  which  leaves  here  at  three 
o'clock." 

"There'll  be  plenty  of  time  for  that ;  I  know  what 
I'm  about.  Now,  if  you  had  sent  your  money  to  me, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  19 

I'd  got  you  a  dandy  lot  in  New  York  for  almost 
nothing." 

"Seein's  how  I  didn't  even  know  your  name  till  a 
couple  of  hours  ago,  there  wasn't  much  chance  for 
me  to  do  that,  an'  I  guess  I'll  make  out  well  enough 
here  if  you  don't  keep  on  raisin'  a  fuss  with  the 
clerks." 

"I  won't  so  much  as  yip  agin,  if  that's  the  way 
you  look  at  it.  The  question  is,  which  store  you're 
goin'  to  buy  from?" 

"There's  a  place  near  the  depot  that  wasn't  open 
when  we  came  past.  Let's  go  there,  an'  then  I'll 
make  up  my  mind." 

Sam,  feeling  a  trifle  injured  because  his  advice 
had  not  been  fully  appreciated,  said  nothing  more 
until  they  were  near  the  station,  and  then,  seeing  a 
train  approaching,  he  proposed  that  they  stop  for  a 
few  minutes. 

"Jest  as  likely  as  not  there'll  be  people  on  it 
whom  I  know  goin'  to  the  fair,  an'  you  want  to  get 
acquainted  with  all  the  fakirs,  so's  they'll  help  you 
along  now  an'  then." 

"The  stage  goes  at  three." 

"An' it  ain't  more'n  ten  now.  Come  on!"  Sam 
cried,  triumphantly,  as  he  motioned  for  Teddy  to 
come  nearer. 

Sam  had  already  quickened  his  pace,  and  Teddy 
was  forced  to  follow,  or  injure  the  feelings  of  one 
whom  he  believed  held  a  responsible  position  in  the 


20  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Peach  Bottom  exhibition.  Among  the  passengers 
alighting  from  the  train  as  the  boys  arrived  was  a 
man  who  carried  a  large  package  enveloped  in 
green  cloth,  and  Sam  whispered,  excitedly: 

"I'll  bet  that's  an  old  fakir,  and  if  he  is  we  want 
to  let  him  know  who  we  are." 

Teddy  failed  to  understand  exactly  why  this  was 
necessary;  but  his  com.panion  seemed  so  positive  on 
the  point  that  he  remained  silent. 

This  particular  passenger  appeared  to  have  plenty 
of  time  at  his  disposal.  He  placed  his  package  at 
one  end  of  the  platform,  lighted  a  pipe,  and  then 
w?.lked  to  and  fro  as  the  remainder  of  the  travelers 
dispersed. 

'•Youfoller  me,  an'  we'll  find  out  w^ho  he  is," 
Sam  whispered,  when  he  thought  a  fitting  oppor- 
tunity had  come,  and  then  advanced  boldly  toward 
the  stranger.    "Goin'  to  the  fair?"  he  asked. 

"Yes;  what  of  it?" 

"Nothin',  only  I  s'pose  you  know  you've  got  to 
take  another  train  here." 

"If  I  didn't  why  would  I  be  loafin'  around  this 
dead  place?" 

"I  jest  spoke  of  it  'cause  this  feller  an'  I  are  goin' 
there,  too,"  and  Sam  waved  his  hand  in  the  direc- 
tion where  Teddy  was  standing. 

"I  s'pose  there'll  be  other  boys  besides  you  at  the 
fair,  eh?" 

"But  we  belong  to  it.     I'm  to  give  a  steamboat 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR  21 

away,  an'  he's  goin'  to  run  a  cane  an'  knife  board. 
We're  waiting  here  to  buy  the  stock." 

"Oh,  you  are,  eh?"  and  now  the  man  appeared  to 
be  interested.  "  I  reckon  you're  goin'  to  spend  as 
much  as  a  dollar?" 

"One?  Why,  he's  got  fifteen,  an'  the  whole  of  it 
will  be  spent  before  the  stage  leaves.  We  know 
something  about  the  business  an'  don't  count  on 
gettin'  an  outfit  for  nothmg." 

"  I  thought  you  was  a  fakir,"  the  man  said,  in  a 
more  friendly  tone,  as,  unobserved  by  the  worldly- 
wise  Sam,  he  made  a  peculiar  gesture  to  a  stranger 
immediately  in  the  rear. 

"That's  what  I  am,"  was  the  proud  reply,  "an' 
I'll  make  things  hum  over  at  Peach  Bottom  before 
I  leave  the  town.  You  see  1  thought  I'd  speak  to 
you,  'cause  all  of  us  fellers  should  know  each 
other." 

"You're  right,  an'  it's  mighty  lucky  you  did 
strike  up  an  acquaintance,  for  I  can  give  you  a  big 
lift.  I've  helped  many  a  boy  into  the  business  when 
they  had  money  enough  to  help  themselves." 

The  last  dozen  words  were  spoken  in  a  loud  tone, 
as  if  for  the  benefit  of  the  stranger  in  the  rear ;  but 
instead  of  waiting  to  hear  more  the  latter  turned 
abruptly  and  walked  toward  the  package  with  a 
green  covering  at  the  end  of  the  platform. 

"I  knew  we  oughter  talk  with  you." 

"  Did  you  count  on  buying  your  stuff  in  this  one- 


22  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

horse  town?"  the  man  asked  as  Teddy  approached, 
and  the  latter  replied  : 

"There  wasn't  any  other  place  I  could  go  to, 
'cause  it  costs  too  much  for  a  ticket  to  New  York." 

"How  big  a  stock  do  you  want?" 

"All  I  can  get  for  fifteen  dollars.  Don't  you  think 
that  will  be  enough?" 

"It  depends,"  the  stranger  replied,  reflectively. 
"If  you  buy  the  goods  here  you'll  have  to  pay  such 
a  big  price  that  it  won't  be  much  of  a  pile.  Now,  if 
— I've  got  the  very  thing  in  mind!  You'll  remem- 
ber the  day  you  saw  me  if  my  plan  works.  I  know 
a  fakir  here  who  has  a  fine  layout  that  he  wants  to 
sell.  You  can  get  fifty  dollars'  worth  of  stuff  for — 
well,  he  asks  twenty ;  but  I'll  say  you  are  friends 
of  mine,  an'  the  chances  are  you  can  make  a  trade." 

"That  would  be  a  regular  snap!"  Sam  cried,  and 
Teddy's  eyes  glistened  at  the  thought  of  thus  pro- 
curing a  full  outfit  so  cheaply. 

"I'll  do  what  I  can  for  you,"  the  man  said,  in  a 
patronizing  tone.  "  At  any  rate,  I'll  make  him  come 
down  in  his  price,  and  if  there's  any  balance  it  can 
be  paid  after  the  fair  has  been  opened  long  enough 
for  you  to  take  in  some  money." 

"If  business  is  good,  I'm  willing  to  do  what  is 
right,"  Teddy  replied;  "but  I  must  pay  Uncle  Na- 
than first." 

"How  much  do  you  owe  him?" 

"Fifteen  dollars." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  23 

"Why^  bless  my  soul,  it'll  be  a  pretty  poor  fair  if 
you  can't  make  five  times  that  amount  in  the  first 
two  days." 

"Where  can  we  see  the  man?"  Sam  asked,  eager 
that  his  wonderfully  good  trade  should  be  consum- 
mated at  the  earliest  possible  opportunity. 

"I  don't  know;  but  he's  somewhere  in  the  town. 
Give  me  your  cash,  an'  I'll  hunt  him  up  inside  of 
half  an  hour.  The  stuff  is  right  here  in  the  bag- 
gage-room, and  you  can  ship  it  on  the  stage  with- 
out any  trouble." 

Just  for  an  instant  Teddy  hesitated  to  part  with 
what  seemed  to  him  like  an  enormous  amount  of 
money ;  but  then  came  the  thought  that  an  old  fakir 
would  not  wrong  a  young  one — and  he  considered 
himself  such.  After  some  little  difficulty  he  suc- 
ceeded in  extracting  all  the  pins,  and  the  three 
notes  were  handed  to  the  generous  stranger  almost 
at  the  same  moment  that  the  green-covered  pack- 
age disappeared  from  the  edge  of  the  platform 
simultaneously  with  the  departure  of  the  second 
stranger. 

"Wait  right  here  for  me,"  the  man  said,  as  he  put 
the  money  in  his  pocket.  "I've  got  too  much  work 
to  do  to  spend  any  very  great  amount  of  time  hunt- 
ing you  fellov/s  up  in  case  you  don't  stay  in  one 
place." 

After  thus  cautioning  them,  the  old  fakir  walked 
slowly  away,  and  Sam  said : 


24  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"It  was  lucky  you  fell  in  with  me,  Teddy,  for  I 
know  how  these  things  are  worked,  an'  can  give 
you  a  good  many  pointers  before  the  fair  is  over. 
Why,  you'll  have  a  first-class  outfit  for  about  half 
what  it's  worth." 

"Yes,  it's  a  good  chance;  but  I  can't  see  why  he 
didn't  take  us  with  him  if  he  was  in  a  hurry,  an' 
then  he  wouldn't  have  had  to  come  back." 

"He's  got  to  do  that  anyway,  for  his  stuff  is 
here,"  Sam  replied,  pointing  toward  where  he  had 
last  seen  the  man's-package;  but  it  was  no  longer 
there.  "  I  guess  the  baggage-master  has  taken  it 
in,"  he  added;  "but  you  needn't  be  afraid  of  losin' 
your  money  while  I'm  with  you." 

Then  Sam  occupied  his  companion's  attention  by 
telling  of  his  many  alleged  .wonderful  exploits, 
and  an  hour  passed  before  his  story  was  concluded. 

In  the  meantime  one  train  had  arrived  and  de- 
parted ;  another  was  on  the  point  of  leaving  the 
depot,  bound  ior  Peach  Bottom,  when  Teddy  cried 
as  he  leaped  to  his  feet : 

"See!  I'm  certain  that's  the  man  who  has  got 
my  money!" 

"Where?" 

"On  the  platform  of  the  front  car!" 

Before  he  could  say  anything  more  the  train 
steamed  out,  leaving  the  would-be  young  fakir 
staring  at  it  in  distress  and  consternation. 

"Of  course  it  wasn't  him,"  Sam  said,  confidently, 


TttB  ^^^ 


-^y\ 


Qi  V 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  25 

when  the  last  car  had  disappeared  from  view. 
"The  stuff  he  was  goin' to  buy  for  you  is  here  in 
the  baggage-room,  'cause  he  said  so,  an'  we'll  see 
him  before  long." 

Teddy's  suspicions  had  been  aroused,  and  he  was 
not  easily  quieted.  The  thought  that  it  was  possi- 
ble he  might  have  lost  the  money  loaned  him  by 
Uncle  Nathan  was  sufficient  to  cause  the  liveliest 
fear,  and  he  said,  decidedly: 

"I'm  going  to  know  where  that  man's  baggage 
went  to." 

"How'll  you  find  out?" 

"Ask  the  baggage-master." 

"Don't  make  a  fool  of  yourself.  It  would  be  nice 
for  an  old  fakir  like  thai  man  to  knov/  you  thought 
he'd  steal  your  money." 

"I  don't  care  what  he  knows,  so  long  as  I  get  my 
fifteen  dollars  back." 

Teddy,  trembling  with  apprehension  and  excite- 
ment, went  into  the  baggage-room  and  asked 
there  if  a  green-covered  package  had  been  taken  in 
by  any  of  the  attendants. 

No  one  had  seen  such  an  article,  and  all  were  pos- 
itive there  vv^as  nothing  of  the  kind  remaining  in 
their  charge. 

Then  he  asked  if  a  bundle  of  canes  had  been  left 
there,  and  to  this  question  there  was  a  most  de- 
cided negative. 

"The  hangers-on   at  the   fairs   haven't  begun  to 


26  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

come  yet,"  the  baggage-master  said,  "and  when 
they  do  come,  we  sha'n't  have  any  of  their  stuff  to 
handle,  for  it  will  all  be  transferred  across  the  plat- 
form without  being  brought  in  here.  What  is  the 
matter?     Anything  gone  wrong?" 

The  lump  which  had  been  rising  in  Teddy's 
throat  was  now  so  large  that  it  was  with  difficulty 
he  could  say : 

"  A  man  has  run  off  with  fifteen  dollars  of  mine, 
an'  Uncle  Nathan  will  jest  about  kill  me!" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR  27 


CHAPTER    III 
A  FRIEND. 

THE  baggage-master  immediately  displayed  the 
utmost  sympathy  for  the  victim  of  the  old  fakir's 
seductive  scheme,  and  Sam  was  loud  in  his  denun- 
ciations of  a  brother  in  the  craft  who  would  serve 
them  in  such  a  shabby  manner. 

"You  leave  him  to  me,  an' I'll  show  you  what 
can  be  done,"  that  young  gentleman  said,  and 
Teddy  replied,  reproachfully : 

"  I've  left  too  much  to  you  already.  If  3^ou  hadn't 
thought  it  was  necessary  to  make  the  acquaintance 
of  every  fellow  who  was  going  to  the  fair  I'd 
have  my  fifteen  dollars  in  my  cap  now." 

"I'll  get  them  back  for  you." 

"How?" 

"I  can't  say  jest  now;  but  you  wait  an'  see  what 
I  can  do." 

Inasmuch  as  Teddy  must  account  first  to  his 
mother  and  afterward  to  Uncle  Nathan  for  that 
amount,  the  confident  assertion  of  his  friend  failed 
to  give  him  any  mental  relief,  and  he  said,  quite 
sharply : 


28  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  You  thought  it  was  all  right  to  give  the  money 
to  him,  an'  if  you  didn't  know  any  more  than  a 
country  boy  who'd  never  even  heard  of  such  fel- 
lows, 1  can't  see  how  you  can  do  much  toward 
helping." 

At  this  point  the  baggage-master,  who  had  been 
listening  to  the  conversation,  broke  in  with  the 
sage  remark: 

"It's  no  use  for  you  fellows  to  fight  over  what 
has  been  done.  The  money  is  gone;  there's  no 
doubt  about  that;  but  it  may  be  you  can  get  it 
back." 

"How?"  Teddy  asked,  eagerly. 

"By  notifying  the  police,  and  it  is  possible  that 
they  may  find  your  man  long  before  the  fair  is 
ended." 

"  But  even  if  they  should,  how  can  I  pay  Uncle 
Nathan  the  eighteen  dollars  he  wants,  after  givin' 
Deacon  Jones  the  ten  which  I  promised?" 

"That,  of  course,  is  a  question  I  cannot  answer," 
the  officer  of  the  company  replied,  not  unkindly ; 
"  but  it  will  certainly  be  better  to  get  some  of  the 
money  back  than  to  lose  the  whole."  ' 

"Of  course  it  will,"  Sam  said,  promptly,  after 
waiting  a  few  seconds  without  hearing  any  reply 
from  Teddy.  "Tell  us  what  to  do,  an'  I'll  see  to  the 
whole  thing." 

"  Hello !  What  kind  of  a  meeting  are  you  holding 
here?"  a  cheery  voice  cried,  and,  looking  up,  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  29 

disconsolate  Teddy  saw  a  merchant  whose  stock 
he  had  been  examinmg  a  short  time  previous. 

In  a  few  words  the  baggage-master  explained  the 
condition  of  affairs. 

"Can  nothing  be  done?"  the  merchant  asked. 

"  It  is  barely  possible.  The  fact  of  the  matter  is 
that  the  two  swindlers  left  on  the  last  train,  and 
this  boy's  money  has  gone  with  them  beyond  a 
doubt." 

Then  the  merchant  turned  to  the  would-be  fakir 
and  asked  for  further  particulars,  which  were 
readily  given,  the  latter  saying,  as  he  finished  the 
sad  story : 

"Uncle  ISTathan  is  bound  to  raise  a  big  row,  an'  I 
won't  be  able  to  help  mother,  as  I  counted  on  do- 
ing; but  I  s'pose  it  serves  me  right." 

"I'm  not  so  sure  of  that,  lad,  for  all  of  us  are  lia- 
ble to  be  taken  in  at  some  time  or  another.  It  is 
possible  you  may  make  money  at  the  fair,  and  I 
will  give  you  credit  to  the  amount  you  lost.  Go  to 
the  store,  show  this  slip,  and  get  what  you  think 
may  be  needed." 

While  speaking  the  merchant  had  been  writing 
on  a  piece  of  paper  torn  from  his  memorandum 
book,  and  when  he  handed  it  to  Teddy  the  almost 
heartbroken  boy  read  the  following  words : 

"The  bearer,  Edward  Hargreaves.  is  entitled  to 
credit,  thirty  days'  time,  on  all  he  may  need,  to  the 
extent  of  thirty  dollars.  John  Reaves." 


30  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"But  I  only  lost  fifteen  dollars,"  Teddy  said,  as 
he  read  the  order. 

"  I  so  understood ;  but  you  may  need  more,  there- 
fore I  have  made  the  amount  sufficiently  large. 
Don't  hesitate  to  buy  what  is  wanted,  and  whether 
you  ever  find  the  swindler  or  not,  I  feel  very  posi- 
tive my  bill  will  be  paid." 

Teddy  tried  to  thank  the  merchant,  but  that  lump 
in  his  throat  was  still  too  near  his  mouth  to  admit 
of  many  words,  and  Sam  whispered : 

"Don't  say  anything  more  about  it.  You've 
struck  the  biggest  kind  of  luck,  and  the  safest  way 
is  to  hold  your  tongue." 

Even  had  it  been  possible  to  speak,  Teddy  could 
not  have  said  all  that  was  in  his  heart,  and  before 
Sam  had  time  to  give  any  further  advice  the  mer- 
chant boarded  a  train  which  was  just  starting  for 
New  York,  leaving  the  young  fakir  and  his  newly- 
made  friend  to  settle  matters  among  themselves. 

"You're  in  big  luck,"  the  latter  said,  consolingly. 
"What's  the  difference  if  you  have  lost  fifteen  dol- 
lars so  long  as  you  know  how  to  get  thirty  dollars' 
worth  of  goods  to  start  in  business?" 

"But  this  bill  will  have  to  be  paid,  and  Uncle 
Nathan  must  have  his  money;  that  leaves  me 
forty-five  dollars  in  debt." 

"S'pose'n  it  does?  You're  bound  to  make  a  good 
deal  more'n  that,  an'  I'm  here  to  help  you  through." 

Teddy  came  very  near  saying  that  if  Sam  had  not 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  31 

been  there  the  fifteen  dollars  would  still  be  repos- 
ing beneath  the  lining  of  his  cap ;  but  he  succeeded 
in  checking  himself,  and  the  reproachful  words 
remained  unspoken. 

At  this  point  in  the  conversation  the  baggage- 
master  insisted  that  information  of  the  swindler 
should  be  given  to  the  police,  and,  whether  they 
desired  to  do  so  or  not,  the  boys  were  forced  to  ac- 
company him  to  headquarters. 

Here  it  is  possible  their  story  might  have  been 
told  without  exciting  more  than  ordinary  interest 
if  the  name  of  the  kindly-disposed  merchant  had 
not  been  used ;  but  that  was  sufficient  to  awaken  a 
decided  interest,  and  every  detail  was  written  down 
carefully. 

^'We  will  try  to  get  the  money  for  you,"  the 
chief  said.  "  Several  of  my  men  will  be  at  the  fair, 
and  if  you  see  this  fellow  again,  information  must 
be  given  to  them  immediately." 

Teddy  had  but  little  hope  that  any  good  would 
result  by  this  means,  but  he  promised  faithfully 
to  do  as  requested,  and  then  the  boys  were  at  lib- 
erty to  finish  the  business  which  had  been  inter- 
rupted so  disastrously. 

So  much  time  had  been  wasted  that  it  was  neces- 
sary to  move  around  very  lively  in  order  to  have 
the  goods  ready  before  the  stage  should  leave,  and 
Teddy  did  a  great  deal  toward  expediting  matters 
by  explaining  to  the  clerk  at  the  store  on  which  he 


32  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

had  the  order  for  credit  exactly  what  he  proposed 
to  do. 

The  young  man  understood  at  once  the  kind  of 
goods  which  would  be  needed,  and  without  listen- 
ing to  the  many  suggestions  made  by  Sam  selected 
a  good  assortment  of  both  knives  and  canes. 

"Ain't  you  getting  more  than  thirty  dollars' 
worth?"  Teddy  asked,  as  the  clerk  continued  to  add 
to  the  pile. 

"I  think  not.  These  are  all  cheap  goods,  you 
know,  and  make  a  big  show  without  amounting  to 
any  very  great  value.  I  will  put  in  cotton  cloth 
enough  for  the  cane  board,  and  as  many  rings  as 
you  will  need  unless  business  should   be  very  brisk. 

The  clerk  was  bent  on  making  the  bill  exactly  the 
size  of  the  order,  and  when  the  prices  had  been 
figured  out  Teddy  had  invested  just  thirty  dollars  in 
a  stock  which  must  bring  in  a  profit  of  at  least 
fifty  per  cent,  in  order  to  admit  of  his  paying  the 
debts  already  contracted. 

The  goods  were  to  be  put  on  the  stage  by  the 
salesman,  and  there  was  nothing  further  for  the 
boys  to  do  but  decide  on  their  manner  of  traveling 
to  the  Run. 

"After  losin'  fifteen  dollars,  I  reckon  there's  only 
one  thing  for  me  to  do,"  Teddy  said,  as  they  left  the 
store.  "I'm  goin' to  walk;  bat  you  can  do  as  you 
please." 

"S'pose'n  we  both  ride?    You're  bound  to  make  a 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  3b 

pile  of  money  before  the  fair  is  over,  an'  can 
afford By  jinks  I     There's  that  fakir  now  I" 

In  an  instant  Sara  was  off  at  full  speed,  crying  : 
"Stop  thief  I"  with  the  full  str-ength  of  his  lungs,  as 
he  pursued  a  man  carrying  a  bundle  covered  with 
green  cloth. 

Such  an  appeal  was  well  calculated  to  arouse 
every  idler  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  and  before 
Teddy  fully  understood  what  had  happened  not 
less  than  twenty  men  and  boys  were  in  chase  of 
the  stranger,  who,  strange  to  say,  had  not  quick- 
ened his  pace. 

The  thought  that  it  might  yet  be  possible  to  re- 
gain his  money  lent  unusual  speed  to  the  would-be 
fakir's  heels,  and  he  was  among  the  foremost  when 
the  man  suddenly  halted,  turned  squarely  around, 
and  asked : 

"What  is  the  matter  with  you  people?  Do  you 
want  me?" 

"I  guess  we  do,"  a  policeman  replied,  as  he  seized 
the  stranger  by  the  collar.  "Somebody  yelled 
for  us  to  stop  the  thief,  and  you  must  be  the 
man." 

"Who  says  I  am?"  was  the  angry  question. 

By  this  time  both  Teddy  and  Sam  had  discovered 
the  latter's  mistake.  The  only  point  of  resemblance 
between  this  stranger  and  the  one  who  stole  the 
money  was  that  both  carried  packages  covered 
with  green  cloth ;   but  while  the  first  bundle  was 


34  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

bulky  and  apparently  heavy,  this  was  small  and 
readily  held  under  the  man's  arm. 

Sam  did  not  wait  to  explain  matters.  Fearing 
lest  he  might  get  into  serious  trouble  because  of 
the  mistake,  he  slipped  quietly  away,  leaving  Teddy 
to  bear  the  brunt  of  the  accused's  wrath. 

The  latter  realized  that  something  must  be  done 
at  once,  for  the  greater  portion  of  the  crowd  was 
looking  inquiringly  at  him,  and  he  said,  in  a  voice 
which  was  far  from  steady : 

"I  didn't  do  the  hollerin';  but  a  feller  who  was 
with  me  when  a  man  stole  my  money  thought  you 
must  be  the  one." 

"Where  is  he?"  the  stranger  asked,  advancing 
threateningly. 

"I  don't  know.  He  ran  away  when  he  saw  it  was 
a  mistake." 

The  crowd  immediately  began  to  disperse.  The 
policeman  called  down  quite  the  reverse  of  bless- 
ings on  Sam's  head,  and  then  walked  away, 
leaving  Teddy  and  the  stranger  comparatively 
alone. 

"I  don't  know  as  it  does  any  harm  to  have  a  lot 
of  fools  chasing  a  man,"  the  latter  said,  "but  it 
might  give  him  a  bad  name  in  his  work." 

"I'm  very  sorry,  sir,  but  you  see " 

"I'm  not  blaming  you,  my  boy,  since  it  was  the 
other  fellow  who  did  the  mischief.  Tell  me  how 
you  lost  your  stuff." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  35 

•*My  what?" 

"Your  stuff — money." 

"Oh!"  and  Teddy  at  once  gave  the  stranger  a 
detailed  account  of  all  that  had  happened,  the  lat- 
ter saying,  as  the  story  was  concluded : 

"I  wouldn't  be  afraid  to  bet  my  head  that  Long 
Jim  was  the  duck  who  played  the  trick.  I  know  he 
came  here,  headed  for  the  fair  grounds,  and  it's 
jest  about  his  style  of  working." 

"Do  you  think  there's  any  chance  I'll  get  it 
back?" 

"He  shall  give  up  if  I  see  him.  I'll  be  at  the  fair 
myself,  working  a  neat  little  game,  and  will  see 
you  there." 

With  this  remark  the  stranger  walked  away,  and 
Teddy  went  toward  the  depot  once  more,  feeling 
quite  certain  he  had  made  a  friend  who  would  aid 
him  in  his  new  venture. 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  IV. 
UNCLE  NATHAN. 

WHEN  Teddy  reached  the  depot  he  was  not 
obliged  to  hunt  very  long  for  Sam,  for  that 
young  gentleman  crept  out  from  behind  a  pile  of 
baggage  on  seeing  his  friend  was  alone,  and  asked, 
in  a  hoarse  whisper: 

"What  did  that  feller  do  to  you?" 

"Nothing;  but  that  don't  prove  we  should  get  out 
of  another  scrape  so  easily,  and  you  must  be  care- 
ful, or  we'll  be  in  no  end  of  troubJe  before  the  fair 
is  ended." 

"I  was  only  tryin'  to  catch  your  money." 

"It  surely  would a't  have  done  ar.y  harm  if  you 
had  found  out  whether  that  was  the  man  or  not 
before  you  started  the  whole  crowd  after  him." 

"That's  right,  rub  it  into  a  feller  when  he  tries  to 
do  you  a  good  turn,"  Sam  said,  sarcastically,  and 
then  remembering  an  instant  later  that  he  proposed 
to  be  this  boy's  guest,  he  added,  "  I  was  only  lookin' 
out  for  you,  an'  so  long  as  there's  been  no  harm 
done  we  needn't  talk  about  it.  Do  you  still  mean 
to  walk  home?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  37 

"There's  nothing  else  to  be  done,  if  we  want  to 
get  to  the  Run  to-night,  for  the  stage  left  while  we 
were  chasing  that  man." 

This  was  exactly  what  he  did  not  want  to  do ; 
but,  under  the  circumstances,  there  was  no  help 
for  it,  and  the  young  gentleman  who  expected  to 
form  such  a  prominent  portion  of  the  fair  set  out 
by  the  side  of  the  friend  whom  he  had  injured 
while  thinking  to  do  him  a  favor. 

At  the  end  of  a  trifle  less  than  three  hours,  when 
both  were  footsore,  hungry,  and  weary,  the  boys 
arrived  at  Teddy's  home,  and  Mrs.  Hargreaves 
made  the  stranger  welcome  despite  the  inconven- 
ience caused  by  his  coming. 

Not  until  after  Sam  had  retired  did  Teddy  tell 
his  mother  of  the  theft,  and  for  several  moments 
the  widow  was  in  ^reat  mental  distress ;  but  finally 
she  viewed  the  matter  in  a  more  cheerful  light,  and 
it  was  resolved  that  Uncle  Nathan  should  not  be 
told  of  the  mishap. 

"It  would  only  make  him  angry,"  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves said,  "and  you  must  pay  him  before  the 
merchant  who  was  so  kind  to  you  gets  his  money ;' 
but  I  am  terribly  afraid,  Teddy,  that  the  whole 
scheme  will  be  a  failure." 

The  amateur  fakir  assured  her  as  best  he  could, 
and  when  they  retired  that  night  both  Teddy  and 
his  mother  were  in  a  comparatively  contented 
frame  of  mind. 


38  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

The  following  day  was  Sunday,  on  which  not 
even  the  all  engrossing  topic  of  cane-boards  and 
knives  was  to  be  discussed ;  but  before  the  family 
had  finished  breakfast  the  arrival  of  a  stranger 
forced  them  into  worldly  topics. 

The  newcomer  was  none  other  than  the  man 
whom  Sam  had  accused  of  being  the  thief,  and  he 
explained  the  cause  of  his  visit  by  saying : 

"I  have  reason  to  believe  that  Long  Jim,  the 
fakir  who  got  away  with  your  son's  money,  will  be 
over  here  to-night,  because  the  hotels  at  Peach 
Bottom  are  crowded,  and  it  is  possible  he  may  be 
forced  to  give  up  the  stuff."  Although  not  exactly 
understanding  what  he  meant,  the  widow  insisted 
on  his  coming  into  the  house,  and  he  laid  the  de- 
tails of  his  plan  before  Teddy  and  Sam. 

"I'll  hang  around  here  for  him,"  the  stranger 
said,  "and  you  shall  say  if  he  is  the  man  who  did 
you  up;  after  that  I'll  take  a  hand  in  the  business, 
and  it'll  be  queer  if  between  us  all  we  can't  make 
him.  do  the  square  thing,  more  especially  since  the 
rest  of  his  gang  haven't  come  yet." 

As  might  be  expected,  Teddy  was  excited  by  the 
prospect  of  recovering  the  money  which  he  had 
believed  was  lost  beyond  reclaim,  and  plans  were 
at  once  laid  to  trap  the  dishonest  fakir. 

While  this  conversation  was  being  carried  on 
Uncle  Nathan  came  in  to  learn  how  his  nephew  had 
succeeded  in  town,   and  the  stranger    introduced 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  39 

himself  as  Frank  Hazelton,  a  dealer  in  jewelry, 
which  was  to  be  on  exhibition  during  the  coming 
week  at  the  fair. 

The  old  man  was  delighted  to  make  the  stranger's 
acquaintance,  for  he  fancied  there  would  be  an  op- 
portunity for  him  to  take  the  agency  of  a  valuable 
line  of  goods  without  the  outlay  of  any  money,  and 
in  a  very  few  moments  the  two  w^ere  fast  friends. 

Uncle  Nathan  not  only  monopolized  nearly  all  the 
conversation,  but  insisted  on  showing  Mr.  Hazel- 
ton  around  the  village,  and  actually  forced  the  lat- 
ter to  accompany  him,  despite  the  fact  that  it  was 
Sunday,  when  an  honest  merchant  is  not  supposed 
to  so  much  as  think  of  business. 

On  the  following  day  it  would  be  necessary  for 
those  who  had  purchased  the  privilege  of  doing 
business  on  the  fair  grounds  to  be  present,  ready 
to  select  their  different  sites  for  working,  and  very 
shortly  after  the  sun  sank  behind  the  hills  Sam 
and  Teddy  retired  in  order  to  be  ready  for  an  early 
start  next  morning,  since  the  first  stage  left  the 
Run  at  half-past  five. 

It  lacked  fully  an  hour  of  that  time  when  the 
boys  were  called  to  breakfast  by  Mrs.  Hargreaves, 
and  in  less  than  fifteen  minutes  they  were  at  the 
table  eating  a  hearty  breakfast,  which  was  inter- 
rupted by  the  appearance  of  Uncle  Nathan,  who 
looked  as  if  he  had  not  been  in  bed  since  the  even- 
ing previous. 


40  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"I've  been  robbed!"  he  cried,  passionately,  "and 
this  is  what  comes  of  trying  to  help  my  nephew 
enter  a  disreputable  line  of  business.  I  believe  you 
induced  that  man  to  come  here,  explaining  all  about 
my  store,  simply  that  he  might  act  the  burglar. 
And  it  wouldn't  take  much  to  make  me  think  you 
had  agreed  to  divide  w4th  him  the  ill-gotten  gains," 
he  added,  shaking  his  fist  in  the  direction  of  Teddy, 
who  was  so  astounded  by  the  news  as  to  be  literally 
incapable  of  movement. 

"What  do  you  mean,  Nathan?"  Mrs.  Hargreaves 
cried. 

"Just  what  I  said!  My  store  was  robbed  last 
night,  and  your  precious  son  knows  the  thief  better 
than  I  do!" 

"You  mean  the  man  who  came  here  yesterday?" 
the  widow  asked,  while  Teddy  and  Sam  gazed  at 
the  old  man  in  open-mouthed  astonishment. 

"Of  course  I  do;  who  else  could  it  be?  Didn't  I 
take  him  over  there  yesterday,  and  didn't  I  explain 
just  how  difficult  it  was  to  deposit  money  in  a  bank, 
because  a  man  would  have  to  pay  a  dollar  to  go  to 
Waterville  an'  back,  or  trust  the  stage  driver  to  do 
the  business?" 

By  this  time  Teddy  had  recovered  something  like 
composure,  and  he  said,  gravely: 

"We  have  no  means  of  knowing  what  you  said  to 
Mr.  Hazelton,  but  if  you  told  him  all  your  business, 
that  is  no  concern  of  ours.     You  insisted  on  his  go- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  41 

ing  away  with  you,  and  we  haven't  seen  him  since." 

"But  you  lied  to  me  about  my  money." 

"In  what  way?" 

"You  never  said  a  word  about  its  being  stolen." 

"If  I  never  said  a  word  I  couldn't  have  told  a  lie. 
He  has  evidently  given  the  whole  story ;  but  what 
happened  in  Waterville  has  nothing  to  do  with  the 
robbery  of  your  store." 

"Oh,  it  hasn't,  eh?  Well,  I'm  beginning  to  think 
it  was  a  job  cooked  up  by  all  hands  to  get  the  best 
of  me." 

"  If  it  had  been,"  and  now  Teddy  was  on  his  feet, 
looking  the  angry  old  man  squarely  in  the  face, 
"  why  wouldn't  I  have  said  something  about  it  in 
order  to  make  the  story  seem  straighter?  A  mer- 
chant in  Waterville  trusted  me  for  the  goods  I 
wanted  after  he  heard  the  money  was  gone,  and  I 
count  on  paying  you  before  I  do  him." 

"Oh,  you  do,  eh?  Well,  it's  mighty  doubtful 
whether  you  or  this  precious  friend  of  yours  will 
ever  see  the  fair,  for  I'm  going  to  get  out  a  warrant 
for  the  whole  lot  before   I'm   done  with  this  thing." 

"Would  you  arrest  Teddy  when  he  has  been  in 
this  house  ever  since  you  left  here  yesterday  morn- 
ing?" Mrs.  Hargreaves  cried. 

"  I'll  have  my  money  back,  and  the  sooner  your 
smart  son  tells  me  where  it  is,  the  sooner  he  can 
go  about  his  business ;  but  he  must  first  pay  me 
back  my  eighteen  dollars." 


42  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  I  only  borrowed  fifteen,  Uncle  ISTathan,  and  that 
you  will  ^et  before  next  Wednesday.  If  you  want 
to  arrest  me,  go  ahead;  but  I  promise  that  you'll 
be  sorry  for  it." 

"So  you  threaten,  do  you?  That's  what  comes  of 
trying  to  help  an  ungrateful  boy !  I  knew  he  was 
going  to  the  bad  from  the  first  minute  he  talked 
about  having  a  cane-board,"  the  old  man  added,  as 
he  turned  to  the  widow,  "and  I  predict  that  he'll 
come  to  no  good  even  if  he  manages  to  get  out  of 
this  scrape." 

"  You  thought  it  was  a  good  idea  for  me  to  do  as 
I  proposed,"  Teddy  replied,  standing  his  ground 
bravely,  "  and  was  willing  to  loan  me  the  money, 
provided  I  would  pay  you  three  dollars  for  the  use 
of  fifteen  for  one  week." 

"That's  right;  throw  in  my  teeth  what  I  wanted 
to  du  in  order  to  help  you  along,  and  call  me  an  old 
skinflint.  1  am  old  enough  to  expect  such  things 
from  such  as  you." 

"I  haven't  called  you  any  names,  nor  do  I  intend 
to  do  so ;  I  only  wanted  mother  to  know  the  truth 
of  the  business  between  us.  Do  you  really  believe 
I  had  any  hand  in  breaking  into  your  store?" 

"If  you  didn't  your  friends  did,  and  that  amounts 
to  the  same  thing,  as  you'll  soon  find  out.  I'll  have 
a  warrant  issued  for  the  arrest  of  the  whole  crowd, 
if  you  don't  tell  me  the  truth  this  very  minute." 

"Bat  I  don't  know  anything,  Uncle  Nathan." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  43 

"I'll  have  the  truth  out  of  you  before  the  day  is 
ended,"  the  old  man  cried,  angrily,  and  without 
saying  or  doing  anything  save  to  shake  his  fist  in 
the  direction  of  his  nephew  and  Sam  he  left  the  house. 

As  yet  none  of  the  little  party  knew  the  full  ex- 
tent of  what  had  happened,  but  before  Uncle 
Nathan  was  fairly  out  of  the  yard  a  neighbor  came 
around  to  tell  Mrs.  Hargreaves  that  the  old  man's 
store  had  been  entered  by  burglars  on  the  night 
previous,  and  a  large  amount  of  money,  together 
with  the  most  valuable  goods,  had  been  carried  away. 

It  is  not  difficult  to  imagine  the  consternation 
which  seized  upon  the  little  party  after  Uncle 
Nathan's  departure.  Teddy  was  so  overwhelmed 
that  it  was  literally  impossible  for  him  to  say  a 
word,  and  Sam  shook  like  one  in  an  ague  fit  at  the 
thought  that  he  might  be  carried  off  to  jail  before 
it  was  possible  for  him  to  astonish  the  people  by 
his  skill  as  an  oarsman. 

"You  must  not  think  of  leaving  here  until  we 
know  what  your  uncle  proposes  to  do,"  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves said,  as  she  returned  to  the  dining-room 
after  talking  with  the  neighbor.  "  Of  course  I  know 
that  neither  of  you  two  boys  had  anything  to  do 
with  the  robbery;  but  you  must  not  run  away." 

"  I've  got  to  leave,  no  matter  what  the  old  fool 
says,"  Sam  replied.  "I  don't  know  how  the  folks 
would  get  along  if  I  didn't  show  up,  an'  it  won't  do 
to  disappoint  them." 


44  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Are  you  going?"  Teddy  asked,  and  Sam  replied 
in  a  voice  which  trembled  despite  all  his  efforts  to 
make  it  sound  firm : 

"Of  course  I  am.  You  don't  allow  I'm  such  an 
idiot  as  to  stay  till  he  can  have  me  arrested,  an'  if 
you're  sensible,  both  of  us  will  go." 

"I  must  stay  here,  an'  lose  all  my  chances  of 
making  money,"  Teddy  said,  gloomily. 

"All  right,  then  I'm  off,  an'  after  I  once  get  on 
the  fair  grounds  I'll  bet  that  old  duffer  won't  get 
hold  of  me." 

Sam  did  not  propose  to  lose  any  time.  He  had  no 
baggage,  and  in  a  very  few  moments  after  so  decid- 
ing he  was  walking  up  the  road  over  which  the 
stage  would  pass,  while  Teddy,  with  a  heavier  heart 
than  he  had  ever  known  before,  waited  for  his 
uncle  to  send  the  officers  of  the  law  to  carry  him  to 
prison. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  45 


CHAPTER   V. 
THE  FAIR. 

IT  seemed  to  Teddy  as  if  everything  pleasant  in 
life  had  departed  from  him  as  he  waited  for  the 
return  of  Uncle  Nathan  accompanied  by  the  officers 
of  the  law,  and  neither  he  nor  his  mother  had  any 
idea  that  the  visit  would  be  long  delayed. 

The  widow  had  every  proof,  even  if  her  heart  had 
not  told  rhe  truth,  that  her  son  was  innocent  of  the 
charge  Avhich  the  angry  old  man  made.  She  knew 
both  he  and  Sam  remained  in  the  house  during  the 
entire  day  previous  to  the  robbery,  and  it  would 
have  been  almost  impossible  for  them  to  have  left 
during  the  night  without  her  knowledge ;  but  at  the 
same  time  it  was  only  reasonable  she  should  be  dis- 
tressed in  mind  as  to  the  final  outcome  of  the  mat- 
ter. 

One,  two,  three  hours  passed,  and  yet  no  arrest 
had  been  made. 

Teddy  no  longer  hoped  to  play  the  part  of  fakir 
at  the  fair;  but  yet  he  fancied  it  might  be  possible 
to  sell  his  stock,  which  had  already  been  forwarded 
by  the  stage,  to  some  more  fortunate  fellow,  and 


46  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

in  order  to  do  this  it  was  necessary  he  should  be  on 
the  grounds  at  the  earliest  possible  hour ;  but  the 
charge  made  by  his  uncle  held  him  a  voluntary 
prisoner. 

At  eight  o'clock  a  neighbor,  whose  love  of  gossip 
was  greater  than  her  desire  for  housework,  came 
to  the  garden  gate  to  say  that  she  had  just  heard 
the  justice  of  -the  peace  refuse  to  issue  a  warrant 
for  either  of  the  boys,  and  she  added  to  this  infor- 
mation her  belief  that  it,  the  burglary,  was  a  judg- 
ment upon  Uncle  Nathan  for  presuming  to  talk 
business  on  the  Sabbath. 

When  this  busybody  had  departed,  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves  said,  as  she  re-entered  the  house: 

"There  is  no  longer  any  reason,  Teddy,  why  you 
shouldn't  carry  out  your  plans.  Every  one  in  this 
village  knows  where  to  find  you  in  case  a  warrant 
is  granted,  which  doesn't  now  seem  possible,  and 
it  is  better  to  go  ahead  as  you  proposed,  knowing 
that  your  mother  is  certain  you  are  innocent  of  any 
wrongdoing." 

Teddy's  one  desire  had  been  to  be  on  the  fair 
grounds,  and  when  this  advice  was  given  from  "a 
fellow's  best  friend,"  he  started  at  once,  saying  as 
he  left  the  house : 

"I'll  come  back  if  there's  nothing  to  do;  but 
there's  no  reason  to  worry  if  you  don't  see  me  until 
Saturday,  for  I  shall  stay  jest  as  long  as  things  run 
smooth." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  47 

Ten  minutes  later,  while  he  was  trudging  along 
the  dusty  road  with  no  other  idea  than  that  he 
would  be  forced  to  walk  the  entire  distance,  a 
friend  in  a  wagon  overtook  him,  proposed  that  he 
ride,  and  before  the  fair  grounds  were  reached 
he  had  heard  all  the  particulars  of  the  rob- 
bery. 

It  appeared  that  the  burglars  must  have  effected 
an  entrance  to  Uncle  Nathan's  store  after  midnight 
Saturday,  and  when  the  proprietor  arrived  on  the 
following  morning  there  was  absolutely  no  clue  to 
the  thieves. 

"  They  must  have  had  a  wagon  to  take  away  all 
the  old  man  says  he  has  lost,"  Teddy's  informant 
added,  as  the  story  was  concluded,  "and  because  of 
that  the  justice  refused  to  issue  a  warrant  for  the 
man  who  slept  at  the  hotel  last  night.  Of  course 
the  idea  that  you  knew  anything  about  it  was  all  in 
that  old  fool's  e3^e." 

"Then  nobody  has  been  arrested?"  Teddy  ex- 
claimed, in  surprise. 

"Of  course  not,  an'  more  than  one  in  town  hopes 
he'll  never  see  hide  nor  hair  of  his  goods  or  money; 
but  between  you  an'  me  I  don't  believe  he's  lost 
half  as  much  as  he  tries  to  make  out." 

To  this  last  assertion  Teddy  gave  but  little  heed ; 
the  all  absorbing  thought  in  his  mind  was  as  to 
whether  he  would  actually  be  arrested  for  the 
crime,  and  this  was  sufficient  to  prevent  any  specu- 


48  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

lations  as  to  the  amount  of  loss,  or  his  former 
dreams  of  the  future. 

Arriving  at  the  fair  grounds,  he  found  every- 
thing in  a  state  of  confusion.  Goods  were  arriving 
and  being  put  in  place ;  men  were  quarreling  for 
this  or  that  vantage  ground,  and  carpenters  w^ere 
busy  in  every  direction. 

As  a  matter  of  course,  he  knew  that  all  this  w^ould 
be  changed  on  the  following  day  when  the  visitors 
began  to  arrive;  but,  nevertheless,  it  gave  him  a 
homesick  feeling  w^hich  he  could  not  suppress,  and, 
for  a  time,  prevented  him  from  attending  to  his 
own  interests. 

"Hello!  What  are  you  sittin'  there  for?"  a 
voice  cried,  after  he  had  remained  inactive  near 
the  entrance  nearlj^  an  hour,  debating  in  his  own 
mind  whether  or  not  it  w^ould  be  w^orth  the  while 
to  unpack  the  goods  wdiich  he  knew  were  awaiting 
his  call  somewhere  on  the  grounds. 

Looking  up  quickly  he  saw  Sam,  self-possessed 
and  jaunty  as  at  the  first  moment  he  met  him  in 
Waterville,  but  wearing  an  air  of  considerably 
more  importance. 

"Have  you  gone  to  work  yet?"  he  asked,  list- 
lessly. 

"Of  course  not ;  there's  nothin' for  me  to  do  till 
the  folks  begin  to  come  in  to  see  how  well  I  can 
row  a  boat.     What  did  the  old  duffer  do?" 

"Do  you  mean  Uncle  Nathan?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  49 

"Of  course." 

"He  hasn't  had  anybody  arrested  yet;  but  there's 
no  knowin'  how  soon  he'll  begin.'' 

"He'd  better  not  try  it  on  me,"  Sam  said,  with 
an  assumption  of  boldness.  "  I've  found  a  feller 
here  that's  goin'  to  show  off  rifles,  an'  I  can  borrow 
as  many  as  I  want  if  he  does  any  funny  business." 

"Would  you  shoot  anybody?" 

"You  jest  stay  till  an  old  lunatic  comes  along 
say  in'  I've  helped  to  rob  him  when  your  mother 
knows  where  I  was,  an'  see  what  I'll  do,"  Sam 
replied,  in  a  really  bloodthirsty  tone  as  he  turned 
to  walk  away,  and  then,  as  if  reconsidering  the 
matter,  he  stopped  long  enough  to  say,  "  Wait  here 
a  minute,  an'  I'll  show  you  a  feller  what  knows  a 
thing  or  two." 

Inasmuch  as  Teddy  had  no  idea  of  moving  from 
the  position  he  had  taken  up  near  the  gate  it  was 
not  irksome  to  do  as  the  exhibitor  of  boats  re- 
quested, and  without  troubling  his  head  as  to  who 
this  very  important  person  might  be,  he  remained 
at  the  precise  spot  until  Sam  returned  with  a  boy 
who  appeared  to  be  a  year  or  two  older  than  him- 
self. 

"This  is  Dan  Summers,  an'  he's  here  to  help  show 
off  a  dandy  rifle  made  in  Chicopee  Falls  down  in 
Massachusetts,  or  some  such  place.  He "11  help  us 
out  of  the  scrape  if  anybody  can." 

Dan  looked  as  if  this  introduction  was  disagree- 


/ 


50  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

able  to  him  rather  than  otherwise,  and  after  nod- 
ding to  Teddy,  he  said,  in  an  explanatory  tone : 

"I'm  here  to  help  thft  man  what  exhibits  goods 
from  the  Stevens  Arms  Company,  that's  all;  but  I 
don't  see  how  1  could  be  of  any  help  if  you  fellers 
have  got  in  a  fuss." 

"Neither  do  I,"  Teddy  replied,  and  then  to  show 
that  no  one  could  aid  him,  he  told  the  whole  story, 
including  all  that  Uncle  Nathan  had  said. 

"I  wouldn't  let  that  worry  me,"  Dan  said,  philo- 
sophically, when  the  tale  was  ended.  "  If  you  want 
to  make  any  money  out  of  this  fair  it  is  time  you 
was  lookin'  out  for  a  stand,  an'  I  know  of  the  best 
place  on  the  grounds.  Come  with  me  now,  an' 
you  can  get  it  before  the  crowd  of  fakirs  have  a 
chance  to  take  it  up." 

Teddy,  rather  liking  the  appearance  of  this  boy, 
resolved  to  follow  his  advice,  and  signified  the 
same  by  slipping  down  from  the  stack  of  exhibits, 
as  he  said : 

"Show  it  to  me  an'  I'll  get  right  to  work,  for 
there's  forty-five  dollars  I've  got  to  pay  back,  no 
matter  what  Uncle  Nathan  makes  up  his  mind  to 
do." 

"That's  the  way  to  talk,"  Sam  cried,  approvingly, 
and  forthwith  he  proceeded  to  take  charge  of  his 
two  acquaintances,  resolved  that  lack  of  energy 
should  not  prevent  him  from  sharing  in  their  tri- 
umphs, if  indeed,  they  had  any. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  51 

Dan  professed  to  have  had  considerable  experi- 
ence with  fairs,  and  the  manner  in  which  he  pro- 
ceeded to  work  showed  that  there  had  been  no 
boasting  on  his  part.  He  selected  a  spot  where 
nearly  all  of  the  visitors  would  be  forced  to  pass  in 
order  to  see  the  cattle  or  the  racing,  and  set  about 
putting  up  a  stand  for  Teddy  in  the  most  approved 
manner. 

He  ordered  Sam  here  and  there  to  such  places  as 
he  had  seen  an  accumulation  of  lumber,  and  so  well 
did  he  work,  after  borrowing  an  ax  and  a  hatchet 
from  a  "candy  butcher,"  that  it  was  not  yet  noon 
when  Teddy  had  an  inclosure  sufficiently  large  for 
his  purpose ;  the  cloth  was  in  place  and  the  holes 
cut  for  the  canes,  so  that  it  would  be  but  the  work 
of  a  few  moments  to  make  everything  ready  when 
business  should  begin. 

"You  can't  do  the  whole  thing  yourself  if  there 
is  anything  like  the  crowd  that  ought  to  come," 
Dan  said,  "and  I  advise  you  to  hire  a  clerk." 

"Where'll  I  find  one?"  Teddy  asked,  helplessly. 

"  Take  some  of  the  fellers  from  your  own  village ; 
but  be  sure  they're  honest,  for  after  business  begins 
there  won't  be  any  chance  to  watch  'em." 

Teddy  thought  he  could  find  the  proper  party 
before  the  following  day,  and  then  came  the  ques- 
tion of  w^here  they  were  to  sleep. 

"I've  got  that  all  fixed,"  Sam  said,  confidently. 

"The  man  w^hat  runs  the  museum  in    that  big 


52  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

tent  is  a  friend  of  mine,  an'  he  won't  say  a  word 
if  we  stay  under  the  canvas  to-night." 

"How  long  have  you  known  him?"  Teddy  asked, 
warned  by  previous  experience  that  Sam's  state- 
ments were  not  always  to  be  depended  upon. 

"I  never  saw  him  till  this  morning;  but  that 
don't  make  no  difference  so  long  as  he's  willin'  for 
us  to  stay  there." 

"We'll  go  over  an'  look  around,"  Dan  said,  lead- 
ing the  way,  and  to  the  surprise  of  at  least  one  of 
the  party  it  w^as  found  that  Master  Sam's  state- 
ment was  absolutely  correct. 

The  proprietor  of  the  museum  was  more  than 
willing  to  allow  the  boys  to  sleep  under  his  canvas, 
for  the  very  good  reason  that  they  would  act  as 
sentinels  in  lieu  of  those  he  had  neglected  to  hire, 
and  all  three  went  away  in  search  of  a  place  where 
they  could  obtain  meals  during  the  expected  five 
days  of  excitement  and  money-making. 

This  was  even  a  more  simple  matter  than  the 
first.  At  a  boarding-house  nearly  opposite  the 
main  entrance  to  the  grounds  they  could  be  accom- 
modated at  a  reasonable  rate,  and  the  preliminaries 
had  been  settled.  It  only  remained  now  to  welcome 
the  visitors,  and  get  from  them  as  much  money  as 
possible. 

Teddy  almost  forgot  the  terrible  fact  that  his 
Uncle  Nathan  might  yet  have  him  arrested,  and 
Sam  acted  as  if  such  a  thing  had  never  been  possible. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  53 

It  is  true  all  three  of  the  boys  discussed  the  pos- 
sibility of  finding  the  money  which  had  been  stolen 
from  Teddy;  but  neither  thought  of  connecting  the 
two  crimes  as  the  work  of  one  person. 

During  the  afternoon  Teddy  looked  around  in 
the  hope  of  seeing  the  man,  unjustly  accused  of  the 
theft,  who  had  promised  to  aid  him ;  but  as  yet  he 
had  not  put  in  an  appearance,  and  it  seemed  as  if 
all  the  choice  places  would  be  taken  before  he 
arrived. 

It  was  anything  rather  than  sport  to  wander 
around  the  almost  deserted  grounds,  and  at  an 
early  hour,  after  partaking  of  a  remarkably  poor 
supper,  the  three  boys  sought  the  seclusion  granted 
by  the  mildewed  canvas  of  the  alleged  museum  of 
the  "world's  wonders." 

A  goat,  a  wax  baby,  two  or  three  snakes,  an  alli- 
gator, and  a  contortionist,  who  was  none  other  than 
the  proprietor  of  this  magnificent  array  of  "  mar- 
vels," made  up  the  entire  list  of  curiosities;  but  the 
tent  would  shelter  the  young  fakirs  from  the  wind 
and  dew,  and  it  was  possible  they  might  sleep  as 
soundly  as  at  home. 


54  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER   VI. 
A   CLUE. 

SAM  and  Dan,  who  had  worked  at  many  fairs  and 
been  forced  to  sleep  in  far  less  desirable  places, 
thought  it  was  a  rare  piece  of  good  fortune  to  get 
such  comfortable  quarters  free;  but  the  prospect 
of  lying  on  the  ground  all  night  was  far  from  pleas- 
ing to  Teddy. 

He  looked  around  for  some  spot  softer  than 
another;  but  there  was  no  choice,  and  he  said  to 
himself : 

"There's  one  satisfaction  about  it,  I'm  better  off 
on  the  ground  than  I  would  have  been  if  Uncle 
Nathan  had  succeeded  in  having  me  arrested  and 
put  in  jail." 

This  thought  caused  the  interior  of  the  tent  to 
seem  less  disagreeable,  and  he  almost  persuaded 
himself  that  it  would  be  sport  to  stay  all  night  in  a 
museum  with  a  real  contortionist  as  host. 

Dan  had  thrown  himself  at  full  length  on  the 
ground  where  he  could  watch  the  proprietor  of  this 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  55 

"enormous  exhibition"  cook  his  supper  on  an  oil- 
stove,  and  Sam,  anxious  about  other  people's  affairs 
as  usual,  devoted  his  entire  time  to  asking  ques- 
tions regarding  the  business. 

"How  do  you  count  on  gettin'  along  when  the 
crowds  get  here?  You  can't  sell  tickets  an'  act  too." 

"I've  got  a  barker  an'  a  clown  coming  to- 
morrow; it  was  no  use  to  pay  'em  wages  for  layin' 
around  when  there  was  nothing  to  be  done  but  put 
up  the  tent." 

"What's  a  'barker?'  "  Sam  asked,  in  surprise. 

"Why,  the  man  who  stands  outside  an'  does  the 
talking,  of  course." 

Then,  his  supper  having  been  cooked  and  eaten, 
the  host  amused  himself  and  his  guests  by  telling 
of  his  experience  in  the  show  business;  relating 
stories  and  talking  of  the  different  fakirs  he  had 
met. 

"When  I  started  out,"  he  said,  "I  made  up  my 
mind  that  a  fortune  could  be  made  in  one  season.  I 
bought  a  fine  tent;  had  lots  of  performers,  about 
twenty  animals,  and  a  dozen  cases  of  stuffed  birds 
and  other  curiosities.  We  struck  hard  luck  from 
the  sendoff,  an'  first  the  woman  with  an  iron  jaw 
gave  me  the  shake  because  she  got  tired  of  waiting 
for  the  salary  that  never  came.  Two  of  the  bears 
grew  so  disgusted  with  the  bad  business  that  they 
died,  and  one  after  another  of  the  people  skipped, 
till  I  was  pretty  nigh  alone.     A  sheriff  in  Harmer 


56  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

seized  the  cases,  another  levied  on  my  h've  stock, 
and  it  has  only  taken  two  seasons  to  bring  the  show 
down  to  where  you  see  it." 

This  was  not  pleasing  information  for  Teddy, 
who  was  obliged  to  make  such  a  large  amount  of 
money  in  order  to  free  himself  from  debt,  and  he 
asked: 

"Isn't  is  possible  to  make  money  at  every  fair?  I 
thought  the  fakirs  got  rich  in  a  little  while." 

"  So  did  I  before  I  went  into  the  business.  A  fel- 
low may  make  a  big  stake  this  week  and  lose  it  all 
at  the  next  stand.  If  you  strike  bad  weather,  or  a 
crowd  that  hasn't  got  any  money,  it's  up-hill  work 
to  pull  in  the  entrance  fee.  Now,  I  have  to  pay  a 
hundred  dollars  for  this  privilege,  because  I've 
got  a  big  tent,  and  it  wouldn't  be  any  more  if  I  had 
a  show  to  compare  with  it  in  size.  It'll  take  a  good 
many  ten-cent  pieces  to  make  that  up." 

This  plain  statement  of  facts  caused  Teddy  to 
figure  how  many  nickels  he  must  receive  before 
the  capital  invested  and  stolen  would  be  returned, 
and  the  result  was  far  from  gratifying. 

"  The  eighteen  dollars  which  must  be  j>-iven  to 
Uncle  Nathan,  the  thirty  I  owe  in  Waterville,  and 
ten  I  paid  for  the  privilege  of  running  the  boards 
makes  eleven  hundred  and  sixty  five-cent  pieces. 
I'll  never  see  so  many  customers  as  that,  and  Aunt 
Sarah  was  right  when  she  called  me  a  fool  for 
thinking  of  going  into  the  business,"  he  said  to  him- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  57 

self,  as  his  companions  began  to  make  their  prep- 
arations for  the  night. 

It  is  useless  to ''cry  over  spilled  milk,"  however, 
and  this  he  realized  in  time  to  prevent  himself  from 
being  plunged  into  the  lowest  depths  of  despond- 
ency. It  was  barely  possible  business  would  be  ex- 
ceptionally good,  he  argued  mentally,  and  if  hard 
work  could  accomplish  the  desired  result  he  must 
be  successful. 

Dan  was  already  lying  down  with  his  head 
toward  the  side  of  the  tent  and  his  feet  near  the 
oil-stove,  which  had  been  left  burning  because  of 
the  dampness,  and  Teddy  crawled  over  by  the  side 
of  him.  Sam  had  decided  to  sleep  by  the  side  of  his 
host,  probably  with  the  idea  that  he  might  appear 
to  be  on  terms  of  greater  intimacy,  and  all  hands 
gave  themselves  up  to  slumber. 

The  excitement  of  the  morning  and  subsequent 
labor  had  so  tried  Teddy  that,  despite  the  hardness 
of  his  bed,  he  fell  asleep  in  a  very  few  moments, 
and  it  was  not  yet  nine  o'clock  when  all  the  in- 
mates of  the  tent,  save  the  goat,  and  possibly  the 
alligator  and  snakes,  were  wrapped  in  blissful  un- 
consciousness. 

Half  an  hour  later  a  terrific  yell  from  Sam  caused 
the  remainder  of  the  party  to  spring  to  their  feet  in 
alarm. 

"What's  the  matter?"  Dan  cried. 

"Somebody    has    got    into    the    tent    and    been 


58  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

poundin'  me  with  a  club!  I'm  pretty  near 
killed." 

The  faint  glow  cast  by  the  oil-stove  was  not  suffi- 
cient to  illumine  any  portion  of  the  tent,  and  the 
host  made  all  haste  to  light  a  lantern,  after  which 
Dan  proceeded  to  search  for  the  supposed  intruder; 
but  before  he  had  taken  a  dozen  steps  the  proprie- 
tor of  the  museum  burst  into  a  hearty  laugh. 

"Funny,  ain't  it?"  Sam  cried,  angrily.  "I  s'pose 
you'd  laugh  if  I'd  been  killed  in  your  old  tent!" 

This  savage  remark  appeared  to  excite  the  man's 
mirth  rather  than  check  it,  and  while  he  was  thus 
enjoying  himself  Teddy  and  Dan  stood  gazing  at 
him  in  surprise. 

It  was  several  minutes  before  the  man  could 
speak,  and  then  he  said,  as  he  pointed  to  the  goat 
who  stood  a  short  distance  away  ca]mly  munching 
some  potato  parings : 

"That's  the  fellow  who  has  been  beating  your 
friend  with  a  club.  I  always  let  him  loose  at  night, 
and  he  has  walked  over  our  dying  boy." 

Sam  insisted  that  he  had  been  beaten  with  a  club ; 
but  on  examining  his  clothing  two  spots  of  fresh 
earth  were  found,  showing  where  the  animal  had 
stepped.  A  hoof-print  on  the  sleeve  and  another 
directly  on  the  breast  of  his  coat  comprised  the  full 
amount  of  damage  done. 

The  boy  who  had  believed  himself  so  dangerously 
wounded  now  grew  angry,  and,  leaping  to  his  feet, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  59 

declared  he  would  not  remain  in  the  tent  another 
minute  unless  the  goat  was  tied. 

"There's  nothing  to  prevent  your  bunking  some- 
where else,"  the  owner  of  the  animal  replied,  quite 
sharply. 

"  Billy  always  has  had  the  liberty  of  the  tent  at 
night,  and  I  reckon  he  won't  lose  it  now." 

Sam  started  toward  the  entrance;  but  before 
reaching  it  he  realized  that  he  would  be  punishing 
no  one  but  himself,  and  slowly  turned  back,  saying 
as  he  approached  the  stove : 

"It's  too  late  to  hunt  for  lodgings  now,  an'  I 
s'pose  I'll  have  to  make  the  best  of  it." 

"I  guess  you  will,"  the  host  replied,  quietly,  and 
the  angry  Sam  lay  down  on  the  seat  of  the  bag- 
gage wagon,  to  insure  himself  against  another  visit 
from  "Billy." 

This  incident  had  driven  the  desire  for  sleep  from 
the  eyelids  of  Teddy  and  Dan,  and  they  remained 
awake  some  time  after  the  loud  breathing  of  their 
companions  told  that  the  visit  from  the  goat  had 
been  temporarily  effaced  from  their  minds. 

Now  Teddy  discovered  what  a  hard,  uncomfort- 
able bed  the  bare  earth  was,  and  after  tossing 
about  for  half  an  hour,  he  whispered  to  Dan : 

"Do  you  suppose  it  would  be  any  better  in  the 
wagon?" 

"[N'o;  you'll  get  used  to  it  in  a  little  while,  and 
the  ground  is  softer  than  a  board." 


60  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Teddy  was  about  to  repl}^  when  the  sound  of 
voices  from  the  outside  attracted  his  attention,  and 
then  came  the  crackle  as  of  a  match  being  lighted. 

Two  or  more  men  had  halted  near  the  canvas 
within  a  few  feet  of  where  the  boys  were  lying, 
evidently  that  they  might  be  sheltered  from  the 
wind  w^hile  getting  their  pipes  or  cigars  in  working 
order. 

A  moment  later  both  the  listeners  heard  one  of 
the  newcomers  say : 

"  I  don't  think  it  will  be  safe  for  you  to  show  up 
very  much  while  we  stay  here." 

"Why  not?  If  them  boys  recognize  me  it  will  be 
an  easy  matter  to  frighten  'em  into  holdin'  their 
tongues,  and  there's  goin'  to  be  good  pickin's  this 
week." 

"But  what's  the  use  of  runnin' any  risk?  We've 
made  a  fairly  good  haul  already,  an'  it's  better  to 
get  safe  off  with  that  than  stick  our  noses  where 
it'll  be  hard  work  to  pull  them  back." 

Teddy  was  in  the  highest  possible  excitement.  In 
the  tone  of  the  second  speaker's  voice  he  recognized 
the  man  who  had  stolen  his  money,  and  he  punched 
Dan  with  his  elbow  to  assure  himself  that  the  latter 
was  listening. 

"Keep  quiet,"  Dan  whispered,  and  then  the  con- 
versation on  the  outside  was  continued. 

"I'll  take  good  care  to  keep  shady,  an' you  see 
what  can  be  done  to-morrow." 


o 


o 
eg 


THE  fSEW  TOKK 

PUBLIC  umkKi 


TIONS 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  61 

"Will  you  promise  not  to  leave  the  house  till  after 
dark?" 

"I  thought  you  had  more  nerve;  but  so  long  as 
you  haven't  I  reckon  I'll  promise,  for  this  is  bound 
to  be  a  fat  thing,  and  I  don't  want  to  lose  the 
whole  of  it. 

"When  these  country  jays  begin  to  send  their 
stuff  home  I'll  have  ours  shipped,  an'  there's  little 
danger  it'll  be  overhauled,  more  especially  since 
the  old  man  couldn't  get  a  warrant  for  the  only  one 
he  suspects.  It's  a  safe  bet  that  Hazelton  has  a 
pretty  good  idea  who  did  the  job,  an'  if  they  make 
trouble  for  him  he'll  most  likely  tell  what  he 
thinks." 

"There's  no  call  to  be  afraid  of  him  after  he  has 
worked  a  couple  of  days,  for  those  he  ropes  in 
would  do  all  they  could  to  have  him  arrested." 

The  last  portion  of  this  remark  was  almost  indis- 
tinguishable, owing  to  the  fact  that  the  men  were 
walking  away,  and  when  the  sound  of  their  foot- 
steps could  no  longer  be  heard  Teddy  said : 

"Those  are  the  men  who  robbed  Uncle  Nathan's 
store,  an'  I'm  certain  one  of  them  got  my  money." 

"Would  you  know  their  voices  if  you  heard  them 
again?" 

"Sure;  but  why  don't  we  find  out  where  they  are 
going?    It  wouldn't  be  a  hard  job." 

"Are  you  willin'  to  sneak  after  them?" 

"  Of  course  I  am.     Come  on  I" 


63  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

The  boys  arose  softly  and  crept  through  the  flap 
of  the  tent  without  awakenmg  the  sleepers. 

The  night  was  dark  and  cloudy,  and  it  was  im- 
possible to  see  any  very  great  distance  in  either 
direction ;  but  Dan  had  taken  especial  heed  to  the 
course  taken  by  the  men,  and  he  started  off  with- 
out hesitation. 

"  We  ought  to  have  a  club  or  something  to  pro- 
tect ourselves  in  case  they  should  see  us,"  Teddy 
whispered. 

"We  won't  get  near  enough  to  let  them  do  much 
mischief.  Do  you  see  two  sparks  over  there?  They 
are  the  lighted  ends  of  cigars,  an'  our  men  are 
behind  them." 

Dan  quickened  his  pace;  but  he  had  failed  to 
calculate  the  distance  correctly,  and  was  much 
nearer  the  game  than  he  had  suspected. 

"Be  careful  they  don't  see  us,"  he  said,  in  a  low 
tone,  and  in  another  instant  the  boys  were  directly 
in  front  of  the  men. 

Teddy  started  back  in  alarm ;  but  he  was  too  late. 
In  an  instant  the  sparks  flashed  before  his  eyes, 
and  he  fell  to  the  ground  unconscious  just  as  Dan 
succeeded  in  warding  off  the  blow  of  a  fist  which 
was  aimed  at  him. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  63 


CHAPTER  VII. 
THE  CLERK. 

WHEX  Teddy  recovered  from  the  vicious  blow 
which  had  rendered  him  miconscious  he  saw 
Dan  lying  on  the  ground  beside  him,  but  no  one  else 
was  near. 

It  was  as  if  they  had  been  fighting  with  phantoms 
of  the  brain,  save  for  the  fact  that  both  bore  the 
most  indisputable  signs  of  having  been  assaulted 
by  beings  of  true  flesh  and  blood. 

One  of  Dan's  eyes  was  closed  as  if  by  a  violent 
blow,  and  Teddy  bled  freely  from  the  ear,  the  crim- 
son fluid  telling  eloquently  of  the  exact  location  of 
that  superior  force  which  had  caused  so  many  stars 
to  dance  before  his  mental  vision. 

"We  got  through  with  tbat  part  of  it  mighty 
quick,"  Dan  said,  ruefully,  as  he  rose  to  his  feet. 
"There  wasn't  anything  slow  about  the  way  they 
struck  out  after  we  made  fools  of  ourselves  by  run- 
ning into  them,  eh?" 

"I  don't  understand  how  it  all  happened.  It 
wasn't  more  than  three  seconds  from  the  time  I 


64  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

first  saw  them  before  there  was  a  regular  set  of 
fireworks  dancing  in  front  of  my  eyes." 

"It  so  happens  that  they  saw  us  first,"  Dan  re- 
plied, as  he  rubbed  his  head.  "  Those  men  were  the 
thieves,  and  what  I  said  showed  them  that  we  were 
on  the  scent." 

"Where  are  they  now?" 

"You'll  have  to  ask  that  question  of  someone 
else,"  Dan  said,  with  a  grimace  of  pain.  "The  last 
thing  I  know  was  when  the  tall  fellow  landed  one 
square  on  my  nose,  and  before  I  recovered  both 
were  out  of  sight.  We  have  done  harm  rather  than 
good,  for  now  they  know  we  overheard  the  conver- 
sation, an'  we'll  be  mighty  lucky  if  this  is  all  we 
get  before  the. fair  comes  to  an  end." 

"Suppose  we  tell  the  police  now?" 

"What  can  you  say  to  them?  We  heard  those 
men  talking  about  something  which  may  have  had 
nothing  to  do  with  the  robbery,  and  want  to  have 
them  arrested.  On  what  grounds  will  we  ask  for  a 
warrant?  Besides,  if  Nathan  Hargreaves  was  my 
uncle,  I  would  let  him  fight  his  own  battles." 

"But  I  owe  him  eighteen  dollars." 

"What  of  that?  He  wouldn't  take  a  penny  off 
if  you  got  your  head  broke  while  trying  to  find  his 
money,  and  after  all  that  has  happened  I  think  we 
have  good  reason  to  let  him  severely  alone." 

"I'm  willing  to  go  back  to  the  tent,"  Teddy  said, 
as  he  began  to  feel  faint,  and  Dan  aided  him  during 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  65 

the  short  walk,  both  staggermg  as  they  came 
through  the  flap,  meeting  their  host  near  the  en- 
trance, who  asked,  sharply : 

"What  has  been  going  on?  I  counted  on  helping 
a  party  of  boys,  rather  than  giving  my  tent  up  to  a 
lot  of  roughs,  as  you  appear  to  be." 

In  the  fewest  possible  words  Dan  explained  what 
had  happened,  and  in  addition  told  all  the  story  of 
Teddy's  losing  his  money,  Logether  with  the  accu- 
sation made  by  Uncle  Nathan. 

"I'm  sorry  I  said  a  word,"  and  the  proprietor  of 
the  museum  did  really  appear  to  be  grieved.  "  It 
makes  no  difference  whether  you  got  a  whipping 
or  not,  the  guilty  parties  are  here,  and  you  can 
count  on  my  help  in  turning  them  up." 

"That's  what  I'm  afraid  we  sha'n't  be  able  to 
do,"  Teddy  replied;  "we  tried  our  best  to-night, 
and  got  the  worst  of  it." 

"  There  is  plenty  of  time  between  now  and  Satur- 
day. I'll  do  all  any  man  can,  an'  it'll  be  strange  if 
we  don't  get  some  proof  before  the  fair  closes." 

"How  did  you  know  we  were  out?"  Dan  asked. 

"I  saw  you  go,  and  there  was  no  reason  why  I 
should  kick;  but  I  began  to  be  afraid  you  were  up 
to  something  crooked.  Now  I  know  the  whole 
story,  I'll  do  my  best  to  help  you  out  of  the  scrape. 
Go  to  sleep,  and  we'll  talk  the  whole  matter  over 
in  the  morning." 

This  was  good  advice,  but  not  easily  followed. 


66  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Both  the  boys  began  to  feel  the  effects  of  the  blows 
received  from  the  thieves,  and  the  pain  resulting 
therefrom  was  not  conducive  to  repose. 

They  did  manage  to  close  their  eyes  in  slumber 
now  and  then,  however,  and  when  the  day  broke 
Mr.  Sweet,  the  proprietor  of  the  museum,  was 
standing  ready  to  minister  to  their  necessities. 

"You  haven't  got  exactly  the  right  kind  of  faces 
to  bring  very  big  business,"  he  said,  cheerily;  "but 
I  reckon  we  can  make  a  change  in  the  general  ap- 
pearance. Use  this  plentifully  as  a  bath,  and  be- 
fore business  opens  you'll  be  respectable  members 
of  society." 

It  was  certainly  necessary  for  them  to  do  some- 
thing toward  improving  their  appearance.  Teddy's 
ear  was  swollen  to  nearly  twice  its  natural  size, 
and  Dan  had  an  eye  which  was  rapidly  blacken- 
ing. 

Thanks  to  the  application  provided  by  the  owner 
of  the  museum,  these  evidences  of  a  fight  were  rap- 
idly reduced,  and  Avhen  Sam  awoke  they  looked 
little  the  worse  for  wear,  although  he  readily  dis- 
covered that  something  serious  had  happened  while 
he  was  wrapped  in  slumber. 

"What  has  been  goin'  on?"  he  asked,  suspiciously. 

"Nothing  much,"  Dan  replied,  with  a  forced 
laugh.  "The  goat  walked  over  us,  and  we're  kinder 
used  up,  that's  all.  Are  you  ready  to  go  to  break- 
fast?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  67 

It  was  evident  that  Sam  did  not  believe  this  ex- 
planation, but  since  he  said  nothing  more  about  it, 
the  two  actors  in  the  previous  night's  adventures 
held  their  peace ;  therefore  it  would  not  be  in  his 
power  to  betray  any  secrets. 

Breakfast  was  eaten  at  an  early  hour,  and  the 
young  fakirs  returned  to  the  grounds  in  time  for 
Teddy  to  meet  the  first  visitors. 

Under  Dan's  instructions  he  continued  to  cry  out: 

"Here's  where  you  can  get  a  cane  or  a  knife  for 
nothing!  Three  rings  for  five  cents,  and  every 
time  you  throw  it  over  the  mark  you  get  what  you 
ring !  Three  for  five,  and  every  cane  or  knife  you 
ring  is  yours!" 

It  was  yet  too  early  for  the  exhibits  to  be  opened, 
therefore  Teddy  had  the  assistance  of  his  friends  in 
reclaiming  the  rings  thrown,  and  after  nearly  four 
dollars  had  been  taken  in  with  a  loss  only  of  a  ten 
cent  cane,  the  amateur  fakir  began  to  understand 
that  it  would  be  necessary  for  him  to  have  a 
clerk. 

"You're  bound  to  do  a  good  business  this  week," 
Dan  said,  at  about  eight  o'clock.  "Sam  and  I  must 
go  now  to  attend  to  our  own  work,  an'  if  you  see' 
some  fellow  who  can  be  trusted,  I  advise  you  to 
hire  him,  or  there'll  be  considerable  trade  lost,  for 
when  these  people  want  to  spend  their  money  they 
won't  wait  for  you  to  hunt  up  assistants." 

"Yes,  I  reckon  there's  more'n  a  thousand  who 


68  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

are  jest  aching  to  see  how  I  can  row  in  one  of  them 
dandy  boats/' Master  Sam  added;  "but  if  you  get 
into  any  kind  of  a  scrape,  an'  don't  know  how  to 
Ret  out,  come  to  me.  I'll  see  you  through,  no  mat- 
ter how  good  business  is." 

These  two  friends  and  advisers  had  hardly  left 
him  when  a  particular  chum  from  the  Run  came 
up,  and  knowing  he  could  be  trusted,  Teddy  imme- 
diately made  a  trade  for  his  services. 

Tim  Jones  accepted  the  offer  of  ten  cents  on  each 
dollar  which  might  be  taken  in,  and  straightway 
engaged  himself  as  Teddy's  clerk,  promising  faith- 
fully to  account  for  every  penny  he  should  re- 
ceive. 

"I  know  you  are  honest,"  the  proprietor  of  the 
board  said  to  his  friend,  "and  I  want  you  to  help 
me  on  the  square,  so  I'm  willing  to  give  a  fair  price, 
for  I  may  have  to  be  away  a  good  deal  of  the  time." 

"You  mean  that  Nathan  Hargreaves  is  goin' to 
have  you  arrested?" 

"Why  do  you  say  that?" 

"Because  he's  tellin'  around  town  at  the  Run 
that  you  know  who  robbed  his  store,  an'  says  he'll 
have  a  warrant  out,  if  he  has  to  go  to  Waterville 
for  it." 

"That  is  where  he's  making  a  great  big  mistake, 
Tim ;  but  if  he  should  do  anything  of  the  kind  I  ex- 
pect you  to  do  your  best  here,"  and  Teddy  spoke 
very  solemnly,   for  he  really  believed    his    uncle 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR,  69 

would  succeed  in  havino:  him  arrested.  "I  don't 
know  positively  who  broke  into  his  store ;  but  Dan 
an'  I  heard  enough  last  night  to  make  us  believe 
we  can  find  the  thieves  if  we  have  time  to  work  it 
out." 

"  I'd  let  him  hustle  to  get  the  stuff,  if  it  was  my 
pudding,"  Tim  replied  with  emphasis,  and  then  as 
a  party  of  young  fellows  bent  on  spending  money 
approached  the  board  he  began  to  cry,  as  lustily  as 
might  have  been  expected    from    any  old    fakir: 

"Here's  where  you  get  'em,  three  rings  for  a 
nickel,  and  every  cane  or  knife  you  ring  is  yours; 
all  for  the  small  sum  of  five  cents!" 

Convinced  that  he  had  a  capable  clerk,  who  was 
willing  to  work  hard  in  order  to  earn  an  additional 
percentage,  Teddy  contented  himself  with  making 
change  for  the  rush  of  customers,  which  continued 
unabated  until  nearly  ten  o'clock  and  then  came  a 
lull,  when  he  was  able  to  watch  the  other  fakirs 
around  him. 

Up  to  this  point  business  had  continued  in  the 
most  promising  manner,  and  if  it  held  out  as  well 
there  would  be  no  difficulty  in  his  paying  all  the 
money  he  owed,  even  although  there  might  be  no 
very  large  profit. 

"I  only  want  to  get  out  square,"  he  said  to  him- 
self, while  nursing  his  injured  ear ;  but  this  experi- 
ence led  him  to  believe  it  was  possible  to  do  very 
much  toward  helping  his  mother,  and  already  had 


70  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

he  begun  to  dream  of  large  returns,  despite  the  fif- 
teen dollars  out  of  which  he  had  been  swindled. 

It  was  just  when  his  customers  had  gone  to  other 
parts  of  the  ground,  and  after  Teddy  had  figured 
up  the  amount  of  money  taken  in,  showing  that  there 
was  nearly  eight  dollars  in  the  treasury  with  an 
offset  only  of  one  twenty-cent  knife  and  two  ten- 
cent  canes  lost,  that  the  young  fakir  saw  Hazel- 
ton  standing  some  distance  away  beckoning  to 
him. 

"Look  out  sharp  for  things,  Tim,"  he  cried,  as  he 
vaulted  over  the  railing  and  ran  to  the  side  of  the 
man  whom  he  believed  to  be  a  friend. 

"Did  anything  happen  last  night?"  the  latter 
asked. 

Teddy  told  him  the  whole  story,  keeping  back  not 
one  incident. 

"I  heard  quite  so  much  in  the  hotel  where  I 
board.  It  is  Long  Jim  and  his  partner  who  have 
done  the  job  of  which  both  you  and  I  are  accused. 
As  for  your  uncle,  he  isn't  worth  a  minute's 
thought;  but  I'm  going  to  get  to  work,  an'  what  he 
says  may  go  against  me,  so  you  and  I  must  turn 
those  fellows  up  if  we  can." 

"Ain't  your  business  honest?"  Teddy  asked,  in 
surprise. 

"Well,  when  we  come  right  down  to  dots,  I  don't 
suppose  it  is.  Watch  me  when  I  leave  here,  and 
you'll  have  a  chance  to  judge  for  yourself.     I  may 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  7t 

want  to  leave  my  satchel  with  you  for  a  while,  and 
I  reckon  you're  willing  to  take  care  of  it?" 

"Of  course  I  am.     I'll  do  anything  you  ask." 

"Better  wait  and  see  the  game  first,  but  don't 
forget  that  we've  got  to  turn  up  the  two  men  who 
whipped  you  and  your  friend  last  night,  or  stand 
the  chance  of  being  hauled  up  for  the  robbery  our- 
selves." 

"Did  you  say  anything  to  Uncle  Nathan  to  make 
him  think  you  would  break  into  his  store?" 

"No ;  I  only  played  him  for  a  jay,  as  you  shall  see 
me  do  with  two  or  three  hundred  of  these  smart 
fellows  here,  and  he  jumped  down  on  me  because 
there  was  no  one  else  on  whom  to  fasten  the  crime. 
I've  got  to  go,  now.  Don't  forget  to  hurry  back  to 
your  cane-board  when  you  see  I'm  getting  through 
with  my  first  stand,  for  I  want  to  leave  my  stuff 
with  somebody  whom  I  can  trust." 


72  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  YIII. 
THE  JEWELRY  FAKIR. 

TEDDY'S  curiosity  regarding  the  kind  of  business 
which  Hazelton  proposed  to  do  was  so  great  that, 
for  the  time  being,  he  forgot  his  own  venture  in 
watching  this  supposed  friend. 

The  jewelry  fakir  disappeared  amid  the  crowd  for 
a  few  moments,  reappearing  in  a  carriage  drawn 
by  a  fancifully  decorated  horse,  and  the  gaudy 
trappings  caused  the  sightseers  to  stop,  believing 
something  interesting  or  curious  was  to  be  seen. 

Hazelton  introduced  himself  as  an  agent  for  a 
large  manufacturing  company,  and  proposed  to  dis- 
pose of  "samples"  of  their  goods  in  a  manner  which 
would  be  satisfactory  to  all.  He  began  by  throwing 
away  great  numbers  of  cheap  rings  made  to  imitate 
gold,  and  as  the  boys  scrambled  for  them  he  com- 
plained that  the  older  members  of  the  throng — those 
people  whom  he  paHicularly  wished  should  test  the 
merits  of  his  wares — were  getting  nothing. 

"I  can  change  that,"  he  said,  after  hesitating  a 
moment,  as  if  to  devise  some  plan.  Then  holding 
up  half  a  dozen  pairs  of  cuff -buttons,  he  continued  : 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  73 

"I  am  allowed  to  give  away  only  six  of  these. 
What  gentleman  will  advance  twenty-five  cents  for 
one  of  these  sets,  knowing  the  money  will  be  re- 
turned to  him?  By  that  means  I  shall  plane  the 
goods  where  they  will  do  the  most  good." 

In  a  short  time  the  necessary  number  of  purchas- 
ers was  found,  each  having  paid  a  quarter  of  a  dol- 
lar, and  then,  with  great  ostentation,  the  fakir  re- 
turned to  every  one  the  money  he  had  given. 

A  similar  performance  was  gone  through  with  in 
the  case  of  ten  seal  rings,  and  by  that  time  the 
crowd  were  in  a  state  of  high  excitement,  for  they 
were  getting  supposedly  valuable  goods  by  simply 
loaning  this  agent  their  money  for  a  short  time. 

The  fakir  then  held  up  a  lot  of  watch-chains,  ask- 
ing who  would  give  him  a  dollar  for  one,  but  in  this 
instance  he  made  no  mention  of  returning  the 
money. 

Believing  these  also  were  to  be  given  away,  every 
man  scrambled  to  pass  up  his  dollar  before  the  sup- 
ply should  be  exhausted,  and  fully  two  hundred 
dollars  was  taken  in  by  the  generous  "agent." 
Then,  as  the  demand  ceased,  Hazelton  produced 
from  his  valise  what  appeared  to  be  a  heavy  gold 
watch. 

Wrapping  it  in  paper,  and  attaching  it  to  a  chain, 
he  cried: 

"  Who  wants  to  take  another,  and  receive  as  a 
present  what  I  have  fastened  to  the  end  of  it ;  but 


74  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

on  the  condition  that  this  paper  shall  not  be  re- 
moved until  I  give  permission?" 

A  young  fellow  standing,  near  Teddy  made  all 
possible  haste  to  pass  the  fakir  a  dollar  and  receive 
the  prize. 

Then  the  remainder  of  the  crowd  clamored  for 
more  to  be  put  up  in  the  same  manner,  and  Hazel- 
ton  disposed  of  at  least  a  hundred  before  the 
clamorous  throng  could  be  appeased. 

While  this  was  being  done  Teddy  saw  the  young 
fellow  slyly  remove  the  paper  and  examine  his 
goods.  A  look  of  anger  and  disappointment  over- 
spread his  face  as  a  cheap,  empty  locket,  fashioned 
on  the  outside  something  like  the  case  of  a  watch, 
was  revealed  to  view.  Twenty  cents  would  have 
been  an  extravagantly  high  price  for  what  he  had 
paid  a  dollar ;  but  it  was  possible  the  agent  would 
return  the  money  as  he  had  done  in  the  previous 
cases,  and  the  victimized  fellow  held  his  peace. 

Hazelton  was  now  ready  to  take  a  hurried  depart- 
ure. No  more  dollars  were  passed  up,  and  quickly 
seizing  the  reins,  he  said : 

"  I  have  not  represented  these  goods  to  be  gold ; 
but  they  are  a  fine  imitation,  and  Mr.  Nathan  Har- 
greaves,  of  Peach  Bottom  Run,  will  probably  act  as 
my  agent  for  the  sale  of  them.  You  can  get  what 
may  be  wanted  from  him  if  you  need  any  more." 

The  last  words  were  hardly  spoken  before  he 
drove  quickly  through  the  throng,  leaving  his  dupes 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  75 

in  a  daze,  from  which  they  did  not  recover  until  he 
was  lost  to  view. 

Now  Teddy  understood  what  the  "Give- Away" 
game  was,  and  he  also  knew  that  it  was  far  from 
being  honest,  although  Hazelton  had  really  made 
no  promises  which  he  did  not  fulfill. 

Some  of  the  victims  were  angry,  and  vowed  to 
flog  "that  feller  within  an  inch  of  his  life"  before 
sunset ;  others  bore  their  loss  philosophically,  and 
turned  away  with  the  remark  that  the  fakir  was  "a 
cute  one,"  while  the  majority  hastened  off  lest  they 
should  be  suspected  of  being  victims. 

Teddy  returned  to  his  cane-board  feeling  sad  be- 
cause he  had  been  so  mistaken  in  this  particular 
man,  and  had  hardly  reached  there  when  Hazelton, 
on  foot,  came  from  the  side  of  the  fair  grounds  op- 
posite where  he  had  disappeared,  saying  hurriedly, 
as  he  handed  the  boy  a  black  satchel  somewhat  re- 
sembling a  sample  case: 

"Look  out  for  this!    All  my  money  is  in  it." 

Without  waiting  for  an  answer  the  man  was 
gone,  and  the  young  fakir  was  in  no  slight  distress 
at  being  the  custodian  of  so  much  wealth. 

After  considerable  discussion  with  Tim  he  de- 
cided to  leave  it  behmd  the  cane-board  where  it 
would  be  screened  from  view,  and  then  a  crowd  of 
customers  suddenly  appe?.ring,  he  was  so  busy  dur- 
ing the  next  half  hour  that  he  hardly  had  time  to 
think  of  that  which  had  been  intrusted  to  his  keeping. 


76  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Not  until  trade  grew  dull  once  more  did  Hazelton 
appear,  looking  decidedly  well  pleased  with  him- 
self, and,  standing  where  the  passers-by  could  not 
hear,  he  asked : 

"  Well,  what  do  you  think  of  the  give-away  game 
now  ?" 

"It  looks  tome  like  a  swindle/' Teddy  replied, 
bluntly.  "  The  things  you  sold  were  not  worth  half 
what  you  got  for  them." 

"  Six  cents  apiece  for  the  chains,  and  five  for  the 
lockets  is  what  I  pay  by  the  quantity,"  the  fakir 
said,  with  a  laugh. 

"  But  you  made  the  people  think  they  were  get- 
ting real  watches." 

"  I  was  mighty  careful  to  say  nothing  of  the  kind. 
They  thought  they  saw  a  watch,  and  I  told  them  I 
would  make  each  purchaser  a  present  of  what  was 
on  the  chain.  Their  idea  was  to  get  the  best  of  me, 
and  in  that  I  didn't  lose  very  much.  It's  a  case  of 
setting  a  thief  to  catch  a  thief,  and  the  smartest 
man  comes  out  ahead." 

"But  why  did  you  leave  all  the  money  with  me?" 

"Because  it  sometimes  happens  that  my  custom- 
ers make  a  kick,  and  try  to  get  back  their  stuff  by 
force,  so  I  don't  carry  much  cash  in  my  pockets 
while  I  am  on  the  fair  grounds." 

"Of  course  you  are  all  through  now.  You  can't 
expect  to  do  the  same  thing  over  again." 

"  That's  exactly  what  I  shall  do  in  about  an  hour, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  77 

only  in  a  different  portion  of  the  inclosure,  and 
you'll  see  that  I  can  catch  just  as  many  suckers 
as  before." 

Then,  in  order  to  be  rid  of  the  satchel,  for  it 
seemed  as  if  he  was  really  concerned  in  the  swin- 
dle so  long  as  it  remained  in  his  keeping,  Teddy 
said  he  wanted  to  see  what  Dan  and  Sam  were 
doing. 

•'Go  ahead;  I'll  stay  near  by  where  I  can  keep  an 
eye  on  the  stuff,  so  you  needn't  let  that  worry  you." 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  boy  was  not  eager  to 
leave  his  place  of  business ;  but  having  said  so,  it 
was  necessary  to  go,  or  let  Hazelton  understand 
exactly  why  the  remark  had  been  made. 

Cautioning  Tim  to  "keep  his  eyes  open  for  trade," 
he  walked  across  the  grounds  to  the  building  where 
Dan  was  employed,  and  found  that  young  gentle- 
man displaying  the  good  qualities  of  a  peculiar- 
looking  weapon. 

"This  is  the  Model  Pocket  Rifle,"  Dan  was  saying 
to  a  party  of  gentlemen.  "The  shoulder-rest  is  de- 
tachable, and  you  can  buy  an  effective  weapon  for 

a  trifle  over  flfteen   dollars,  as Hello,    Teddy, 

how's  business?"  he  added,  suddenly,  on  observing 
his  friend,  and  the  two  had  an  opportunity  for  con- 
versation, while  the  curious  ones  were  examining 
the  rifle. 

Teddy  gave  a  brief  account  of  what  had  already 
been  done,  and  then  asked : 


78  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Can't  you  get  off  a  few  minutes  and  go  with  me 
to  see  what  Sam  is  doing?" 

It  was  not  difficult  for  Dan  to  get  a  short  leave  of 
absence,  and  the  two  went  directly  to  the  creek 
where  their  acquaintance,  who  proposed  to  make 
himself  the  central  figure  of  the  fair,  was  rowing 
around  in  a  jaunty  looking  craft. 

Sam  vvore  a  sailor's  shirt,  turned  away  at  the 
throat,  and  tied  with  a  black  silk  handkerchief, 
while  on  the  breast  of  the  garment  was  worked 
the  name  "Davis  Boat  and  Oar  Co.,  Detroit,  Mich." 
The  same  legend  being  printed  in  gold  on  the  band 
of  his  straw  hat. 

Sam  had  evidently  been  expecting  his  friends,  for 
he  espied  them  before  they  reached  the  shore,  and, 
rowing  to  the  bank,  insisted  they  should  take  a  sail. 

"Come  on,  it's  all  right,"  he  said.  "It  don't  make 
any  difference  whether  I  carry  passengers  or  not  so 
long  as  the  boat  is  kept  goin',  an'  I  want  to  show 
you  somethin'  fine  in  the  way  of  rowin'." 

Neither  of  the  boys  cared  very  much  about  ac- 
cepting the  invitation;  but  he  was  so  persistent 
that  they  finally  stepped  on  board  as  the  easiest 
manner  of  settling  the  matter. 

"I  tell  you  what  it  is,  fellers,"  he  said,  as  he 
pulled  out  into  the  stream,  "  I'm  jest  makin'  things 
hum  around  here.  These  folks  have  never  seen  any 
kind  of  style  put  into  rowin',  an'  I'm  knockin'  their 
eyes  out." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  79 

"Don't  give  it  to  them  too  strong,  or  they  may 
want  to  keep  you  here  as  an  ornament  af ttr  the  fair 
closes,  and  then  the  rest  of  the  world  would  suffer," 
Dan  said,  with  a  laugh,  and  Sam  replied : 

"You  fellers  can  make  fan;  but  what  I  say  is 
straight,"  and  then  he  made  preparations  for  giving 
an  exhibition.  "  Watch  me  now,  an'  you'll  learn  a 
thing  or  two  about  boats." 

During  the  next  ten  minutes  he  pulled  as  if  in  a 
race,  first  up  and  then  down  the  stream,  until  sheer 
lack  of  breath  forced  him  to  stop. 

"I  hope  you  haven't  set  the  keel  on  fire,"  Dan 
said,  solicitously.  "There's  no  question  but  that 
you  made  good  time,  though  I'm  inclined  to  think 
the  build  of  the  boat  had  considerable  to  do  with  the 
speed.     This  one  looks  as  if  she  would  row  herself." 

"That's  all  you  know  about  it.  If  I  hadn't  been  a 
first-class  hand  at " 

"See  there!"  Teddy  cried,  excitedly,  as  he  pointed 
toward  the  shore.  "That's  the  man  who  got  my 
fifteen  dollars.  Pull  in,  Sam,  an'  pull  for  all  you 
are  worth!" 

The  oarsman  delayed  only  long  enough  to  gaze  in 
the  direction  indicated,  where  he  saw  the  old  fakir 
whom  they  had  met  with  such  great  loss  at  Water- 
ville,  and  then  he  bent  himself  to  the  task. 

"Do  you  believe  it  will  be  safe  to  tackle  him  after 
last  night?"  Dan  asked. 

"  Im  going  to,  and  if  he  don't  get  away  from  me 


80  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

I'll  ask  some  of  the  crowd  to  help  me  have  him  ar- 
rested," Teddy  replied,  grimly. 

The  little  craft  was  a  considerable  distance  from 
the  shore.  Sam  was  so  excited  that  he  only  thought 
of  landing  in  the  shortest  possible  space  of  time, 
and  instead  of  keeping  a  lookout  for  other  boats, 
rowed  vigorously,  as  if  he  were  the  only  oarsman  on 
the  stream. 

Teddy  and  Dan  sat  motionless,  with  their  eyes 
fixed  on  the  man,  and  thus  it  happened  that  no  one 
on  board  saw  a  double  ender,  in  which  were  three 
ladies  and  two  gentlemen,  come  around  a  bend  in 
the  creek  directly  in  Sam's  course. 

There  was  a  shout  from  the  bank,  three  shrill 
screams  of  terror,  and  then  a  crash  as  the  two 
craft  came  together  with  terrific  force. 

The  occupants  of  both  boats  were  thrown  into  the 
water  as  the  frail  timbers  were  splintered,  and  the 
spectators  on  the  bank  acted  as  if  panic-stricken. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  81 


CHAPTER    IX. 
A   BRAVE  RESCUE. 

SAM  was  a  fairly  good  swimmer,  and  as  soon  as 
he  found  himself  in  the  water  he  struck  out  for 
the  shore,  paying  no  attention  to  any  one  else  until 
he  had  assured  his  own  safety. 

One  of  the  gentlemen  in  the  other  craft  did  the 
same  selfish  thing,  while  the  other,  unable  to  help 
even  himself,  was  trying  to  keep  his  head  above 
water  by  resting  his  chin  on  an  oar  and  piece  of 
planking. 

The  women  were  in  imminent  danger  of  being 
drowned,  for  there  was  no  other  boat  near  at  hand 
which  could  be  sent  to  the  rescue,  and  the  throng  of 
spectators  was  in  that  unreasoning  state  of  fear 
and  excitement  which  prevents  people  from  being 
of  any  service  at  such  a  time. 

When  Teddy  and  Dan  came  to  the  surface  after 
having  been  thrown  from  their  seats,  they  were 
within  a  few  feet  of  each  other,  and  the  latter 
asked : 

"Can  you  swim?" 

"Yes;  don't  pay  any  attention  to  me,  but  do 
what  you  can  toward  saving  those  women." 


82  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  Will  you  help  me?" 

"Of  course:  but  I  can't  take  care  of  more  than 
one. " 

Both  boats  had  disappeared,  and  nothing  save 
a  few  fragments  showed  where  they  had  gone 
down. 

Teddy  thought  only  of  aiding  the  straggling 
women,  for  there  was  no  question  that  the  man 
with  the  oar  could  take  care  of  himself,  at  least 
until  those  on  the  bank  should  be  sufficiently  com- 
posed to  do  something  effective,  and  he  swam  to 
the  nearest  struggling  being,  clasping  ber  firmly 
under  one  arm  as  he  said : 

"Don't  make  a  row;  but  keep  perfectly  quiet,  an' 
I'll  take  you  ashore." 

Half-unconscious  as  she  was,  the  woman  at- 
tempted to  grasp  him  by  the  neck,  and  for  several 
seconds  he  had  all  he  could  do  to  pres^ent  her  from 
choking  him  to  death ;  but  after  two  or  three  kicks 
judiciously  administered,  he  succeeded  in  making 
her  understand  that  her  life  as  well  as  his  own  de- 
pended upon  her  remaining  passive,  and  from  that 
moment  all  went  well. 

The  employees  of  the  company  which  had  the 
boats  on  exhibition  flung  into  the  water  several  life- 
saving  arrangements  of  cork  and  canvas,  and  by 
dint  of  much  persuading  he  induced  her  to  trust  to 
one  of  these  while  he  went  to  the  assistance  of  Dan, 
who  had  been  carried   beneath  the  surface  more 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  83 

than  once  by  the  struggles  of  the  woman  whom 
he  was  trying  to  save. 

By  this  time  a  boat  was  brought  up  from  around 
the  point,  and  as  these  two  helpless  ones  were  taken 
on  board  both  the  boys  swam  to  the  rescue  of  the 
last  of  the  party  who  had  sunk  beneath  the  sur- 
face for  the  third  time. 

Teddy,  now  nearly  exhausted  by  his  efforts,  was 
the  first  to  grasp  her ;  but  if  it  had  not  been  for  Dan 
the  struggle  would  have  been  useless,  since  his 
strength  was  so  far  spent  that  he  could  not  have 
brought  her  above  the  water  unaided. 

By  their  united  efforts,  however,  she  was  taken 
on  board  the  boat  in  a  state  of  unconsciousness, 
and  they  made  their  way  to  the  shore  cheered  by 
the  shouts  of  the  assembled  multitude. 

Weak,  almost  exhausted  beyond  the  power  to 
stand  upright,  they  landed  a  few  seconds  in  ad- 
vance of  the  craft,  and  the  reception  received  was 
enough  to  have  nerved  stronger  men  to  a  semblance 
of  strength. 

It  was  not  until  they  were  in  the  private  apart- 
ments allotted  to  the  Davis  Company  that  either 
fully  understood  how  weak  he  was,  and  then  will- 
ing hands  aided  them  to  recuperate. 

Hot  flannels,  warm  drinks,  and  dry  clothes  were 
contributed  by  the  different  exhibitors,  until,  as 
Teddy  said,  they  looked  like  "circus  clowns;"  but 
they  were  in  fairly  good  bodily  condition,  and  it 


84  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

appeared  as  if  the  involuntary  bath  had  done  them 
no  real  injury. 

Outside  the  building  the  people  were  shouting 
themselves  hoarse  in  praise  of  the  two  boys  who 
had  saved  three  lives,  and  Sam  stood  bowing 
acknowledgments  as  if  he  had  been  the  chief  actor 
in  the  thrilling  scene. 

The  difference  between  the  real  and  the  pre- 
tended life-savers  was  readily  understood,  however, 
when  Dan  and  Teddy  made  their  appearance,  look- 
ing decidedly  the  worse  for  their  struggles,  and 
the  cheers  which  went  up  would  have  been  ample 
reward  for  the  most  praise-loving  person  in  the 
world. 

They  looked  like  anything  rather  than  reputable 
employees  as  they  appeared  in  the  borrowed  gar- 
ments; but  as  Teddy  said,  they  couldn't  stay  in  the 
building  until  their  clothes  were  dried,  and  it  was 
absolutely  necessary  he  should  attend  to  his  busi- 
ness. 

Dan's  duties  necessitated  his  remaining  near  the 
creek ;  but  Teddy  was  forced  to  go  back  to  his  cane- 
board,  and  the  crowd  which  followed  him  was  good 
evidence  of  the  money  he  would  make. 

During  two  hours  after  he  returned  from  this 
thrilling  adventure  the  cane-board  had  more  cus- 
tomers than  could  conveniently  be  attended  to, 
and  it  is  safe  to  say  that  he  then  handled  a  larger 
amount  than  he  had  ever  before  seen. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  85 

"At  this  rate  it  won't  take  long  to  square  up 
things,  and  you  shall  have  a  fair  portion  of  the 
profits,  Tim,"  he  said,  when  there  was  an  oppor- 
tunity for  him  to  speak  with  his  clerk  without  being 
overheard  by  the  customers. 

"  It's  a  lucky  thing  for  us  that  them  boats  were 
smashed,"  Tim  said,  devoutly,  as  he  handed  his 
employer  half  a  dollar  to  change.  "We  might 
have  stood  here  with  our  tongues  hangin'  out  all 
day  an'  never  seen  a  quarter  of  this  money  if  you 
hadn't  known  how  to  swim." 

"You  are  right  to  a  certain  extent;  but  I  can't 
take  all  the  credit  of  this  spurt,  because  more  than 
half  the  people  are  trying  to  get  a  cane  for  noth- 
ing." 

"In  the  same  way  they  thought  to  swindle  Mr. 
Helton  out  of  a  watch,"  Tim  replied,  with  a  smile; 
"but  we  won't  fight  about  what  brings  trade  so 
long  as  it  comes  with  the  cash." 

Up  to  this  time  Teddy  had  no  very  definite  idea 
of  how  much  money  had  been  taken  in,  and  he  was 
thinking  it  would  be  a  good  idea  to  ascertain,  when 
a  gruff,  familiar  voice  from  the  rear  asked: 

"Are  the  wages  of  sin  as  much  as  they  should 
be?" 

Turning  quickly  he  saw  Uncle  Nathan,  and 
replied : 

"I  don't  know  exactly  what  they  should  be;  but, 
perhaps,  you  do." 


86  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Whatever  I  may  know  now,  I  remember  that 
it  was  not  allowed  I  should  insult  my  elders  either 
by  plainly  spoken  words  or  insinuations,"  the  old 
man  said,  sternly. 

"Neither  would  I  have  done  such  a  thing  if  you 
had  not  given  me  the  provocation;  but  when  I 
promised  to  pay  three  dollars  for  the  use  of  fifteen 
one  week,  you  did  not  seem  to  think  that  amount 
would  be  the  wages  of  sin." 

"At  the  time  I  had  no  idea  you  would  conspire 
with  others  to  rob  me  of  my  hard-earned  savings." 

"You  know  very  well,  Uncle  Nathan,  that  I 
haven't  done  any  such  thing.  On  the  night  your 
store  was  robbed  I  staid  in  the  house,  and  hadn't 
left  it  when  you  came  to  tell  us  the  news." 

"Every  person  of  your  class  has  some  such 
excuse  ready  in  case  of  an  emergency ;  but  that 
kind  of  talk  will  not  do  with  me.  If  you  meant  to 
do  the  square  thing,  why  was  I  not  told  you  lost 
the  money  I  lent  you?" 

"  Because  I  knew  you  would  raise  an  awful  row, 
thinking  possibly  it  would  not  be  paid  back." 

"Have  I  yet  any  assurance  that  it  will  be?"  the 
old  man  asked,  in  a  fury. 

"Do  you  need  it  now?" 

"I  always  need  my  own." 

"  And  in  this  case,  if  I  pay  you  at  once,  do  you 
think  it  right  to  charge  me  three  dollars  for  the 
use  of  fifteen  lent  two  days  ago?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  87 

"That  was  what  you  promised,  and  the  world 
gauges  a  man  by  the  way  he  keeps  his  word." 

"  I  owe  the  storekeeper  in  Waterville  thirty  dol- 
lars ;  but  I  told  him  you  must  be  paid  first,  and  so 
you  shall." 

"Then  give  me  the  money  now,"  Uncle  Nathan 
snarled. 

"That  is  exactly  what  I  am  willing  to  do,"  Teddy 
replied,  calmly;  "but  if  you  can't  trust  me  I  have 
reason  to  be  suspicious  of  you,  so  give  me  a  re- 
ceipt for  the  amount,  and  the  matter  can  be  settled." 

The  old  man  literally  glared  at  his  nephew  for  an 
nstant,  and  then,  eager  to  have  the  cash  in  his 
possession,  he  wrote  a  receipt,  handing  it  to  the 
young  fakir,  as  he  said,  angrily : 

"Now,  let  me  see  if  you  can  settle  the  bill." 

Since  the  mishap  on  the  creek,  where  Teddy  had 
covered  himself  with  glory,  business  had  been  so 
good  that  he  had  more  than  twice  that  amount, 
and,  emptying  the  contents  of  his  money  bao:  on  a 
board,  he  proceeded  to  select  the  required  sum. 

Uncle  Nathan  watched  him  jealously,  his  eyes 
twinkling  enviously,  and  when  the  money  was 
placed  in  his  hand  he  counted  it  twice  over  before 
delivering  up  the  written  acknowledgment. 

"Are  you  certain  all  this  has  been  honestly 
earned,  Teddy?"  he  asked,  greLvely. 

"How  else  could  I  have  got  it?" 

"  There  are  many  ways.     While   I  would  not  be 


88  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

willing  to  take  my  oath  to  it,  several  of  these  ten- 
cent  pieces  look  very  much  like  those  I  lost  night 
before  last." 

"  Do  you  mean  to  say  I  had  anything  to  do  with 
robbing  your  store?"  and  now  that  this  particular 
debt  had  been  canceled  Teddy  felt  very  brave. 

"  I  know  that  such  an  amount  of  money  has  not 
been  earned  honestly,  and,  what  is  more,  my  eyes 
have  been  opened  to  the  character  of  your  friends." 

"  If  you  mean  Mr.  Hazelton,  he  is  as  much  your 
friend  as  mine,  for  you  were  with  him  all  day  Sun- 
day." 

"That  is  exactly  w^ho  I  do  mean,"  Uncle  Nathan 
replied,  with  provoking  deliberation.  "  I  have  seen 
his  method  of  doing  business  since  I  came  into  this 
fair,  and  know  he  is  nothing  more  than  a  deliber- 
ate swindler." 

"  But  one  with  whom  you  were  perfectly  willing 
to  go  into  partnership,"  a  voice  in  the  rear  of  Teddy 
cried  sharply,  and  the  jewelry  fakir  stepped  di- 
rectly in  front  of  Uncle  Nathan.  "  I  told  you  ex- 
actly how  I  wT^rked,  and  you  offered  to  put  up  even 
money  with  me,  growing  angry  when  I  said  you 
would  be  of  no  use  in  the  business.  If  it  is  SAvin- 
dling,  you  were  mighty  eager  to  have  a  hand  in  the 
same  business." 

"I  don't  want  to  talk  with  you,"  Uncle  Nathan 
said,  as  he  put  Teddy's  eighteen  dollars  carefully 
in  his  pocket. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  8? 

"Then  why  do  you  come  around  here  trying  to 
bully  this  boy?  He  had  no  idea  of  what  I  was 
going  to  do  until  he  saw  me  work,  while  you  under- 
stood the  whole  plan.  Make  any  trouble  for  him, 
and  I  will  get  up  here  and  tell  every  person  who 
comes  along  that  you  wanted  to  be  my  partner." 

"Do  it,"  the  old  man  said,  angrily.  "After  hav- 
ing cheated  so  many  people  out  of  their  money, 
who  will  believe  a  word  you  say?" 

At  the  same  time,  however.  Uncle  Nathan  took 
good  care  to  leave  this  particular  spot,  and  Hazel- 
ton  stepped  to  the  rear  of  the  board  where  he  could 
talk  privately  with  Teddy. 


90  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  X. 
AN    ENCOUNTER. 

FIRST  of  all,  the  jewelry  fakir  wanted  to  hear  the 
particulars  of  the  accident  on  the  lake,  and 
Teddy  began  by  telling  him  the  primary  cause  of  the 
trouble. 

"  I  reckon  all  three  of  us  lost  our  heads  when  we 
saw  that  man ;  I  know  I  did  and  we  w^ere  so  eager 
to  get  on  shore  that  we  paid  no  attention  to  any- 
thing else.     Have  you  seen  Inm?" 

"Who?  Long  Jim?  No;  but  the  boys  say  he  is 
here  somewhere  running  the  swinging  ball  game." 

"What  is  that?" 

"A  wooden  ball  is  swung  on  two  short  uprights 
about  eight  inches  apart,  and  between  them,  in  the 
center,  stands  a  small  peg.  You  pay  ten  cents  for 
the  privilege  of  swinging  the  ball,  and  if  it  hits  the 
peg  w^hen  it  comes  back  after  leaving  your  hand, 
you  get  a  dollar." 

"I  should  think  that  would  be  easy  enough  to  do." 

"Well,  don't  try  it  with  such  an  idea  or  you'll  go 
broke  mighty  quick.  It  looks  simple;  but  it  isn't 
accomplished  very  often." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  91 

''Have  you  done  anything  since  I  left  here?" 

"Yes,  and  scooped  in  as  much  as  I  had  any  right 
to  expect.  I  don't  want  to  spoil  to-morrow's  busi- 
ness, so  sha'n't  make  another  pitch,  but  will  spend 
my  time  trying  to  find  Jim." 

"  What  good  can  that  do?" 

"I  still  count  on  making  him  give  back  your 
fifteen  dollars,  if  nothing  more.  I  reckon  your 
Uncle  Nathan  won't  try  again  to  get  a  warrant  out 
for  us,  and  so  I  sha'n't  bother  my  head  about  learn- 
ing anything  regarding  the  robbery." 

"He'll  make  things  just  as  disagreeable  as  he 
can  ;  there's  no  question  about  that." 

"Well,  let  him,  and  we'll  see  who  comes  out 
ahead.  Trade  is  beginning  to  pick  up,  and  you'd 
better  attend  to  your  customers." 

Hazelton  walked  away,  and  from  that  moment 
until  nearly  nightfall  Teddy  had  all  the  business 
both  he  and  his  clerk  could  attend  to. 

Nearly  every  one  had  something  to  say  about  the 
accident  on  the  creek,  and  the  young  fakir  was 
forced  to  tell  tlie  story  over  and  over  again,  until 
he  really  srot  tired  of  repeating  the  details. 

When  nearly  all  of  the  visitors  had  left  the 
grounds  Teddy  made  up  his  cash  account,  and  the 
sum  total  surprised  both  himself  and  Tim. 

Including  the  amount  paid  Uncle  Nathan  he  had 
taken  in  fifty- five  dollars  and  twenty  cents.  Ten 
per  cent,  of  this  was  paid  to  the  clerk,  and  he  found 


92  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

himself  possessed  of  the  magnificent  sum  of  thirty- 
one  dollars  and  seventy  cents. 

"  At  this  rate  we  shall  he  rich  before  the  end  of 
the  week,"  he  said,  in  a  tone  of  satisfaction. 

"That's  a  fact;  but  it  don't  seem  right  for  me 
to  take  so  much,"  Tim  replied,  as  he  wrapped  the 
five  dollars  and  a  half  which  had  been  given  him 
in  his  handkerchief. 

"That  was  the  agreement,  an'  we'll  stick  to  it." 

"  But  when  you  promised  ten  cents  on  every  dol- 
lar neither  of  us  believed  trade  would  be  half  so 
good." 

"You're  right;  I  thought  if  we  got  one-third  as 
much  business  would  be  booming;  but  that  has 
nothing  to  do  A^ith  our  bargain.  You've  hung  right 
on  here,  without  even  stopping  for  anything  to  eat, 
an'  are  entitled  to  what  you've  been  paid.  Every- 
body says  there'll  be  a  bigger  crowd  to-morrow, 
an'  so  w^e  stand  a  chance  to  make  considerable 
more.  Are  you  going  home  to-night,  or  do  you 
count  on  staying  here?" 

"  I've  got  to  let  the  folks  know  where  I  am,  for 
when  I  left  it  was  allowed  I'd  be  back  by  sunset. 
To-morrow  I'll  come  prepared  to  stay  the  rest  of 
che  week." 

"There'll  be  jDlenty  of  stages  running,  an'  you 
can  afford  to  ride  both  ways  after  this  day's  work. 
I  want  to  send  some  of  this  money  home  to  mother, 
for  it  ain't  safe  to  carry  so  much  around  with  me." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  93 

"Am  I  to  take  it?" 

"Yes,  an'  you  can  tell  her  all  that  has  happened. 
Ask  her  to  come  over  Thursday,  an'  see  for  herself 
that  we're  getting  rich." 

Twenty-five  dollars  was  tied  in  a  bundle  with 
many  wrappings  of  paper,  and  Tim  started  off, 
looking  almost  afraid  at  being  the  custodian  of  so 
much  wealth. 

It  was  necessary  Teddy  should  pack  up  his  entire 
stock  until  next  morning,  and  this  he  proceeded  to 
do  as  soon  as  he  was  alone.  Mr.  Sweet  had  given 
him  permission  to  bring  his  goods  into  the  museum 
tent,  and  his  only  trouble  was  how  everything 
could  be  carried  without  assistance.  Before  he  was 
ready  for  departure,  however,  Sam  came  up,  and 
the  question  of  transportation  was  settled. 

"Well,  how  do  you  feel  now?"  Teddy  asked, 
cheerily,  for  the  knowledge  that  he  had  aleady 
taken  in  nearly  enough  to  pay  his  debts  caused  him 
to  feel  very  jolly. 

"I  allers  get  the  worst  of  everything,"  Sam  re- 
plied, disconsolately.  "You  an'  Dan  made  a  big 
strike  when  you  tumbled  into  the  water,  an'  I've 
had  a  blowin'  up;  come  mighty  near  losin'  my  job 
into  the  bargain." 

"Why?" 

"'Cause  the  boss  says  that  I  was  careless  an' 
reckless,  an'  that  I  couldn't  earn  enough  in  a 
month  to  pay  for  the  two  boats  I've  smashed." 


94  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Are  they  lost  entirely?" 

"  No,  of  course  not.  We  pulled  'em  out  a  little 
while  ago,  an'  it  cost  so  very  much  to  fix  both. 
The  folks  in  the  other  boat  were  as  much  to  blame 
as  me." 

"They  certainly  were  not  keeping  any  better 
lookout,  and,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  I  suppose  I'm 
more  at  fault  than  any  one  else,  for  if  I  hadn't 
sung  out  about  the  fakir  it  wouldn't  have  hap- 
pened." 

"That's  what  I  told  the  boss;  but  he's  chuck  full 
of  foolish  talk  about  the  bravery  he  says  you  an' 
Dan  showed,  an'  is  tryin'  to  get  up  what  he  calls 
a  testimonial  for  you." 

"A  what?"  Teddy  cried,  in  surprise. 

"  I  heard  him  say  testimonial ;  but  if  3^ou  know 
what  that  means  you  can  go  to  the  head." 

"I  don't,  and  I  hope  it  won't  amount  to  anything. 
I've  been  paid  enough  for  what  was  dene  by  the 
boom  it  gave  my  business." 

"  Of  course,  you  an'  Dan  are  bound  to  have  the 
best  end  of  it." 

"Why  didn't  j^ou  stop  an'  do  the  same  thing?" 

"  'Cause  I  had  sense  enough  to  look  out  for  myself 
first." 

"But  you  know  how  to  swim." 

"What  of  that?  It's  mighty  risky  catchin'  hold 
of  people  in  the  water,  an'  I  don't  mean  to  take  any 
chances.     How  much  have  you  made  to-day?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  95 

When  Teddy  told  him,  the  expert  in  rowing 
looked  decidedly  envious. 

"You've  got  all  that  money  in  one  day?" 

"Yes;  but  1  sent  the  most  of  it  home  to  mother." 

"It's  funny  what  luck  some  folks  have,  when 
them  as  knows  the  business  twice  as  well  don't 
much  more'n  earn  their  salt,"  Sam  said,  as  if  to 
himself,  and  before  he  could  continue  Dan  arrived. 

He  wore  his  own  clothes,  and  carried  those  Teddy 
had  left  in  the  boat-house. 

"These  were  dry,  so  I  brought  'em  up.  You 
needn't  carry  back  the  ones  you  borrowed  till  to- 
morrow, so  Sam's  boss  says." 

Then  Dan  asked  concerning  business,  and  bj  the 
time  all  three  had  finished  discussing  this  very  im- 
portant matter  the  knives  and  canes  were  packed 
ready  for  removal. 

Each  boy  took  a  load,  carried  it  to  the  tent  where 
Mr.  Sweet  was  figuring  up  his  receipts  for  the  day, 
and  then  went  to  supper,  returning  half  an  hour 
later  so  tired  that  there  was  no  desire  on  the  part  of 
either  to  do  anything  other  than  sleep. 

The  proprietor  of  the  museum  was  in  very  good 
spirits.  He  had  taken  in  one  hundred  and  six  dollars 
and  eighty  cents,  and  said,  in  a  tone  of  satisfac- 
tion : 

"  I  reckon  this  fair  will  pan  out  all  right.  Trade 
is  bound  to  be  better  to-morrow,  and  Thursday  is 
always  the  biggest  of  the  week.     I  hear  you  boys 


96  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

have  been  distinguishing  yourselves.  Tell  me  about 
it." 

Dan  related  the  incident  of  the  day  very  mod- 
estly, interrupted  now  and  then  by  Sam,  who  was 
eager  to  pose  as  a  hero  also,  and  Mr.  Sweet  ex- 
pressed himself  as  being  well  satisfied  with  their 
behavior. 

"  Chasing  a  thief  and  getting  a  whipping  in  the 
night,  and  then  saving  the  lives  of  three  people 
the  next  day  is  record  enough  for  one  week,  so 
you'd  better  not  try  for  any  more  adventures,"  he 
said,  with  a  laugh. 

Now  that  the  incident  of  the  previous  night  had 
been  spoken  of  so  openly,  it  was  necessary  Sam's 
curiosity  should  be  stitisfied,  and  Dan  was  forced 
to  tell  the  story. 

While  he  was  doing  so,  and  listening  to  the  oars- 
man's comments,  Teddy  had  an  opportunity  to  see 
the  "barker"  and  clown  who  arrived  that  morning. 
Neither  was  a  very  prepossessing-looking  man. 
The/  were  lying  on  the  ground  some  distance  from 
the  boys,  as  if  bent  on  minding  their  own  business, 
and  there  was  no  real  reason  for  an  unfavorable 
opinion  concerning  them. 

But  little  time  was  spent  in  conversation  on  this 
evening.  Every  one  was  thoroughly  tired,  and  each 
sought  for  a  soft  spot  on  which  to  pass  the  night. 

As  before,  Sam  crawled  up  on  the  wagon  to  be 
out  of  harm's  way  vfhen  the  goat  should  be  unfas- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  97 

tened,  while  Dan  and  Teddy  lay  down  in  very 
nearly  the  same  place  as  before. 

''I  don't  fancy  we  shall  hear  many  secrets 
between  now  and  morning,  no  matter  how  many 
men  come  around  here  to  talk,"  the  former  said, 
laughingly.  "It  won't  take  me  two  minutes  to  fall 
asleep,  and  the  noise  that  can  awaken  me  then  will 
have  to  be  very  great." 

Teddy's  only  reply  was  a  yawn,  and  in  even  less 
time  than  Dan  had  mentioned  he  was  wrapped  in 
slumber. 

Shortly  after  the  proprietor  of  the  exhibition 
began  to  make  his  preparations  for  retiring,  and 
the  clown  asked : 

"How  did  that  row  start  this  afternoon?" 

"Half  a  dozen  of  the  village  toughs  tried  to  get  in 
withoui  paying,  and  I  had  to  polish  one  of  'em  off," 
the  barker  replied. 

"You  must  have  done  it  pretty  quick,  for  when  I 
got  out  there  the  thing  was  over,"  Mr.  Sweet  said. 

"The  fellow  was  more  than  half-drunk,  an'  it 
wasn't  a  very  big  job.  They  threaten  to  come  back 
and  clean  the  whole  show  out." 

"Yes,  I've  heard  such  threats  made  before;  but 
never  lost  much  sleep  worrying  about  it." 

Ten  minutes  later  all  the  human  occupants  of  the 
tent  were  enjoying  a  well-earned  rest,  and  the  goat 
had  about  concluded  it  would  be  a  profitless  job  to 
prospect  for  anything  more  to  eat,  when   the  sound 


98  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

of  footsteps  coiiid  have  been  heard  from  the  out- 
side. 

Had  Mr.  Sweet  been  awake  he  would  have  de- 
cided that  these  late  visitors  w^ere  trying  to  find  the 
flap  of  the  tent,  for  they  walked  cautiously  around 
the  canvas  twice,  and  then  a  sharp  knife  was  thrust 
through  the  fabric. 

An  instant  later  Sam  awoke  his  companion  with 
a  yell  that  would  have  done  credit  to  any  Indian. 

Some  one  had  given  him  such  a  blow  as  sent  him 
from  the  seat  to  the  ground,  and  the  remainder  of 
the  party  leaped  to  their  feet  only  to  be  confronted 
by  a  larg:e  party  of  half -drunken  toughs  who  had 
come  to  avenge  the  insult  received  during  the  after- 
noon. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  99 


CHAPTER    XL 
LONG  JIM, 

TEDDY'S  first  thought  when  he  was  awakened  by 
Sam's  yells  was  that  the  officers  of  the  law  were 
commg  to  arrest  him  for  the  robbery  committed  at 
Uncle  Nathan's  store;  but  in  a  very  few  seconds  he 
understood  that  this  was  not  the  case. 

He  and  Dan  had  been  sleeping  some  distance 
from  the  remainder  of  the  company;  therefore, 
when  the  hand-to-hand  struggle  began  they  were 
out  of  it  entirely,  and  owing  to  the  darkness  could 
not  be  seen  by  the  assailants;  but  Sam's  cries 
served  to  show  the  mob  where  he  was,  and  one  after 
another  pounded  him  when  they  failed  to  find  any 
of  the  other  occupants. 

While  one  might  have  counted  twenty  Teddy  and 
Dan  stood  motionless,  undecided  as  to  what  should 
be  done,  while  the  din  caused  by  the  combatants 
and  the  screaming  boy  were  almost  deafening,  and 
then  the  latter  said : 

"We've  got  to  take  a  hand  in  this  row,  Teddy. 
Mr.  Sweet  has  given  us  the  chance  to  sleep  here, 
and  the  least  we  can  do  is  to  help  as  much  as  possi- 


9421 56 A 


100  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

b]e,  for  it  appears  to  me  that  his  men  are  getting 
the  worst  of  it." 

A  broken  tent-peg  was  lying  on  the  ground  near 
at  hand,  and  Dan  added,  as  he  seized  it : 

"  Try  to  light  one  of  the  lanterns  so  we  can  see 
which  is  an  enemy,  and  then  sail  in." 

It  seemed  to  Teddy  as  if  he  would  never  be  able 
to  follow  these  instructions.  He  had  plenty  of 
matches ;  but  in  his  excitement  one  after  another 
was  extinguished  until  he  fancied  half  an  hour 
must  have  elapsed  before  the  wick  was  ignited. 

The  faint  glow  of  light  served  to  show  one  of  the 
intruders  Teddy's  form,  and  the  latter  had  but  just 
succeeded  in  hanging  the  lantern  on  the  center-pole 
when  it  became  necessary  to  defend  himself. 

The  drunken  bully  made  a  lunge  at  him,  which 
he  managed  to  avoid  by  jumping  aside,  and  in  an- 
other instant  he  had  seized  the  man  by  the  waist, 
doing  his  best  to  throw  him. 

From  this  moment  Teddy  knew  nothing  more  of 
the  row  than  that  portion  in  which  he  was  immedi- 
ately concerned.  He  was  able  to  prevent  the  man 
from  striking  by  hugging  close  to  his  body,  and  the 
two  swa^^ed  here  and  there  in  the  effort  to  gain  the 
mastery.  Now  and  then  they  came  in  contact  with 
the  other  combatants,  one  or  both  receiving  a 
chance  blow,  but  no  especial  injury  was  done  to 
either. 

Had  the  man  been  sober,  Teddy  must  have  been 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  101 

overcome  in  a  very  short  time ;  but  as  he  was  far 
from  being  steady  on  his  feet  the  odds  were  about 
even,  and  the  boy  succeeded  in  holding  his  own  un- 
til the  others  had  retreated  or  been  so  disabled  that 
it  was  no  longer  possible  for  them  to  continue  the 
assault. 

Fully  thirty  minutes  had  elapsed  from  the  time 
Sam  first  sounded  the  alarm  before  the  occupants  of 
the  tent  could  count  themselves  as  victors,  and  then 
Mr.  Sweet  and  the  clown  pulled  Teddy's  adversary 
away,  throwing  him  bodily  out  of  the  tent  after  ad- 
ministering summary  punishment. 

During  all  this  time  the  other  exhibitors  who  in- 
tended to  sleep  on  the  grounds  had  been  gathering 
around  the  canvas,  but  no  one  cared  to  risk  his 
precious  body  by  entering  until  it  was  certain  the 
battle  had  been  ended. 

Then  the  tent  was  filled  with  sympathizing 
friends,  who  endeavored  to  ascertain  the  amount  of 
injury  done,  but  were  interrupted  in  the  work  by 
the  proprietor,  who  cried,  angrily : 

"Clear  out  of  here,  every  mother's  son!  You 
didn't  dare  to  come  in  when  it  would  have  been 
possible  to  help  us,  and  there's  no  need  of  you  now. 
We  were  attacked  by  a  crowd  of  men  from  the 
town,  who  proposed  to  clean  the  show  out  because 
we  wouldn't  let  them  in  free,  and  that's  all  there  is 
to  it." 

Not  until  the  last  visitor  had  unv\allingly  departed 


102  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

did  the  little  party  pay  any  attention  to  their 
wounds,  and  then  the  result  of  the  engagement  was 
ascertained. 

The  barker  had  a  broken  nose,  but  it  would  not 
prevent  him  from  doing  a  full  share  of  talking  on 
the  following  day.  The  clown's  eye  looked  rather 
bad,  and  Mr.  Sweet's  cheek  had  been  cut,  but  these 
were  only  trifling  mishaps.  Teddy  had  come  out  of 
the  affray  comparatively  uninjured ;  Dan  showed 
nothing  worse  than  a  bruise  under  the  left  ear,  and 
while  Sam  appeared  to  be  unscathed,  he  declared 
that  he  had  been  pounded  until  every  inch  of  his 
body  felt  like  jelly. 

"You  squealed  fairly  well  for  a  fellow  who  was 
so  badly  done  up,"  Mr.  Sweet  said,  with  a  laugh,  as 
he  proceeded  to  dress  the  barker's  wounded  nose, 
"and  I  reckon  you'll  be  all  right  by  morning.  Light 
some  of  the  other  lanterns  so  I  can  see  what  I'm 
about,  and  during  the  remainder  of  the  night  we'll 
stand  guard,  for  no  one  can  say  how  soon  those 
scoundrels  may  attempt  to  pay  us  a  second  visit, 
although  I  think  they  had  a  full  dose  this 
time." 

How  the  assailants  had  fared  no  one  was  able  to 
form  a  very  good  opinion.  The  general  belief 
among  the  occupants  of  the  tent,  however,  was 
that  they  had  received  such  severe  punishment  that 
there  would  be  no  further  attack  on  this  night,  at 
least. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  103 

When  the  wounds  had  been  dressed,  Mr.  Sweet 
said,  as  he  took  up  a  position  near  the  flap : 

"You  fellows  had  better  try  to  go  to  sleep  now. 
I'll  keep  awake  for  a  while,  and  then  call  some  one 
to  relieve  me.  Dan,  can't  you  borrow  one  of  those 
queer-looking  rifles  you  are  exhibiting,  and  bring 
it  with  you  to-morrow  night?" 

"  I  might  get  the  one  I  use  for  shooting  at  a  tar- 
get; but  you  wouldn't  think  of  trying  to  kill  a  man, 
would  you,  Mr.  Sweet?" 

"  I  could  do  a  good  deal  toward  scaring  them,  and 
if  a  crowd  insisted  on  forcing  an  entrance,  I'd  take 
mighty  good  care  that  one  would  carry  away  a  bul- 
let to  remember  me  by." 

"I'll  bring  the  rifle,"  Dan  replied,  and  Teddy 
whispered : 

"When  I  came  here  to  run  a  cane-board  I  didn't 
count  on  being  obliged  to  do  any  fighting." 

"  I  don't  reckon  there'll  be  much  more  here.  The 
managers  of  the  fair  will  see  to  it  that  those  fellows 
are  put  where  they  can't  do  any  additional  mis- 
chief, for  the  exhibitors  must  be  protected,  and  we 
shall  be  safe  enough,  except  something  else  comes 
up  to  make  a  row." 

Then  the  sore,  tired  party  lay  down  in  search  of 
slumber  once  more,  and,  strange  as  it  may  seem 
after  the  exciting  events,  all  save  the  sentinel  were 
soon  wrapped  again  in  slumber. 

Each  in   turn  was  aroused  to  do    his  share  of 


10^  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

guard  duty  before  morning  came;  but  no  enemy 
appeared,  and  at  sunrise  the  three  boys  went  across 
the  grounds  to  the  boarding-house,  where,  as  Dan 
said:  "The  price  was  twice  as  big  as  the  break- 
fast." 

Teddy  had  his  place  of  business  ready  for  the  re- 
ception of  customers  before  the  first  stage-load  of 
visitors  arrived,  and  when  Tim  came  he  had  al- 
ready taken  in  nearly  a  dollar. 

"What's  the  news?"  he  asked,  as  the  clerk  ap- 
peared, looking  radiant  and  happy  at  the  thought  of 
earning  as  much  money  as  on  the  previous  day. 

"Your  mother  was  pretty  nigh  wild  when  I  told 
her  what  we  took  in  yesterday,  an'  says  she'll  be 
here  sure  on  Thursday.  There's  no  more  news  of 
your  Uncle  Nathan's  goods,  an'  he's  still  tryin'  to 
have  you  arrested ;  but  your  mother  says  not  to  be 
afraid,  'cause  she  has  talked  with  a  lawyer,  an' 
don't  think  there'll  be  any  trouble.  I  told  the  folks 
at  home  that  the  old  skinflint  made  you  pay  three 
dollars  interest  on  the  nioney  what  was  stole,  an' 
everybody  in  town  will  know  it  before  night." 

Tim  was  forced  to  stop  his  story  to  wait  upon  a 
party  of  young  gentlemen  who  were  eager  to  get 
dollar  canes  for  five  cents,  and  the  booths  adjoin- 
ing Teddy's  place  of  business  had  not  yet  been 
opened  when  he  announced  that  there  were  four 
dollars  in  the  money  box. 

"We're  bound  to  have  a  big  day,"  Tim  said,  confi- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  105 

dently.  "The  band  from  the  Run  is  comin'  over  this 
mornin',  an'  if  the  city  people  hear  about  it  you  bet 
they'll  jest  crowd  in  to  hear  the  music.  There'll  be 
of  the  boys  to  see  you,  but  take  my  advice 
an'  don't  let  'em  have  any  rings  on  credit,  for  I 
wouldn't  trust  the  best  of  the  whole  lot  at  fair  time. 
I'm  goin' to  stay  till  Friday;  do  you  s'pose  that 
man  will  let  me  s!  )ep  in  his  tent  with   you  fellers?" 

Teddy  promised  to  inquire,  and  then  advised  Tim 
to  have  a  look  at  the  grounds  before  business  began 
to  be  rushing,  and  the  clerk  was  glad  to  take  ad- 
vantage of  the  proposition. 

He  started  off  with  the  air  of  one  who  owned  the 
entire  inclosure,  and  was  hardly  lost  to  view  amid 
the  fast-gathering  throng  when  Teddy  was  liter- 
ally dazed  by  seeing  Long  Jim,  the  very  man  who 
had  robbed  him  in  Waterville,  lounging  along  to- 
ward his  stand. 

Not  until  the  fakir  stood  directly  in  front  of  the 
boy  did  he  a])pear  to  recognize  him,  and  then  he 
would  have  turned  quickly  away  but  for  the  latter's 
cry: 

"  Somebody  hold  that  man  till  I  get  a  constable ! 
He  stole  my  money." 

Realizing  that  a  flight  across  the  grounds  with 
hundreds  of  men  and  boys  crying  "Stop  thief !"  in 
full  pursuit  would  be  disastrous,  Long  Jim  turned 
to  face  his  young  accuser. 

"What  do  you  mean  by  saying  such  a  thing?"  he 


106  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

asked,  angrily.     "If  you  wasn't  so  small  I'd  make 
you  eat  the  words." 

"  I  was  big  enough  for  you  to  steal  from,  and  I 
want  my  money." 

It  was  only  natural  that  a  crowd  should  gather 
after  such  an  accusation,  and  Long  Jim  looked 
around  for  some  means  of  escape,  but,  realizing 
that  he  could  not  well  get  away  while  so  many  were 
near,  he  stepped  close  to  Teddy,  as  he  whispered: 

"  If  you  say  another  word  I'll  smash  your  face, 
you  young  whelp!  Hold  your  tongue  if  you  want  to 
leave  here  alive." 

"I'll  say  exactly  what's  true.  Give  me  my 
money,  or  I'll  find  some  one  to  have  you  arrested  I" 

"  The  boy  is  a  liar,  and,  what  is  more,  has  just 
robbed  his  uncle's  store,  if  what  they  say  over  at 
the  Kun  be  true,"  the  fakir  said,  excitedly,  as  he 
turned  to  face  the  crowd.  "I  don't  want  to  hurt 
him;  but  I  won't  be  insulted  by  a  thief,  so  the  best 
thing  for  me  to  do  is  to  leave." 

Saying  this,  he  walked  deliberately^  away,  and  the 
curious  ones,  who  a  moment  previous  had  been 
friendly  to  Teddy,  began  to  sympathize  with  the 
man. 

"Don't  let  him  off  I"  the  boy  cried,  starting  to  fol- 
low, and  then  remembering  that  he  would  be  forced 
to  leave  his  wares  at  the  mercy  of  the  crowd,  turned 
back,  while  Long  Jim  continued  straight  across  the 
grounds  unmolested. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  107 

"  It  looks  like  it  was  a  case  of  the  pot  calling  the 
kettle  black,"  an  old  farmer  said,  and  his  immedi- 
ate circle  of  friends  laughed  heartily,  while  the 
younger  portion  of  the  crowd  gazed  earnestly  at 
Teddy,  believing  they  saw  before  them  a  full- 
fledged  burglar. 


108         THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER    XII. 

A  DISCOVERY. 

WITH  feelings  of  mingled  anger,  vexation  and 
disappointment,  Teddy  stood  silent  and  mo- 
tionless for  several  moments  after  Long  Jim  disap- 
peared, striving  to  keep  the  tears  from  his  eyes. 

It  seemed  hard  enough  to  be  swindled  out  of  fif- 
teen dollars,  but  to  be  held  up  as  a  thief  by  the  very 
man  who  had  done  him  the  wrong,  and  to  be  stared 
at  as  a  criminal  by  the  curious,  was  an  aggravation 
of  misfortune. 

Just  for  one  instant  he  made  up  his  mind  to  tell 
the  whole  story  to  the  by-standers,  but  before  there 
was  time  for  him  to  speak  he  realized  that  many  of 
them  would  think  he  was  trying  to  shield  himself 
by  an  untruth  against  just  accusations,  therefore 
he  remained  quiet,  not  making  the  slightest  effort  to 
influence  trade. 

Fortunately  he  was  soon  aroused  from  this  very 
disagreeable  frame  of  mind  by  a  very  pleasing  inci- 
dent. 

The  band  from  the  Run  arrived,  and  to  the  j'oung 
fakir's  surprise  marched  directl.y  to  his  booth,  the 
leader   saying,   in    a  tone    sufficiently  loud  to   be 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  109 

heard  by  every  one  in  the  immediate  vicinity  as 
the  musicians  halted  about  ten  feet  away : 

"  We  have  been  hired  to  play  on  the  grounds  to- 
day, Teddy,  and  left  home  half  an  hour  earlier  than 
the  specified  time  for  the  sole  purpose  of  giving  you 
a  serenade  to  show  that,  whatever  your  uncle  may 
say,  the  folks  at  the  Run  are  positive  there  isn't  a 
shadow  of  truth  in  his  ridiculous  story.  We  know 
what  you  are  working  for,  and  intend  to  help  you 
along  as  much  as  possible." 

Then  the  musicians  began  to  play,  while,  as  a 
matter  of  course,  every  one  who  came  up  wanted  to 
know  why  the  band  was  there  instead  of  on  the 
stand  built  for  its  especial  accommodation,  and 
there  were  people  enough  who  had  heard  the  lead- 
er's remarks  to  explain   matters  to  the   newcomers. 

The  immediate  result  was  that  instead  of  believ- 
ing him  to  be  a  burglar,  the  same  ones  who  fancied 
a  few  moments  previous  that  he  looked  guilty,  were 
now  quite  positive  he  was  a  victim. 

Tim  arrived  while  the  serenade  was  in  progress, 
and  when  Teddy  explained  the  situation,  he  ex- 
claimed, gleefully: 

"Well,  by  jinks !  This  jest  knocks  the  spots  outer 
everything !  Trade  will  hum  after  this,  or  I'm  a 
duffer." 

And  the  clerk's  prediction  was  verified  in  a  very 
short  time. 

When  the  musicians  had  concluded  the  concert 


110  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

they  laid  aside  their  instruments,  and  during  the 
next  ten  minutes  every  man  of  them  threw  rings  at 
the  canes  or  knives  so  rapidly  that  both  Teddy  and 
his  assistant  had  all  they  could  do  to  wait  upon  the 
throng. 

Then,  giving  the  signal  for  the  march  to  be  re- 
sumed, the  leader  said  to  the  young  fakir : 

"Don't  get  discouraged,  my  boy,  no  matter  what 
happens.  If  you  have  any  trouble  it  can't  last  long, 
for  you've  plenty  of  friends  at  the  Kun,  and  after 
what  happened  here  yesterday  there  should  be  a 
good  many  on  the  grounds." 

The  kind-hearted  musicians  marched  away  with- 
out giving  Teddy  an  opportunity  to  thank  them, 
and  as  if  to  atone  for  their  previously  spoken  harsh 
words  the  bystanders  devoted  themselves  with 
unusual  zest  to  the  task  of  winning  a  cane  worth  a 
dollar  by  an  outlay  of  five  cents. 

It  was  nearly  an  hour  before  trade  began  to  grow 
dull  a^ain,  and  both  the  boys  were  quite  willing  to 
rest  a  few  moments. 

"  At  this  rate  we  stand  a  chance  of  getting  rich 
before  the  fair  closes,"  Teddy  exclaimed,  in  a  tone 
of  satisfaction.  "I  wonder  what  Uncle  Nathan 
would  have  said  if  he'd  been  here  to  hear  the 
leader?" 

"I'll  tell  you,''  a  disagreeable  but  familiar  sound- 
ing voice  replied  from  the  rear  of  the  stand  where 
its  owner  had  been  concealed  by  an  adjoining  booth, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  Ill 

and  Nathan  Hargreaves  stalked  into  view  with  a 
comically  tragic  air.  "  Things  have  come  to  a  pretty 
pass  when  a  man's  own  relations,  an'  them  as  he 
has  set  up  in  business  with  his  own  hard-earned 
money,  try  to  bring  scorn  and  reproach  upon  him. 
You  are  a  snake  in  the  grass,  Teddy  Hargreaves, 
an'  not  content  with  helpin'  rob  me,  concoct  such  a 
disgraceful  scene  as  I  have  jest  witnessed." 

"What  could  I  have  had  to  do  with  it?"  Teddy 
cried,  in  surprise.  "  I  didn't  know  they  were  going 
to  give  me  a  lift." 

"Of  course  you  did;  I  ain't  blind  if  I  am  such  a 
fool  as  to  put  you  in  the  way  of  makin'  so  much 
money.  There  wasn't  a  man  in  that  band  who'd 
have  countenanced  the  speech  the  leader  made  if 
you  hadn't  been  workin'  on  their  sympathies.  But 
your  race  won't  be  much  longer.  Don't  think  that 
I've  stopped  ail  proceedings,  for  it  may  be  that 
you're  shoved  into  jail  this  very  day  unless  you 
make  a  clean  breast  of  the  whole  thing." 

"  I've  got  nothing  to  tell  simply  because  I  don't 
know  anything;  but  I  believe  the  same  man  who 
took  my  fifteen  dollars  robbed  your  store.  Dan  and 
I  heard  him  and  another  fellow  talking,  and  in  try- 
ing to  find  out  something  for  your  benefit  got 
knocked  down." 

"What  did  they  say?  Who  are  they?"  the  old 
man  asked,  eagerly,  his  bearing  toward  Teddy 
changing  very  suddenly.   "Tell  me!   Tell  your  poor. 


112  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

old  uncle,  who'll  be  mighty  near  the  poor-house,  if 
he  don't  get  his  own  again." 

This  appeal  touched  Teddy's  heart  immediately, 
but  Tim  said,  half  to  himself,  taking  good  care  Un- 
cle Nathan  should  hear  him,  however : 

"More'n  a  hundred  robberies  like  that  wouldn't 
make  him  poor.  Why,  down  at  the  Eun  folks  say 
you'd  hardly  miss  what's  been  taken." 

"Those  who  make  that  kind  of  talk  are  only  shift- 
less people  with  never  a  dollar  of  their  own,  conse- 
quently they  don't  know  the  value  of  one,"  the  old 
man  cried,  angrily.  "It's  all  very  well  for  a  set  of 
loafers  who  are  mad  with  me  because  I  wouldn't 
give  them"  credit  to  say  such  things.  Do  3^ou  sup- 
pose I'd  spend  my  time  runnin'  around  the  country 
huntin'  for  the  thieves  if  I  hadn't  lost  a  power  of 
money?" 

"You'd  be  willin'  to  run  pretty  far  if  there  was  a 
nickel  at  the  end  of  the  road,"  Tim  retorted,  but  be- 
fore he  could  say  anything  more  Teddy  motioned 
for  him  to  be  silent. 

"Are  you  goin'  to  tell  me  who  the  robbers  are?" 
Uncle  ISTathan  asked,  in  a  wheedling  tone,  as  he 
turned  once  more  toward  his  nephew. 

"  I  don't  know  the  men  whom  I  suspect,  except 
by  sight,  but  it's  more  than  possible  we  may  find 
out  enough  to  warrant  their  arrest  before  the  fair 
closes." 

The  old  man  insisted  on  knowing  at  once,  and  al- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  113 

ternately  coaxed  and  threatened,  but  all  to  no  pur- 
pose. 

Teddy  positively  refused  to  make  a  statement  un- 
til he  had  more  proof,  and  recognizing  the  fact  that 
he  might  hurt  his  own  cause  by  insisting,  Uncle 
Nathan  said,  in  a  most  aiTectionate  tone: 

"  I  must  go  now,  Teddy,  but  I'll  see  you  again  be- 
fore night.  If  you'll  do  all  you  can  to  help  find 
them  scoundrels  I'll  never  say  that  you  had  any- 
thing to  do  with  the  crime." 

"You'd  no  business  to  make  any  such  talk, 
for  you  knew  it  was  impossible  for  me  to  take  any 
hand  in  it,  even  if  I'd  wanted  to  be  a  thief." 

"There's  a  good  deal  of  circumstantial  evidence," 
the  old  man  said,  solemnly,  as  he  turned  to  leave, 
"an' it  stands  you  in  hand  to  do  all  a  boy  canto 
clear  your  own  skirts.  I'm  goln'  to  give  you  a 
chance,  an'  promise  there  won't  be  any  arrest  made 
to-day  at  all  events." 

"There's  a  good  reason  why  you  promise  that," 
Tim  cried,  angrily,  as  Uncle  Nathan  walked  away. 
"You  tried  mighty  hard,  but  couldn't  get  a  war- 
rant, an'  there  ain't  a  justice  of  the  peace  between 
here  an'  Waterville  as  would  grant  one  without  any 
other  evidence  than  what  you  can  say." 

"Don't  make  him  angry,  Tim.  He's  feeling  bad 
about  his  money,  an'  you  can't  blame  him  for  try- 
ing to  find  out  who  has  got  it." 

"  I  don't  blame  him  for  that,  but  what  I'm  kickin' 


114  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

about  is  that  he  keeps  naggin'  at  you  when  there's 
no  reason  for  it." 

"Most  likely  he  thinks  there  is." 

"He  can't;  it's  only  the  wretched  old  skinflint's 
way  of  gettin'  even  with  the  world,  an'  so  he  picks 
on  a  feller  what  he  believes  can't  strike  back." 

"I  wish  I  could  find  out  who  the  robbers  are,  and 
where  the  goods  have  been  hidden." 

"Well,  I  don't.     It  serves  him   right  to  lose   'em, 

an' Hello!  here  comes  that  feller  what  helps 

exhibit  the  rifles !  I  wonder  w^hat  he  wants  at  this 
time  of  day,  jest  when  business  is  beginnin'  to  be 
rushin'." 

Dan  was  evidently  in  a  high  state  of  excitement, 
for  he  forced  his  way  through  the  crowds,  regard- 
less of  possible  injury  to  himself  or  others,  and  did 
not  slacken  speed  until  he  stood  in  front  of  the 
cane-board,  breathless  and  panting. 

"What's  up?"  Teddy  asked,  in  surprise. 

"The  fakir  who  got  your  money,  an'  another 
man,  who  I  think  is  the  same  one  we  heard  talkin' 
outside  the  tent,  have  jest  bought  a  boat  from  the 
Davis  Company.  Sam  saw  'em,  an'  ran  over  to  tell 
me  while  the  bargain  was  bein'  made.  He's 
watchin'  down  there  till  we  can  get  back." 

"I  don't  believe  it  would  do  any  good  forme  to 
say  another  word  to  Long  Jim.  He  went  past  here 
this  mornin',  an'  I  only  made  a  bad  matter  worse 
by  trying  to  make  him  give  back  what  he  stole." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  115 

"  We  ain't  countin'  on  doin'  that,  but  I  believe 
they're  gettin'  ready  to  cart  away  the  goods  what 
were  stole  from  your  Uncle  Nathan.  Perhaps  we 
can  toiler  v/ithout  bein'  seen,  an'  get  on  to  the  whole 
snap.  Could  you  get  off  for  the  balance  of  the  day?" 

And  now  Teddy  was  quite  as  excited  as  Dan. 

"Yes,  an'  so  can  Sam." 

"Are  you  goin'  to  help  find  his  goods  after  all  that 
old  duffer  has  threatened?"  Tim  asked,  impatiently. 
"I'll  do  what  I  can,"  was  the  decided  reply.  "Do 
you  think  you  will  be  able  to  get  along  alone  to- 
day?" 

"I  could  do  it  easy  enough  b}^  hirin'  a  boy  to  pick 
up  the  rings,  but  I  hate  to  see  you  make  a  fool  of 
yourself,  Teddy." 

"You'll  think  different  later.  Come  on,  Dan.  I'll 
be  back  as  soon  as  I  can,  Tim,"  and  then  the  young 
fakir  urged  his  friend  in  the  direction  of  the  creek. 

"It  won't  do  to  go  anywhere  near  the  boat- 
house,"  Dan  said.  "Sam  is  up  the  bank  a  long  piece 
where  the  willows  hide  him.  He's  keepin'  his  eye 
on  the  craft  they  bought,  so  it  can't  be  taken  away 
without  his  seein'  it." 

By  mingling  with  the  crowd  it  was  possible  to 
make  their  way  to  the  desired  spot  without  being 
seen,  save  by  those  with  whom  they  came  into  im- 
mediate contact,  and  in  a  few  moments  the  watcher 
was  joined  by  his  friends. 

"  Now  I  want  you  fellers  to  let  me  manage  this 


116  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

case,"  Sam  said^  pompously.  "I  know  more  'bout 
detective  business  than  both  of  you  put  together, 
an'  if  you'd  only  told  me  what  was  up  the  other 
night  we'd  had  the  whole  thing  settled." 

"Have  you  seen  the  men?"  Dan  asked,  impa- 
tiently. 

"Lots  of  times.  The  old  fakir  is  loafin'  around 
close  by  the  landin',  an'  the  other  one  must  'a  gone 
off  for  somethin'.  The  Davis  Company  told  me  I 
could  take  any  of  the  boats,  an'  the  minute  the 
thieves  start  we'll  jump  right  on  their  trail." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FA  IP.  117 


CHAPTER    XIII. 
AMATEUR  DETECTIVES. 

IT  was  fated  that  the  thrilling  work  of  running 
down  and  capturing  the  thieves  should  not  be 
begun  until  after  considerable  delay. 

"Now,  I  wonder  what  he  is  up  to?"  Dan  said, 
when  it  was  no  longer  possible  to  see  the  supposed 
burglar. 

"Why  is  it  that  you  can't  let  me  do  this  thing?" 
Sam  asked,  angrily.  "If  you  keep  meddlin' we'll 
never  fix  matters." 

"I  don't  see  that  I'm  interfering,"  Dan  replied,  in 
surprise. 

The  three  boys  watched  this  one  particular  boat 
in  silence  for  ten  minutes  or  more,  seeing  Long 
Jim  now  and  then,  and  just  as  they  believed  he 
was  about  to  step  on  board  the  man  walked  toward 
the  exhibition  buildings,  and  was  soon  lost  to  view 
amid  the  throng  of  people. 

"You  was  gettin'  ready,  too,  I  could  tell  that  by 
your  eye." 

"I'll  have  to  give  in  that  you're  the  smartest 
feller  in  this  section  of  the  country,  Sam,  an'  that's 
a  fact." 


118  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Of  course  it  is,"  the  amateur  detective  replied, 
complacently,  thinking  Dan's  sarcasm  was  really 
praise.  "  If  I  have  my  own  way  I  can  turn  up  the 
biggest  thief  that  ever  walked  on  tAvo  legs ;  but  you 
mustn't  bother  me,  or  things  may  go  wrong." 

If  the  matter  had  not  been  so  serious  to  him 
Teddy  would  have  laughed  long  and  often  at  the 
dignity  and  superior  knowledge  assumed  by  this 
fellow,  who,  since  he  made  his  acquaintance,  had 
done  nothing  more  difficult  than  to  get  himself  into 
trouble;  but,  under  the  circumstancs,  he  was  so 
deeply  interested  in  the  outcome  of  the  business 
that  there  was  no  room  in  his  mind  for  mirth. 

"Dan,"  he  said,  "let  you  and  I  walk  around  two 
or  three  minutes.  We'll  stay  close  by  so  that  Sam 
can  givf^  us  the  signal  in  case  the  men  show  up,  and 
we  may  find  Hazelton." 

"Don't  tell  him  what  we're  doin',"  the  amateur 
detective  cried,  sharply. 

"Why  not?" 

"  'Cause  it's  likely  he'll  want  to  meddle  with  our 
business,  an'  then  my  work  will  be  spoiled." 

"I  won't  say  a  word  to  him  until  after  seeing  you 
again,"  Teddy  replied  as  he  led  Dan  away,  and 
added  when  they  were  where  it  would  be  impossi- 
ble for  Sam  to  hear  them:  "See  here,  it's  foolish  for 
us  to  think  of  trying  to  follow  those  men  if  he's  to 
be  allowed  to  make  a  fool  of  himself.  With  him 
believing  he's  the  greatest  detective  in  the  country, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  119 

something  wrong  is  sure  to  happen,  an'  we  may 
never  get  another  chance  of  finding  out  about  the 
burglary." 

"Don't  fret  about  that,"  Dan  replied,  confidently. 
"It  won't  do  any  harm  to  let  him  swell  a  little  now 
while  he's  keeping  watch ;  but  when  the  real  work 
begins  it  won't  take  long  to  sit  on  him." 

"Then  there  will  be  a  row." 

"I'll  attend  to  his  case;  but  I  don't  think  there'll 
be  anything  for  us  to  do  yet  awhile.  The  men  are 
evidently  in  no  hurry  to  leave,  and  most  likely 
intend  to  wait  till  the  crowd  begins  to  go." 

"Then  why  should  all  three  of  us  stay  on  watch?" 

"  We  won't.  Go  back  to  your  cane-board,  and  I'll 
tell  Sam  to  come  for  you  when  the  burglars  put  in 
an  appearance.  He'll  have  time  to  do  that,  an' 
while  he's  gettin'  a  boat  ready  you  can  come  for 
me." 

"Will  it  be  safe  to  trust  him?" 

"Yes,  indeed,"  Dan  replied,  with  a  laugh.  "He's 
havin'  an  awful  good  time  thinkin'  he's  the  great- 
est detective  in  the  world,  and  couldn't  be  hired  to 
leave  that  chimp  of  willows  so  long  as  the  men 
keep  out  of  sight." 

Teddy  was  not  so  confident,  and  insisted  on  going 
back  with  Dan  while  the  arrangement  was  made. 

When  the  matter  was  explained  Sam  appeared  to 
be  perfectly  satisfied. 

"That's  all  right,"  he  said,  readily.     "I  can  see 


120  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

to  this  thing  alone ;  but  I'll  let  you  fellers  know 
the  minute  anything  happens.  Don't  tell  any  of 
the  constables  what  I'm  up  to,  or  they'll  want  to 
have  a  finger  in  the  pie." 

Convinced  that  he  would  be  informed  of  any 
change  in  the  situation,  Teddy  returned  to  the 
cane-board  just  in  time  to  aid  Tim  in  attending  to 
a  rush  of  customers  who  were  spending  their  money 
liberally. 

"What  made  you  come  back?"  the  clerk  asked, 
in  surprise.  "  I've  hired  a  feller  for  a  quarter  to 
pick  up  rings,  an'  am  gettin'  along  first  rate." 

Teddy  briefly  explained  the  condition  of  affairs, 
and  then  there  was  little  opportunity  for  conversa- 
tion until  considerably  past  noon,  when  trade 
dropped  off  very  decidedly  for  a  while. 

In  order  that  he  rnight  have  a  glimpse  of  the 
other  fakirs  and  rest  himself  at  the  same  time, 
Tim  was  sent  to  see  if  Sam  was  yet  at  his  self- 
selected  post  of  duty,  and  Teddy  took  advantage  of 
the  opportunity  to  ascertain  the  amount  of  his 
receipts. 

To  his  great  surprise  he  found  nearly  forty  dol- 
lars in  the  money-box,  and  from  this  he  took  thirty 
with  which  to  pay  the  merchant  in  Waterville  who 
had  given  him  credit  for  his  stock. 

"  It  has  turned  out  to  be  a  mighty  good  venture, 
even  if  Aunt  Sarah  was  so  sure  I'd  make  a  fool  of 
myself  by  tryin'  it.    All  the  money  I  make  now  will 


n 


e=^»J^iiiiiiiiililiiliiii.,i.i.;a3,iiii...J 


THE  NEW  YORK 
PUBLIC  IJ'^RARY 


TILDTN'   ''    "N'r\-\T!ONS 
H  L 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  121 

be  clear  profit,  and  it  looks  as  if  I'd  be  able  to  help 
mother  quite  a  bit." 

"Well,  how  is  business?''  a  voice  asked,  in  a 
cheery  tone,  and,  looking  up,  Teddy  saw  his  sole 
remaining  creditor. 

"I'm  glad  you've  come,"  he  cried,  bundling  the 
thirty  dollars  up  in  a  piece  of  paper.  "I'd  jest 
counted  this  out  for  you,  an'  when  you  take  it  I'll 
be  free  from  debt." 

"But  I  don't  want  the  money,"  the  merchant 
replied.  "I  only  came  around  to  see  if  you  were 
successful." 

"I've  already  made  more  than  I  reckoned  on,  an' 
it'll  be  a  favor  if  you  take  this,  'cause  I  don't  like 
to  have  so  much  around." 

Then  Teddy  explained  the  condition  of  his  busi- 
ness affairs,  not  forgetting  to  tell  of  the  accusation 
made  against  him  by  his  Uncle  Nathan,  and  the 
merchant  said,  as  he  concluded: 

"  I  heard  the  whole  story,  my  boy,  and  have 
already  talked  with  Mr.  Hargreaves,  whom  I  met  a 
few  moments  ago.  I  do  not  think  he  can  do  any- 
thing to  you,  because  you  have  made  many  friends 
here.  The  money  I  will  take,  as  it  is  not  well  to 
keep  it  where  it  might  be  stolen ;  but  can  give  you 
no  receipt  until  I  get  home." 

"That'll  be  all  right,"  Teddy  replied,  contentedly; 
"you  trusted  me  with  the  goods,  an'  it  would  be 
funny  if  I  couldn't  wait  for  a  receipted  bill.     It's 


122  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

through  you  that  I've  had  the  chance  to  make  so 
much,  an'  I  want  you  to  know  I  feel  grateful." 

"I  believe  that,  and  am  more  than  pleased  to 
have  put  you  in  the  way  of  getting  a  start  in  the 
world.  Come  to  see  me  when  the  fair  closes,  and  it 
is  possible  I  may  show  you  an  opportunity  of  learn- 
ing to  be  a  merchant  on  a  large  scale,  rather  than 
a  fakir  whose  method  of  getting  a  living  is  very 
precarious,  regardless  of  the  fact  that  he  some- 
times makes  very  great  profits." 

It  can  be  readily  understood  that  Teddy  accepted 
the  invitation,  and  then,  trade  commencing  once 
more,  the  gentleman  walked  away,  leaving  the 
proprietor  of  the  cane-board  with  the  pleasing  con- 
sciousness that  he  was  free  from  debt,  and  with 
quite  a  large  amount  of  money  in  his  mother's 
keeping. 

Tim  returned  very  shortly  after  the  merchant's 
departure,  and  reported  that  Sam  was  still  on 
duty. 

"The  boat  hasn't  been  moved  nor  have  the  men 
showed  up  again,"  he  said.  "That  feller  acts  as  if 
he  thought  he  was  bigger  than  the  President.  He 
told  me  he  could  be  the  greatest  detective  that  ever 
lived  if  it  wasn't  that  folks  made  him  show  off  at 
rowin'  'cause  he  had  so  much  style  about  him.  I 
don't  think  he's  so  very  wonderful;  but,  of  course, 
I  never  saw  many  out  an'  out  detectives." 

"And  you  don't  see  one  when   you  met  him.     I'm 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  128 

sure  he'll  get  Dan  an'  me  in  trouble  before  this 
thing  is  ended." 

"Then  why  don't  you  let  him  go  off  alone?  That's 
what  I'd  do  with  such  a  chump." 

"I  can't,  because " 

The  sentence  was  not  concluded,  for  at  that 
moment  Dan  came  up  at  full  speed. 

"They're  gettin'  ready  to  start!"  he  said,  breath- 
lessly. "I  saw  'em  go  by  the  buildin',  an'  run  over 
to  tell  Sam  that  I'd  fetch  you.  Our  boat  is  a  long 
distance  up  the  creek,  an'  we'll  have  to  hurry,  or 
run  the  chance  of  missing  their  craft." 

There  was  no  delay  on  Teddy's  part,  despite  the 
misgivings  he  had  regarding  Sam. 

One  parting  injunction  to  Tim  on  the  subject  of 
business,  and  then  he  followed  Dan  at  full  speed 
toward  the  creek  on  such  a  course  as  would  bring 
them  fully  a  quarter  of  a  mile  above  the  boat- 
house  outside  the  fair  grounds. 

Sam  had  made  everything  ready  for  the  journey 
by  the  time  they  arrived,  and  was  so  excited  that 
he  could  no  longer  speak  of  his  own  wonderful 
powers  as  a  thief-catcher. 

"One  of  you  fellers  had  better  row  while  I  steer," 
he  said,  seating  himself  in  the  stern  sheets  and 
taking  the  tiller-ropes.  "If  they  see  the  way  I 
handle  the  oars  they'll  know  exactly  who's  after 
them,  an'  then  the  game'll  be  up." 

"Don't  worry  yourself  about  that,"  Dan  replied. 


124  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

calmly.  "Neither  Teddy  nor  I  knows  anything 
about  a  boat,  except  it  may  be  to  steer,  so  you'll 
have  to  hump  yourself." 

Sam  grumbled  considerably  about  taking  so 
many  risks ;  but  he  finally  moved  over  to  the  bow 
and  his  companions  took  their  seats  aft. 

"1  won't  put  any  style  to  it,  an',  perhaps,  that'll 
keep  'em  from  knowin'  I'm  on  their  trail,"  he  said, 
and  immediately  began  rowing  in  such  a  bungling 
fashion  that  Dan  said,  sharply : 

"Look  here,  if  you're  goin'  to  pull  this  boat,  do 
it,  or  we'll  go  back.  At  this  rate,  you'll  have  every- 
body at  the  fair  watching  to  see  what  kind  of 
chumps  have  been  allowed  to  risk  their  lives. 
We've  got  no  time  to  spare,  either ;  for  we  must 
get  on  the  other  side  of  the  creek  where  it  will  be 
possible  to  watch  the  men  without  getting  too 
near." 

"I'll  take  care  of  that  part  of  the  business,"  Sam 
replied,  loftily,  and  Dan  immediately  put  into  oper- 
ation his  plan  of  "  sitting"  on  the  amateur  detective. 

"You  do  your  share,  and  that  will  be  enough. 
Teddy  and  I  propose  to  take  a  hand  in  this  our- 
selves." 

"Then  I  might  as  well  go  back." 

"You  can,  if  you  want  to." 

It  so  chanced  that  he  had  no  such  desire,  and 
with  the  air  of  one  whose  feelings  have  been  deeply 
wounded  he  rowed  steadily  on,  Dan  steering,  until 


a. 


Tf: 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  125 

they  were  where  it  was  possible  to  have  a  full  view 
of  a  long  stretch  of  the  creek. 

"There  they  are!"  Teddy  said,  pointing  down 
stream  to  where  a  boat  was  being  pulled  close  to 
the  left  bank.  "They  have  stopped,  and  it  looks  as 
if  something  was  being  taken  on  board!" 

"It  is  a  portion  of  the  goods  they  stole!"  Dan 
cried.  "Stop  rowing,  Sam,  and  if  nothing  happens 
we'll  soon  know  where  the  whole  lot  is  to  be  hid- 


126  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
THE  RENDEZVOUS. 

THAT  Dan's  surmise  was  correct  could  be  seen  a 
few  moments  after,  while  the  boys,  partially  con- 
cealed by  the  overhanging  bank,  watched  the  pro- 
ceedings with  but  little  danger  of  being  discovered. 

On  the  shore  were  a  number  of  packages  in  a 
cart,  and  these  the  supposed  burglars  loaded  into 
the  boat  with  the  utmost  haste. 

If  this  lot  comprised  all  that  had  been  taken  from 
Uncle  Nathan  his  loss  must  have  been  greater  than 
he  stated,  and  Teddy  said,  after  watching  several 
moments  in  silence  : 

"  I  reckon  this  io  only  part  of  what  they  took ;  but 
I'm  puzzled  to  know  how  it  could  have  been 
brought  so  far.  The  idea  of  carting  goods  over  here 
to  find  a  place  in  which  to  hide  them  is  a  queer  one, 
when  all  the  thieves  had  to  do  was  slip  down  the 
river  in  a  skiff,  an'  before  morning  they'd  be 
beyond  reach  of  the  officers." 

It  surely  was  strange  that  the  men  should  have 
done  so  much  useless  labor,  and  the  only  solution 
to  the  apparent  mystery  was  offered  by  Sam,  who 
said,  with  an  air  of  superior  wisdom: 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  127 

"They've  done  it  to  throw  me  off  the  scent.  That 
fakir  we  saw  in  Waterville  must  have  known  who 
I  was." 

"  How  does  it  happen  ho  had  the  nerve  to  come 
here  Avhen  he  knew  you  counted  on  showing  the 
people  who  visited  this  fair  your  skill  in  rowing?" 
Dan  asked,  with  a  laugh. 

"I  reckon  he  didn't  think  I  was  tellin'  the  truth." 

It  was  useless  to  attempt  to  make  Sam  acquainted 
with  himself.  He  had  such  a  remarkable  idea  of 
his  own  abilities,  despite  the  scrapes  he  was  con- 
stantly getting  into,  that  the  most  eloquent  orator 
would  have  been  unable  to  convince  him  he  was 
anything  more  than  a  very  egotistical  boy,  with 
little  save  his  vanity  to  recommend  him  to  the 
notice  of  the  general  public. 

In  five  minutes  the  boat  at  the  opposite  bank  had 
received  as  much  of  a  cargo  as  her  owners  wished 
to  carry,  and  then  the  men  began  to  row  leisurely 
down  the  river. 

"IN'ow,  go  slow,  Sam,  and  don't  turn  around  to 
look,  or  they  may  suspect  we  are  following  them," 
Dan  said,  warningly.  "  I'll  keep  you  posted  about 
what  they  are  doing,  and  you  can  tell  us  afterward 
vdiat  ought  to  have  been  done.  Pull  moderately, 
for  we  don't  want  to  get  very  near  while  it  is  light 
enough  for  them  to  see  us." 

The  chase  was  not  a  long  one.  By  keeping  the 
boat's  head  to  the  bank  and  moving  leisurely  as 


128  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

boys  who  were  bent  only  on  pleasure  might  have 
done,  the  pursuers  evidently  caused  no  suspicions 
as  to  their  purpose,  and  after  about  a  mile  had  been 
traversed  the  burglars  turned  up  a  narrow  water- 
way which  led  to  a  barn  or  shed  built  on  the  mead- 
ows for  the  storing  of  marsh  hay. 

There  were  plenty  of  ditches  near  at  hand  into 
which  the  amateur  detectives  could  run  their  craft 
unobserved,  and  as  the  pursued  left  the  creek  Dan 
steered  into  one  of  these. 

Here  their  heads  hardly  came  above  the  bank, 
and  all  three  could  see  the  men  carrying  their  cargo 
to  the  building. 

"We've  got  'em  now,"  said  Sam,  triumphantly, 
as  the  first  of  the  packages  was  taken  on  shore, 
"an'  the  sooner  we  nab  both  the  better." 

"How  do  you  intend  to  set  about  such  a  job?" 
Teddy  asked. 

"Go  right  up  an'  tell 'em  we've  been  on  their 
track." 

"And  in  less  than  two  minutes  you  would  get  a 
worse  pounding  than  the  toughs  gave  you  last 
night." 

Sam  appeared  to  realize  the  truth  of  this  state- 
ment, for  he  had  no  further  suggestions  to  offer, 
and  Dan  said,  after  some  reflection : 

"  I  think  the  best  thing  we  can  do  will  be  to  go 
back  to  the  fair.  If  those  fellows  find  us  here  the 
jig  will  be  up;  but  it  isn't  likely  they've  got  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  129 

whole  of  their  plunder  with  them,  and  intend  to 
come  here  again.  We'll  talk  with  some  one  and 
find  out  a  good  plan,  or  keep  our  eyes  peeled  to 
learn  what  they  mean  to  do  with  the  goods.  If 
they  propose  simply  to  hide  them  until  there  is  a 
chance  to  get  the  lot  away  safely,  we  shall  have 
the  key  to  the  situation  an'  can  take  plenty  of  time 
deciding  what  should  be  done." 

Sam  did  not  again  propose  to  make  any  attempt 
at  intimidating  the  men,  and  Teddy  thought  Dan's 
scheme  a  wise  one. 

"They'll  come  here  more  than  once  before  the 
week  is  ended ;  you  know  they  spoke  of  moving  the 
stuff  when  the  exhibitors  got  ready  to  leave,  an' 
we'd  better  go  back  to  the  grounds  before  those 
fellows  have  finished  their  work." 

Sam  pulled  out  of  the  water-course  into  the  creek 
without  a  murmur;  but  when  they  were  on  the 
way  back,  and  he  felt  at  liberty  to  display  his  true 
"style,"  courage  returned. 

"  I  knew  you  fellers  wasn't  any  good  on  detective 
work,"  he  said,  scornfully.  "If  I'd  had  charge  of 
the  case  we  should  have  them  men  tied  hand  an' 
foot  in  the  bottom  of  this  boat." 

"How  would  you  have  got  'em  there?"  Dan 
asked. 

"That's  my  business.  Jest  because  I've  let  you 
into  this  thing  there's  no  reason  why  I  should  give 
all  my  secrets  away,  is  there?" 


130  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  Not  a  bit  of  it,  an'  you  keep  them  locked  up  in 
your  heart,  for  if  Teddy  an'  I  knew  the  plans  we 
might  get  into  a  bad  scrape." 

"Well,  what  are  you  goin'  to  do  now?" 

"Nothing  until  after  we  have  talked  with  those 
who  know  more  than  we  do  about  Scich  things." 

Sam  immediately  relapsed  into  silence.  His  supe- 
rior knowledge  had  been  scorned,  and  he  proposed 
to  let  his  companions  understand  that  he  was  not 
pleased  with  them. 

By  the  time  the  boys  reached  the  bend  in  the 
creek  they  could  see  the  boat  in  which  were  Long 
Jim  and  his  companion,  half  a  mile  behind,  and 
Dan  said: 

"Those  fellows  don't  know  me.  When  we  land 
you  and  Sam  had  better  keep  out  of  sight,  while  I 
try  to  find  out  where  they  go  after  striking  the  fair 
ground." 

"All  right.  It's  time  I  helped  Tim,  an' you'll 
come  to  the  cane-board  if  there  is  anything  to  tell." 

"So  I  don't  amount  to  anything,  eh?"  Sam  asked, 
sulkily. 

"  Of  course  you  do ;  but  it  would  be  foolish  to 
make  a  show  of  yourself  to  Long  Jim,  who  would 
remember  you.  Keep  rowing  around  in  the  boat  as 
if  you  were  at  work,  and  there'll  be  no  chance  for 
suspicion." 

By  this  time  the  little  craft  was  at  the  landing 
stage  of  the  boat-house,  and  two  of  the  party  leaped 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  131 

out,  leaving  the  third  feeling  that  he  had  been  un- 
justly deprived  of  a  very  large  portion  of  his  rights. 

"If  them  fellers  think  they're  goin' to  get  the 
best  of  me  they're  makin'  a  big  mistake,  an'  I'll 
show  'em  so  before  night.  They  don't  know  any 
more  about  bein'  detectives  than  a  cat;  but  both 
will  be  mightily  surprised  before  mornin',  or  I'm 
mistaken." 

Then,  instead  of  rowing  around  the  creek  as 
Dan  had  suggested,  Sam  pulled  out  into  the  middle 
of  the  stream,  looking  wondrous  wise  and  deter- 
mined as  he  awaited  the  coming  of  those  whose 
secret  he  had  partially  discovered. 

Meanwhile  Teddy  and  Dan,  without  the  slightest 
suspicion  of  what  their  friend  proposed  to  do,  sep- 
arated at  the  landing  stage,  the  former  making  all 
haste  to  reach  his  cane-board,  where  he  found  Tim 
doing  a  thriving  business,  and  standing  near  by 
was  Hazelton. 

"Where  have  you  been?"  the  jewelry  fakir 
asked,  solicitously.  "  I've  come  here  two  or  three 
times  without  finding  you,  and  had  almost  begun 
to  believe  old  Nathan  succeeded  in  getting  a  war- 
rant." 

Teddy  was  undecided  as  to  whether  he  should  tell 
this  acquaintance  of  all  he  had  seen  or  not;  but, 
after  some  deliberation,  and  in  view  of  the  fact 
that  he  also  had  been  accused  of  the  burglary,  con- 
cluded to  do  so. 


132  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"We've  found  out  where  Long  Jim  is  hiding  the 
stuff  he  stole  from  my  uncle,"  he  said,  and  then 
explained  what  had  been  done  during  the  last 
hour. 

Hazelton  was  surprised  that  so  much  information 
had  been  gained ;  but  he  was  able  to  cause  Teddy 
an  equal  amount  of  astonishment. 

"I  don't  believe  the  packages  you  saw  came  from 
the  old  man's  store.  I  heard,  about  two  hours  ago, 
that  a  store  here  in  town  was  robbed  last  night, 
and  it  isn't  dead  sure,  after  your  uncle's  accusa- 
tions, and  what  I  have  done  on  the  fair  grounds, 
that  I  sha'n't  be  arrested  on  suspicion.  Most  likely 
the  goods  taken  down  the  creek  were  stolen  here; 
but  I  don't  understand  why  those  fellows  should 
work  so  boldly." 

"  Probably  they  think,  as  one  of  them  said  the 
other  night,  while  so  many  articles  are  being  car- 
ried to  and  fro." 

"  Very  likely  that  may  be  true,  and  now  comes 
the  question  of  what  shall  be  done  regarding  the 
information  you  have  gained.  I  stand  in  a  mighty 
delicate  position,  and,  quite  naturally,  want  to  save 
myself,  if  possible,  for  even  an  arrest  when  there  is 
little  or  no  proof,  ain't  to  be  contemplated  calmly." 

"  You  ought  to  know  better  than  I  how  we  should 
go  to  work.  Dan  an'  I  thought  there  would  be 
plenty  of  time,  for  if  those  fellows  were  going  to 
skip  very  soon  they  wouldn't  have  taken  the  trou- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  133 

ble  to  carry  the  stuff  down  there,  where  it  could 
not  be  gotten  away  quickly." 

"I'll  think  the  matter  over,  Teddy,  and  come 
back  here  in  a  couple  of  hours,"  Hazelton  said, 
after  a  moment's  thought. 

"Don't  tell  anyone  what  you  found  out  until 
after  seeing  me  again." 

This  conversation  had  been  carried  on  at  the  rear 
of  the  cane-board,  where  the  customers  could  not 
overhear  it,  and  when  the  jewelry  fakir  walked 
toward  the  exhibition  building  it  was  necessary  to 
satisfy  Tim's  curiosity  regarding  what  had  been 
accomplished. 

"I  don't  s'pose  it's  any  of  my  business,"  the 
latter  said,  when  Teddy  concluded  the  story;  "but 
I  wouldn't  be  afraid  to  bet  all  I  shall  earn  this  week 
that  you'll  have  trouble  with  that  feller  before  the 
scrape  is  over.  He  knows  so  awful  much  that  some- 
thin'  tough  is  bound  to  happen." 

Teddy  did  not  think  there  was  any  good  cause  for 
alarm,  more  especially  since  he  felt  confident  Dan 
would  keep  an  eye  on  the  oarsman,  and  during  the 
next  two  hours  he  thought  of  nothing  save  earning 
money,  for  customers  were  plenty,  and  even  with 
the  assistance  of  the  boy  Tim  had  engaged  it  was 
all  he  and  his  clerk  could  do  to  wait  upon  those 
who  were  anxious  to  win  a  cane  or  knife. 

Now  and  then  some  of  the  other  fakirs  would 
visit  him ;  but,  as  a  rule,  all  were  so  busy  that  there 


134  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

was  little  time  for  the  exchange  of  compliments, 
and  even  the  cry  of  "  Three  rings  for  five  cents, 
with  the  chance  to  get  a  dollar  cane  or  knife  for 
nothing!"  was  not  needed  to  stimulate  trade. 

It  was  two  hours  from  the  time  of  his  return  when 
Dan  came  up  looking  decidedly  uneasy,  and  Teddy 
did  not  stop  to  make  change  for  the  man  who  had 
just  patronized  him,  before  he  asked,  hurriedly : 

"Now,  what's  up?" 

"Sam  is  missing." 

"  What  do  you  mean?    How  can  that  be?" 

"  He  was  to  row  around  the  creek  near  the  land- 
ing ;  but  for  the  last  hour  no  one  has  seen  him,  and, 
what  is  more,  the  boat  can't  be  found.  Long  Jim 
an'  his  friend  haven't  come  ashore,  as  near  as  I 
can  make  out,  an'  it  looks  to  me  as  if  that  foolish 
Sam  has  got  into  trouble  through  trying  to  play 
detective." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  135 


CHAPTER  XV. 
SAWS  ADVENTURES. 

IN  order  to  explain  Sam's  absence,  and  one  or  two 
other  incidents  in  their  regular  sequence,  it  is  nec- 
essary to  go  back  to  the  moment  when,  his  friends 
having  landed,  the  amateur  detective  was  left  to  his 
own  devices. 

His  first  impulse  was  to  report  his  arrival  to  the 
manager  of  the  boat  exhibit,  and  then  go  about  his 
routine  duties,  but  before  this  very  proper  plan 
could  be  carried  into  effect  he  chanced  to  see  Hazel- 
ton  on  the  shore. 

"Now,  what's  he  layin'  around  there  for?"  Sam 
asked  of  himself.  "  I'll  bet  Dan  or  Teddy  has  given 
the  whole  snap  away,  an'  he's  come  to  pull  in  the 
burglars.  It's  a  mighty  mean  trick  for  them  to  play 
after  I've  worked  the  case  so  far  that  there's  noth- 
ing to  do  but  nab  'em.  He'll  get  all  the  praise,  an' 
folks  won't  know  the  job  was  managed  by  me." 

The  longer  Sam  thought  of  this  apparent  in- 
gratitude and  treachery  on  the  part  of  Teddy  and 
Dan  the  more  angry  he  grew,  and  it  did  not  require 
many  moments'  thought  for  him  to  succeed  in  con- 


136  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

vincing  himself  that  he  had  been  very   shabbily 
treated. 

Continuing  to  talk  to  himself,  or  rather  at  the  til- 
ler, on  which  his  eyes  were  fixed,  he  added : 

"  Folks  have  said  so  much  about  their  savin'  them 
women  from  drownin',  when  I  mighter  done  the 
same  thing  if  I'd  been  willin'  to  make  a  fool  of  my- 
self, that  they  want  to  scoop  in  everything;  but  I 
could  stop  this  little  game  by  jest  goin'  ahead  on 
my  own  hook.  If  I  sneaked  down  the  creek  an' 
brought  back  the  stuff  them  men  have  been  hidin' 
people  would  begin  to  know  how  much  I  under- 
stand about  detective  work." 

This  appeared  in  his  mind  as  the  most  brilhant 
scheme  he  had  ever  conceived,  and  in  a  very  few 
seconds  Sam  decided  that  it  should  be  carried  into 
effect. 

First,  and  with  no  very  well-defined  idea  of  why 
such  a  course  was  necessary,  he  rowed  cautiously 
to  and  fro  past  the  landing  stage,  scrutinizing 
closely  every  face  he  saw,  and  mentally  hugging 
himself  because  of  the'  excitement  which  would  be 
caused  by  his  return  with  the  stolen  property. 

Then  he  turned  the  boat,  and  began  to  row  down 
the  creek,  stopping  every  few  seconds  to  gaze 
around  in  such  a  mysterious  manner  that  the  sus- 
picions of  any  one  who  observed  him  would  have 
been  instantly  aroused. 
In  this  manner,  which  he  believed  the  only  true 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  137 

way  for  a  first-class  detective  to  approach  his  prey, 
Sam  had  rowed  less  than  half  a  mile  when  he  saw 
Long  Jim  and  his  companion  returning. 

Now  the  time  had  come  when  true  cunning  was 
necessary,  and  the  amateur  detective  began  to  dis- 
play it  by  pulling  the  boat  sharply  around,  heading 
her  for  an  indentation  on  the  opposite  shore. 

Here  he  ran  her  bow  aground,  and  lying  at  full 
length  in  the  bottom,  peered  out  at  the  men  in  the 
most  stealthy  manner. 

They  had  already  taken  notice  of  his  erratic 
movements,  and  now  regarded  him  intently,  but, 
without  checking  the  headway  of  their  own  craft, 
in  a  few  minutes  were  beyond  sight  around  the 
bend. 

"There,"  Sam  said,  with  a  long-drawn  breath  of 
relief,  as  he  arose  to  a  sitting  posture,  "if  Teddy  an' 
Dan  had  been  here  them  fellers  would  have  tumbled 
to  the  whole  racket,  but  I've  put  'em  off  the  scent, 
an'  will  have  plenty  of  time  to  do  my  work." 

He  pulled  out  from  the  shore  once  more,  gazed 
long  and  earnestly  up  and  down  the  creek,  and 
then,  in  the  same  ridiculous  manner  as  before,  con- 
tinued the  journey. 

The  trip  which  should  have  consumed  no  more 
than  an  hour  even  with  the  most  indolent  oarsman, 
was  not  completed  until  twice  that  time  had  elapsed, 
and  then  fully  fifteen  minutes  were  spent  by  this 
very  cautious  boy  in  landing. 


138  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

He  pulled  his  boat  up  high  out  of  the  water,  and, 
in  order  to  conceal  her,  heaped  such  a  pile  of  dry 
grass  on  top  of  her  that  it  must  have  attracted  the 
attention  of  any  one  passing,  more  especially  those 
who  were  familair  with  the  creek. 

This  done  he  went  toward  the  bal-n  after  the  fash- 
ion of  an  old-time  stage  villain,  halting  at  the  slight- 
est sound,  and  peering  in  every  direction,  fancying 
himself  surrounded  by  foes. 

Not  until  he  had  circled  completely  around  the 
barn  twice  did  he  venture  to  enter,  and  then,  much 
to  his  disappointment,  there  was  nothing  to  be 
seen.  The  building  appeared  to  be  absolutely 
empty,  and  even  his  eagle  eye  failed  to  discover 
any  traces  of  recent  occupancy. 

"Well,  this  is  mighty  funny,"  he  said,  with  a  sigh 
of  disappointment.  "  Them  fellers  surely  brought  a 
lot  of  stuff  in  here,  but  they  must  have  carried  it 
out  again." 

Having  expended  so  much  labor  and  time  in 
reaching  this  place,  he  did  not  intend  to  return  until 
after  making  a  thorough  search,  however,  and  to 
this  end  he  investigated  one  possible  hiding-place 
after  another,  pulling  up  the  boards  of  the  rude 
flooring,  and  peering  into  places  where  nothing 
larger  than  a  mouse  could  have  been  hidden. 

During  this  time  the  burglars  were  returning 
with  all  possible  speed.  Sam's  actions,  both  as  he 
came  down  the  creek,   and  also  while  screening 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  139 

himself  from  view,  were  so  suspicious  that,  guilty 
as  the  men  were,  they  immediately  concluded  what 
was  very  near  the  truth. 

Long  Jim  recognized  the  boy  as  having  been  with 
Teddy  when  the  bargain  for  the  imaginary  cane- 
board  was  made,  and  instead  of  returning  to  the 
fair  grounds  the  two  watched,  from  a  point  of 
vantage  on  the  bank,  until  Master  Sam  had  landed. 

His  purpose  was  now  evident,  and  it  was  neces- 
sary the  burglars  should  resort  to  desperate  meas- 
ures to  prevent  the  loss  of  their  ill-gotten  gains  as 
well  as  to  save  themselves  from  imprisonment. 

When  they  arrived  where  it  was  possible  to  look 
into  the  barn,  Sam  was  on  his  knees  scraping  away 
the  dirt  which  appeared  to  have  been  recently  dis- 
turbed, and  they  heard  him  say  in  a  tone  of  exul- 
tation : 

"I've  got  to  it  at  last,  an' now  we'll  see  w^hat 
Teddy  an'  Dan  have  to  say  when  I  flash  the 
whole  lot  of  stuff  up  with  nobody  to  help  me.  I 
reckon " 

He  did  not  finish  the  sentence,  for  at  that  moment 
Long  Jim  stepped  directly  in  front  of  him,  as  he 
asked : 

"Did  you  leave  anything  here,  my  son?" 

"  No — I — I — that  is — you  see " 

Sam  was  so  frightened  that  he  could  not  say  an- 
other word.  It  seemed  as  if  his  tongue  was  swollen 
to  twice    its    natural    size,   while  his    throat  was 


140  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

parched  and  dry,  and  to  make  bad  matters  worse, 
he  had  entirely  neglected  to  invent  a  plausible  ex- 
cuse for  his  presence  there  in  case  of  an  interrup- 
tion. 

"I  asked  if  you'd  left  any  thins:  here?"  Long  Jim 
repeated,  very  mildly. 

"  Well — well You   see  T  jest  come  down  to — 

to I  thought,  perhaps,  I  might  find  something, 

but  it's  time  I  was  gettin'  back  to  the  fair,  'cause 
the  folks  will  be  needin'  me." 

As  he  spoke  he  attempted  to  back  toward  the 
door,  but  before  taking  half  a  dozen  steps  a  cry  of 
fear  burst  from  his  lips,  for  a  heavy  hand  was  laid 
with  no  gentle  force  on  his  shirt  collar,  and  he 
staggered  forward  helplessly. 

"That's  an  invitation  for  you  to  hold  on  a  bit, 
an'  have  a  little  conversation  with  two  gentlemen 
who  are  mighty  curious  to  know  why  you  came 
here,"  Long  Jim  said,  grimly.  "You're  goin'  to 
tell  us  the  whole  partic'lars,  or  there  won't  be 
enough  left  of  you  to  be   seen  under  a  microscope." 

Sam  made  no  reply.  He  was  literaly  dazed  w^ith 
fear,  and  just  at  that  moment  he  thought  the  life 
of  a  detective  very  disagreeable. 

"Come,  speak  vip,  an'  be  quick  about  it,"  the  man 
cried,  fiercely.  "  We've  got  no  time  to  waste  on 
sich  cubs  as  you,  an'  in  about  two  minutes  you'll 
get  worse'n  we  served  out  the  other  night." 

"  That  wasn't  me  f ollerin'  you  from  the  museum 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  l4l 

tent,"  Sara  said,  quickly,  thinking  possibly  this  fact 
might  work  in  his  favor. 

"Who  was  it?" 

"Teddy  an'  Dan." 

"Who  is  Dan?" 

"A  feller  who  works  for  the  Stevens  Arms  Com- 
pany up  at  the  fair." 

"Why  did  they  follow  us?" 

"  Teddy  wanted  to  get  back  the  money  he  gave 
you  to  buy  a  cane-board  with." 

"If  he  knows  what's  wise  for  him  he'll  stop  any 
such  rackets,  or  he  may  get  more'n  he  bargains 
for." 

Then  the  second  man,  who  still  held  firmly  to 
Sam's  collar,  asked,  as  he  shook  his  prisoner  vig- 
orously : 

"How  did  you  know  we  had  been  here?" 

"Us  fellers  saw  you  come  down  in  a  boat." 

"So  all  three  are  in  the  secret,  eh?" 

Sam's  only  thought  was  that  he  might  possibly 
save  his  own  skin,  and  he  replied  in  the  affirmative, 
although  he  must  have  known  that  by  such  answer 
he  was  destroying  his  friends'  chances  of  recover- 
ing the  goods. 

"Where  are  the  fools  now?"  Long  Jim  asked, 
angrily. 

"Up  at  the  fair." 

"What  do  they  intend  to  do?" 

"Get  somebody  to  arrest  you." 


142  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Then  we've  got  to  skip  mighty  lively,  Phil," 
and  Long  Jim  looked  up  at  his  companion. 

"Yes;  but  if  my  advice  had  been  follered  vv^e 
wouldn't  be  in  this  scrape.  You  was  the  only  one 
the  cubs  knew,  an'  by  keepin'  out  of  sight  we 
mighter  finished  the  work  that's  been  laid  out. 
You're  so  pig-headed  that  a  yoke  of  oxen  couldn't 
keep  you  in  hidin'." 

"There's  no  use  fightin'  about  it  now;  for  we've 
got  to  get  a  move  on  us  in  short  order.  It  won't  do 
to  let  this  boy  have  a  chance  to  give  the  alarm." 

"Of  course  not.  Lash  him  up  somewhere  so  he 
can't  make  a  noise,  an'  his  chums  will  come  before 
he  starves  to  death." 

"Don't  do  that !"  Sam  cried,  in  an  agony  of  terror. 
"  I  won't  say  a  word  about  your  catchin'  me  here, 
an'  I'll  do  anything  you  say." 

"Oh,  you're  a  nice  plum  to  make  promises,  ain't 
you.  It  didn't  take  much  persuadin'  to  make  you 
go  back  on  your  friends,  an'  that's  enough  to  show 
whether  you  can  be  trusted.  Get  the  rope  out  of 
the  boat,  Phil,  an'  then  we'll  make  ready  for  a  long 
jump." 

Phil  obeyed,  grumbling  as  he  went  because  his 
partner  had  refused  to  take  his  advice,  thus  plung- 
ing both  of  them  into  danger,  and  Long  Jim  turned 
his  attention  to  the  prisoner  once  more. 

"Before  we  leave  this  part  of  the  country  for 
good  I'm  goin'  to  give  you  somethin'  to  remember 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  143 

US  by  so's  you  won't  go  'round  stickin'  your  nose 
into  other  people's  business  agin." 

"What  are  you  goin'  to  do?"  Sam  asked,  his  face 
growing  even  paler  than  before. 

"Give  you  the  worst  floggin'  a  boy  ever  had.  I'd 
do  it  now  if  there  wasn't  so  much  work  to  be  got 
through." 

Sam  had  sufficient  sense  to  know  that  all  his 
pleadings  for  mercy  would  be  in  vain,  and  he  held 
his  peace  until  Phil  returned  with  a  long  coil  of 
rope  which  had  been  used  as  a  boat's  painter. 

One  of  the  beams  at  the  end  of  the  barn  served  as 
a  post  to  which  to  lash  the  prisoner,  and  here  the 
amateur  detective  was  made  fast  in  such  a  skillful 
manner  that  he  could  not  so  much  as  move  his 
arms. 

"Shall  we  gag  him  now?"  Phil  asked,  and  Long 
Jim  replied : 

"No,  there's  time  enough. 

He  can't  make  any  one  hear  if  he  yells  his  best, 
an'  I've  got  a  little  business  to  settle  before  he's 
trussed  up  for  good. 


144  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

MISSING. 

WHEN  Dan  informed  Teddy  that  Sam  was  miss- 
ing, and  suggested  the  possibility  of  the  bur- 
glars having  gotten  him  in  their  power,  both  the 
boys  were  decidedly  alarmed  ;  but  the  matter  ceased 
to  appear  as  serious  after  it  had  been  discussed  in 
all  its  bearings. 

"Long  Jim  wouldn't  have  dared  to  spirit  him 
away  when  there  are  so  many  people  around," 
Teddy  said,  after  a  long  silence,  during  which  he 
was  trying  to  imagine  what  Sam  might  have  done. 
"  Besides,  what  would  be  the  good  of  taking  him  if 
we  were  left  behind?" 

"Perhaps  they  count  on  hauling  us  in,  too." 

"That  isn't  to  be  thought  of  for  a  moment.  They 
don't  want  to  burden  themselves  with  a  lot  of  boys 
when  every  effort  must  be  made  to  get  the  stolen 
property  out  of  this  section  of  the  country  before 
they  are  discovered." 

"I'll  allow  all  that  sounds  reasonable,  but  where 
is  Sam?" 

"Of  course  I  don't  know.     Do  you  think  he  would 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  145 

dare  to  go  down  the  river  again   after  we  landed?" 

"ISTo,  indeed;  he's  too  much  of  a  coward  for  that. 
If  there's  been  any  funny  business  it  was  done 
when  the  men  got  back." 

"Then  we  have  no  need  to  worry,  for  there  are 
hundreds  of  people  on  the  bank  of  the  creek  all  the 
time,  an'  Sam  would  know  enough  to  yell  if  any- 
body tried  to  steal  him." 

The  idea  that  the  amateur  detective  might  be 
stolen  seemed  so  comical  to  Dan  that  he  gave  way 
to  mirth,  and  what  had  promised  to  be  a  most  sor- 
rowful visit  speedily  became  a  merry  one. 

"  He  had  permission  to  remain  away  from  the 
exhibition  buildino;  during  the  rest  of  the  day," 
Teddy  finally  said,' "an' most  likely  he's  goin'  to 
take  advantage  .  of  it  by  roaming  around  the 
grounds,  exercising  his  detective  faculties.  He'll 
turn  up  at  the  museum  to-night  all  right,  with  a 
big  yarn  to  tell  about  his  supposed  adventures." 

"I  reckon  you're  right;  but  I  did  get  a  little  rat- 
tled when  his  boss  asked  me  where  he  was.  I'll 
come  back  this  way  when  it's  time  to  go  to  sup- 
per." 

"Wait  a  minute.  I'm  mighty  hungry  now,  an' 
business  has  been  so  good  that  I  can  afford  to  treat 
to  sandwiches  an'  lemonade,  if  you'll  go  with  me 
over  to  the  grand  stand.  I'll  bring  you  back  some- 
thing, Tim,"  he  added,  as  he  leaped  over  the  railing. 
Dan  said  he  could  remain  away  hal-f  an  hour  from 


146  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

the  rifle  exhibit,  and  Teddy  was  now  so  easy  in 
mind  concerning  money  matters  that  he  resolved 
to  have  thirty  minutes  of  sport. 

The  boys  first  made  a  tour  of  that  portion  of  the 
grounds  where  the  fakirs  were  congregated,  stop- 
ping a  moment  to  see  the  whip  dealer  lashing  a 
pine  stake  to  show  the  quality  of  his  goods,  and 
then  watching  the  "Great  African  Dodger,"  who 
thrust  his  woolly  head  through  an  aperture  in  a 
canvas  screen  for  all  those  to  throw  balls  at  who 
were  inclined  to  pay  the  price. 

Then  they  stopped  at  the  "envelope  game,"  where 
were  spread  on  a  stand  a  large  collection  of  cheap, 
gaudy  goods,  each  bearing  a  printed  number,  every 
one  supposed  to  correspond  with  those  contained 
in  a  box  of  envelopes,  and  this  fakir  was  doing  a 
big  business,  as  was  shown  by  the  fact  that  he 
could  afford  to  hiie  a  barker,  who  cried  continually 
at  the  full  strength  of  his  lungs : 

"Come  up  now,  and  try  your  luck!  Here's  where 
we  have  all  prizes  and  no  blanks!  Ten  cents  buys 
an  envelope,  with  the  privilege  of  drawing  for 
yourself,  so  there  can  be  no  job  put  up  against  you, 
and  every  number  calls  for  some  one  of  the  many 
valuable  articles  in  the  layout.  Here's  a  gentle- 
man who  s^pends  only  ten  cents  and  gets  a  pair  of 
those  beautiful,  triple-plated,  double-expansion, 
fine  pure  metal  cuff  buttons,  worth  two  dollars  at 
some  stores!" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  147 

"Come  on  I"  Dan  said,  impatiently.  "That  fellow 
is  almost  as  big  a  snide  as  Hazelton." 

"How  do  you  make  that  out?  I  can  see  a  lot  of 
things  that  cost  more  than  a  dollar.  Look  at  the 
silver  watch,  and  the  revolver." 

"  That  may  be  all  very  well ;  but  no  one  except  a 
fellow  who  is  interested  in  the  business  gets  any  of 
those  articles." 

"You  can  select  any  envelope  you  choose." 

"That's  right;  but  the  ones  with  the  numbers 
calling  for  the  big  prizes  are  lying  fiat  in  the  box 
where  nobody  can  get  them.  If  you  should  accuse 
the  man  of  cheating  he  would  turn  the  whole  thing 
upside  down,  and  then,  of  course,  they  could  be 
found.  Here  comes  a  fellow  who  I  know  is  cappin' 
for  that  fakir.     Watch  how  he  does  it." 

The  apparent  stranger  approached  the  stand,  and 
after  some  talk  as  to  how  the  game  was  run,  in- 
vested ten  cents. 

The  man  did  not  open  the  envelope  he  drew ;  but 
handed  it  to  the  fakir,  who,  pretending  to  look  at 
the  card  it  contained,  shouted : 

"  Number  fifty-four.  The  gentleman  has  drawn 
that  beautiful  solid  silver  watch  worth  fifty  dollars, 
and  I  will  give  him  thirty  for  his  bargain." 

The  stranger  showed  his  prize  to  the  crowd  that 
clustered  around  him,  and  business  was  increased 
wonderfully,  for  it  had  apparently  been  proven 
that  the  game  was  conducted  fairly. 


148  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Now  watch  him,"  Dan  said,  as  the  stranger 
walked  away  with  his  prize  ostentatiously  dis- 
played, and  the  two  boys  followed  a  short  distance 
off,  until  they  saw  him  halt  behind  a  booth,  where 
he  turned  the  article  won  over  to  a  barker  who  had 
approached. 

"That's  the  way  it  is  done,"  Dan  said,  "and  when 
we  come  back  you'll  see  the  same  watch  on  the  lay- 
out." 

Teddy  was  rapidly  being  initiated  in  the  tricks  of 
the  fakirs,  and  the  more  he  saw  the  more  firmly 
was  he  resolved  not  to  follow  the  business  longer 
than  the  present  week,  although  he  believed  his 
own  game  to  be  an  honest  one. 

The  cheap  jewelry  dealer;  the  man  who  had  been 
selling  the  remnants  of  a  stock  of  knives  made  by  a 
manufacturer  who  "had  bankrupted  himself  by 
putting  into  them  too  expensive  material;"  the 
fakir  with  the  dolls  which  were  to  be  knocked  down 
by  balls  thrown  from  a  certain  distance,  with  a 
prize  of  one  cigar  if  the  customer  could  tumble  two 
over,  and  the  peanut-candy  dealer  were  visited  in 
turn,  and  then  the  boys  were  attracted  by  the  sound 
of  Hazelton's  voice. 

He  was  plying  his  peculiar  trade  again,  and  by 
the  appearance  of  the  crowd  was  meeting  with 
great  success. 

"Let's  see  how  he  gets  out  of  it  this  time,"  Teddy 
suggested,  and  Dan  agreed. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  149 

The  fakir  had  arrived  at  that  point  where  he  was 
giving  away  the  supposed  watches,  and  the  boys 
listened  until  they  saw  his  preparations  for  de- 
parture. 

"What  beats  me  is  how  he  gets  clear  every  time," 
Dan  whispered.  "I  should  think  after  he  had 
swindled  four  or  five  hundred,  some  of  them  would 
lay  for  a  chance  to  ge,t  even  with  him," 

"He  says  they  do,  an'  that's  why  he  left  his 
satchel  with  me." 

Hazelton  recognized  the  boys  just  as  he  was  tell- 
ing that  Nathan  Hargreaves  might  possibly  act  as 
his  agent  after  the  close  of  the  fair,  and  nodded 
pleasantly,  as  he  gathered  up  the  reins;  but  this 
was  one  of  the  occasions  when  he  was  not  to  be 
allowed  to  go  scot  free. 

Two  stalwart-looking  fellows  were  standing  near 
the  head  of  the  horse,  and  when  the  fakir  would 
have  driven  off  they  seized  the  bridle,  one  of  them 
shouting : 

"Come  down  with  that  money !  This  is  the  second 
time  I've  seen  you  do  us  countrymen  up  to-day,  and 
now  you've  got  to  square  things." 

Hazelton  swung  his  whip  around,  striking  the 
speaker  full  in  the  face,  and  causing  the  horse  to 
plunge  and  rear,  but  yet  the  fellows  kept  their  hold. 

The  whip  was  pulled  from  the  fakir's  hand,  and 
in  an  instant  it  appeared  as  if  a  riot  had  begun. 
Those  who  had  been  content  to  keep  secret  the  fact 


150  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

of  having  been  swindled  now  grew  bold  as  they 
saw  there  was  a  leader  in  the  movement,  and  more 
than  a  hundred  leaped  forward  to  seize  the  repre- 
sentative of  the  alleged  jewelry  manufactm-ers. 

"He'll  be  killed!"  Teddy  shouted,  and  would  have 
attempted  to  go  to  the  assistance  of  the  man  who 
had  been  kind  to  him,  despite  the  fact  that  he  could 
not  have  aided  him  in  any  way  against  so  many ; 
but  for  the  fact  thai  Dan  pulled  him  back,  as  he 
shouted: 

"  Can't  you  see  that  it  would  be  fifty  to  one  if  you 
should  go  in  that  crowd?  We  couldn't  help  him, 
and  what's  the  use  of  gettin'  a  big  lickin'  for  noth- 
ing? Besides,  what  would  become  of  your  business 
if  the  people  here  thought  you  were  his  partner?" 

Before  Dan  ceased  speaking  Teddy  realized  how 
useless  would  be  any  effort  of  his,  and  he  remained 
passive,  trying  to  get  a  glimpse  of  the  ill-fated 
fakir. 

The  numbers  who  beset  him  completely  hid  Ha- 
zelton  from  view.  The  carriage  had  been  over- 
turned by  the  first  desperate  rush  of  the  victims, 
and  the  horse  was  clearing  a  space  around  himself 
by  the  free  use  of  his  heels. 

"They'll  commit  murder  I"  Teddy  cried. 

"I  don't  believe  it'll  be  quite  as  bad  as  that ;  but 
he  won't  be  likely  to  give  away  any  more  lockets 
while  this  fair  lasts." 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  Hazelton  was  not  left  to 


<^gfefe«g^-'"r 


,ssss- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  151 

fight  the  battle  alone.  Like  every  other  fakir  en- 
gaged in  that  peculiar  business,  he  had  several 
partners  whose  duty  it  was  to  mingle  with  the 
crowd  for  the  purpose  of  intimidating  any  who 
might  be  disposed  to  make  trouble,  and  these  had 
closed  in  upon  him,  while  some  of  the  more  timid 
spectators  shouted  for  the  constables. 

Once  Teddy  caught  a  glimpse  of  the  unfortunate 
man;  his  glossy  hat  was  gone,  his  clothing  torn, 
and  his  face  covered  with  blood. 

"I  can  see  him  now!"  he  cried,  "and  it  looks  as 
if  they  had  about  used  him  up,  for " 

Before  he  could  finish  the  sentence  a  stranger 
rushed  toward  him,  and  showing  the  familiar  black 
satchel  in  his  hand,  said  hurriedly: 

"Get  out  of  here  with  that.  Hazelton  will  see 
you  some  time  this  evening.     Don't  stop  a  minute!" 

Before  the  boy  could  reply  the  stranger  was  forc- 
ing his  way  through  the  struggling,  yelling  crowd, 
in  order  to  aid  his  partner,  and  Teddy  said  in  dis- 
may: 

"Now  we  are  in  a  muss.  Here  is  all  his  money, 
an'  if  anybody  sees  us  with  it  we'll  have  a  tough 
time." 

"You  can't  throw  it  away,  an'  we  must  sneak 
off,"  Dan  said,  and  the  expression  on  his  face  told 
how  distressed  he  was  that  such  a  responsibility 
had  been  thrust  upon  them. 

"Shall  we  go  back  to  the  stand?" 


152  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"No,  that  would  never  do,  for  then  they  would  be 
sure  to  vent  their  anger  on  you.  Go  up  to  the 
museum;  Mr.  Sweet  knows  Hazelton,  an'  may  be 
willin'  to  help  him  by  keeping  the  satchel  till  the 
row  is  over." 

These  words  had  been  spoken  as  the  boys  were 
trying  to  make  their  way  through  the  fringe  of 
spectators  which  had  hemmed  them  in  since  the 
fight  began,  and  after  some  difficulty  they  suc- 
ceeded ;  but  at  the  same  moment  one  of  the  com- 
batants, who  had  received  more  than  his  share  of 
punishment,  emerged  close  by  their  side. 

He  saw  Hazelton's  satchel,  and  recognized  it. 

"  Come  here,  fellows !  two  little  villains  are  mak- 
ing off  with  the  money !     That's  what  we  want !" 

He  at  once  started  in  pursuit,  as  did  several 
others,  and  Dan  cried,  as  he  helped  carry  the  bur- 
den: 

"Run  as  you  never  did  before,  Teddy,  for  if  they 
get  hold  of  us  it'll  be  a  bad  job  all  around !" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  153 


CHAPTER  XVII. 
A    TERRIBLE   NIGHT. 

AT  just  about  the  same  moment  when  Teddy  and 
Dan  were  running  with  Hazelton's  money  at 
full  speed  toward  the  museum  tent,  with  the  chance 
of  escape  very  much  against  them,  Sam  was  in  a  de- 
cidedly painful  frame  of  mind. 

After  he  had  been  securely  tied  the  two  men 
conversed  in  low  tones  for  several  minutes,  and 
then,  as  if  having  arrived  at  some  definite  conclu- 
sion, began  to  make  preparations  for  leaving  the 
place. 

At  the  same  spot  where  Sam  had  been  inter- 
rupted while  scraping  away  the  dirt  they  pro- 
ceeded to  dig  with  a  shovel  which  Phil  procured 
from  somewhere  outside  the  building,  and  during 
this  labor  the  prisoner  could  hear  fragments  of  the 
conversation. 

Once  Long  Jim  ceased  his  work  long  enough  to 
say :  . 

"  When  you  come  to  look  at  the  matter  quietly  it 
doesn't  seem  as  if  we'd  got  into  sich  a  very  bad 
scrape.     You  can  manage  to  bring  the  rest  of  the 


154  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

stuff  down  the  creek  between  now  an'  Friday 
mornin'  and  I've  got  a  plan  for  givin'  anybody  who 
may  come  after  us  a  good  clue  to  the  bo^^'s  disap- 
pearance." 

Phil  made  some  remark  which  Sam  could  not 
hear,  and  his  companion  replied  in  a  louder  tone: 

"  It  can  all  be  done  so's  to  make  folks  think  we've 
gone  up  the  creek,  an'  w^e've  got  to  lay  low  for  a 
while,  which  won't  be  a  hard  job  while  the  weather 
is  warm." 

"But  I  don't  like  the  idea  of  totin'  that  cub  with 
us  so  long." 

"I'll  take  care  of  him,  an'  will  make  him  earn  his 
board,  or  somethin's  bound  to  break." 

From  this  time  until  several  packages  were  un- 
earthed Sam  could  hear  nothing;  but  what  had 
already  been  said  was  sufficient  to  convince  him 
that  he  was  to  have  a  very  unpleasant  experience, 
and  for  at  least  the  hundredth  time  he  fervently 
wished  he  had  never  so  much  as  heard  of  detective 
work. 

After  the  goods  had  been  brought  to  light  the 
earth  was  replaced  in  the  excavation  and  pounded 
down  carefully.  Then  fully  half  an  hour  was  spent 
digging  in  different  places,  probably  for  the  pur- 
pose of  misleading  any  one  who  might  come  there 
in  search  of  plunder,  for  Phil  said  in  a  tone  of  sat- 
isfaction as  he  ceased  the  apparently  aimless  labor: 

"It'll  take  at  least  a  day  before  all  of  these  sus- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  155 

picious  looking  spots  have  been  investigated,  an' 
in  the  meanwhile,  unless  we're  chumps,  we  shall 
know  what's  goin'  on.  I'll  take  one  load  to  the 
boat;  make  sure  the  coast  is  clear,  an'  then  the 
three  of  us  can  carry  the  balance.  Have  the  boy- 
ready  for  a  quick  move,  an'  see  to  it  that  he  can't 
give  an  alarm." 

"  I'll  knock  his  head  off  if  he  so  much  as  thinks 
of  such  a  thing,"  and  as  Phil  disappeared  with  a  por- 
tion of  the  plunder  Long  Jim  began  to  unfasten 
Sam's  bonds,  saying  as  he  did  so:  » 

"  We've  made  up  our  minds  to  hold  you  with  us 
a  few  days  'cause  you're  sich  jolly  company.  If 
you  obey  orders  an'  keep  your  mouth  shut  there's 
a  chance  of  gettin'  outer  this  scrape  mighty  easy; 
but  I'd  slit  your  throat  in  a  jiffy  if  you  tried  to  give 
us  the  slip  or  made  any  noise." 

Sam  made  no  reply;  but  his  captor  could  see 
very  plainly  that  the  boy  was  nearly  paralyzed 
with  fright,  and  it  was  safe  to  infer  he  would  fol- 
low the  instructions  given  to  the  letter. 

Phil  returned  in  a  very  short  time  and  reported : 

"The  coast  is  clear.  There's  not  a  craft  to  be  seen 
on  the  creek,  an'  we  can  leave  without  danger." 

The  rope  had  been  removed  from  Sam's  limbs, 
and  Long  Jim  proceeded  to  load  him  down  with 
bundles  until  he  staggered  under  the  weight. 

"Now,  see  that  you  walk  a  chalk  line,"  the  burg- 
lar said,  fiercely.  "Poller  Phil,  an'  I'll  keep  behind 


156  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

to  make  sure  there  are  no  tricks  played.  Remem- 
ber what  I  promised!" 

The  men  could  carry  the  remainder  of  the  goods 
in  one  load,  and  the  three  went  out  of  the  barn  hur- 
riedly, Sam  not  daring  to  so  much  as  lift  his  eyes 
from  the  ground  lest  Long  Jim's  threat  should  be 
carried  into  execution. 

Arriving  at  the  water's  edge  the  boat  was  loaded, 
the  prisoner  ordered  to  take  his  place  at  the  oars, 
and  then  the  final  preparations  w^ere  m^ade. 

Phil  uncovered  the  boat  in  which  Scim  had  come, 
launched  and  overturned  her.  Then  taking  the 
hat  from  the  unresisting  boy's  head,  threw  it  far 
out  in  the  channel,  afterward  giving  the  little  craft 
a  shove  which  sent  her  a  long  distance  from  the 
shore.  Next  the  two  oars  were  sent  after  the  hat, 
and  Phil  said  with  a  laugh : 

"The  current  ain't  very  strong;  but  with  the  aid 
of  the  wind  T  reckon  that  stuff  will  drift  up  to  the 
fair  grounds  before  dark. 

Sam's  despair  was  already  so  great  that  it  did  not 
seem  as  if  it  could  be  increased ;  but  the  last  ves- 
tige of  hope  fled  when  he  realized  that  these  things 
had  been  done  in  order  to  make  it  appear  as  if  he 
were  dead. 

"Teddy  and  Dan  won't  think  of  huntin'  for  me 
after  the  boat  is  found,"  he  thought,  "an'  these 
men  are  sure  to  kill  me  before  this  scrape  is  over!" 

The  two  burglars  seated  themselves  comfortably 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  157 

in  the  stern-sheets,  the  packages  being  placed  at 
the  bow  to  trim  the  craft  properly,  and  Long  Jim 
said,  sternly: 

"You've  been  showin' off  your  skill  as  an  oars- 
man for  two  or  three  days,  an'  we  want  you  to  do 
it  now.  Put  in  your  best  licks,  for  it'll  be  tough 
if  we  don't  get  through  the  water  mighty  fast." 

Even  Sam's  worst  enemy  would  have  pitied  him 
at  this  moment.  No  galley  slave  chained  to  his 
seat  could  have  been  more  utterly  helpless,  and 
he  exerted  himself  to  the  utmost  in  order  to  please 
those  who  professed  to  be  so  willing  to  punish  or 
kill. 

Every  stroke  of  the  oars  took  them  farther  away 
from  the  fair  grounds,  and  each  puff  of  wind  car- 
ried the  evidences  of  the  prisoner's  death  nearer 
the  only  ones  who  might  take  the  trouble  to  search 
for  him. 

Not  until  fully  an  hour  had  passed  did  the  burg- 
lars give  any  sign  of  a  desire  to  end  the  journey, 
and  then  Long  Jim  said : 

"We  must  be  six  miles  from  the  fair  grounds  by 
this  time,  an'  that  is  as  far  as  you'll  want  to  pull 
to-night,  Phil.  There  should  be  plenty  of  good 
hidin'-places  in  this  bit  of  woods,  an'  I  think  we'd 
better  haul  up." 

"All  right.  Steer  her  into  that  ditch  over  there, 
an'  we'll  look  around." 

Thus  far  in  his  experience  as  a  detective  this  was 


158  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

the  only  thing  Sam  had  had  for  which  to  be  thank- 
ful. His  arms  were  so  tired  that  it  seemed  as  if  he 
could  not  have  pulled  another  stroke,  and  his 
clothes  were  literally  wet  from  the  perspiration 
that  came  from  his  body. 

Phil  went  ashore,  leaving  his  companion  to 
watch  the  almost  exhausted  prisoner,  and  in  a  few 
moments  the  former  shouted : 

"Load  that  cub  up,  an'  bring  him  over  here. 
This  is  a  capital  place  to  locate  in  for  a  couple  of 
days." 

Staggering  under  the  heavy  burden  Long  Jim 
placed  on  his  shoulders  the  amateur  detective  was 
forced  on  through  the  underbrush  in  advance  of 
his  captor  until  the  two  arrived  at  a  perfect  tangle 
of  cedars. 

Phil  returned  to  the  boat  for  the  remainder  of  the 
goods,  and  all  the  plunder  was  placed  inside  the 
thicket  where  the  foliage  was  so  dense  that  one 
might  have  passed  within  a  few  feet  of  the  spot 
and  not  had  any  suspicion  men  were  hidden  there. 

A  tiny  brook  ran  past  one  side  of  the  hiding- 
place,  and  Sam  took  advantage  of  the  opportunity 
to  check  his  raging  thirst  while  the  men  were  lay- 
ing plans  for  the  future. 

"I'll  go  back  soon  after  sunset,"  Phil  said,  as  he 
lighted  his  pipe  and  proceeded  to  make  himself 
comfortable.  "We  can  leave  the  boy  here  to  look 
out  for  the  stuff,  an'  you'd  better  come  with  me  up 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  159 

to  the  barn  so's  to  learn  if  any  one  visits  the  place. 
I  shall  be  back  before  morning,  an'  you  can  let  me 
know  if  the  coast  is  clear." 

"Shall  you  try  to  finish  the  job  we  were  talkin' 
about?" 

"No;  things  are  so  hot  jest  now  that  it  won't  pay 
to  take  any  more  risks  than  are  absolutely  neces- 
sary. What  we  want  is  to  get  out  of  this  portion  of 
the  country  as  soon  as  possible." 

"  All  right.  I'll  leave  you  to  manage  the  rest  of 
the  business,  an'  promise  to  follow  orders." 

"I  think  it's  about  time  you  said  that,  Jim.  If 
my  plans  had  been  carried  out  in  the  first  place  we 
wouldn't  be  in  sich  a  muss;  but  could  be  havin' 
the  cream  of  the  pickin's  at  the  fair." 

"Well,  what's  the  use  of  harpin'  on  that  all  the 
time?  The  thing  has  been  done,  an'  we've  got  to 
make  the  best  of  it.  Do  you  think  it'll  be  safe  to 
leave  this  cub  here  alone  while  we're  away?" 

"It  will  be  when  I  get  through  with  him,"  was 
the  grim  reply,  and  Sam,  terrified  by  the  vagueness 
of  this  remark,  more  even  than  he  had  been  by  the 
plain  language  previously  used,  cried,  piteously: 

"Please  don't  leave  me  here  alone  to-night!  I'll 
pull  the  boat,  an'  do  everything  you  say,  without 
so  much  as  yippin'." 

"Them  as  starts  out  in  the  detective  business 
have  to  take  what  comes,  'specially  when  their 
own  foolishness  brings  it  about.     You  joined  our 


160  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

party  of  your  own  accord,  my  son,  an'  must  put  up 
with  what  we  choose  to  give." 

Sam  said  nothing  more.  He  was  reaping  what 
he  had  sowed,  and  decided  that  matters  could  not 
be  much  worse  even  if  he  was  caught  trying  to 
escape,  therefore  he  resolved  to  take  desperate 
chances  in  an  effort  to  give  his  captors  the  slip. 

There  was  no  opportunity  to  make  the  attempt, 
on  this  night  at  least,  for  when  Phil  had  finished 
smoking  he  proceeded  in  a  very  methodical  manner 
to  secure  the  prisoner. 

Sam  was  ordered  to  seat  himself  on  the  ground, 
with  his  back  to  the  trunk  of  a  cedar-tree,  and  he 
was  fastened  skillfully,  with  his  elbows  tied  back 
in  such  a  manner  that  he  could  not  bring  his  hands 
together.  Both  feet  were  bound,  and  then,  with  a 
sudden  movement,  Phil  forced  the  boy's  mouth 
open,  shoving  into  it  a  short  piece  of  pine  wood 
about  an  inch  and  a  half  in  diameter. 

This  was  secured  in  such  a  manner  that  the  pris- 
oner could  not  free  himself  from  the  uncomfortable 
bridle,  neither  would  it  be  possible  for  him  to  make 
the  slightest  outcry. 

"Now,  don't  shout  for  help  while  we  are  gone, 
an'  unless  the  bears  eat  you  up  we  shall  meet 
again  about  daybreak,"  Phil  said,  with  a  coarse 
laugh  as  he  and  Jim  went  out  of  the  thicket  toward 
the  creek. 

Poor  Sam  had  never  thought  of  the  possibility 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  161 

that  there  might  be  bears  in  this  section  of  the 
country  until  the  burglar  suggested  it,  and  he  was 
so  terrified  as  not  to  realize  it  was  impossible  there 
could  be  any  dangerous  animals  in  such  a  thickly- 
settled  portion  of  the  State. 

Therefore,  in  addition  to  the  danger  to  be  appre- 
hended from  his  captors,  he  had  constantly  before 
his  mind  this  new  cause  for  fear.  The  rustling  of 
the  leaves,  the  flight  of  a  bird  as  it  sought  a  perch 
for  the  night,  or  the  soughing  of  the  wind  among  the 
branches  were  to  him  so  many  proofs  that  a  vio- 
lent death  would  be  his  before  morning. 

If  the  beginning  of  the  hours  of  darkness  was  so 
terrible  it  can  well  be  fancied  how  he  suffered 
before  another  day  dawned. 


162         THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 
A    NARROW  ESCAPE. 

NEITHER  Teddy  nor  Dan  had  any  hope  of  reach- 
ing the  museum  tent  before  their  pursuers 
could  overtake  them,  and  although  both  knew  what 
might  be  the  result  if  they  were  taken  with  the 
jewelryfakir's  money  and  goods  in  their  possession, 
they  did  not  for  a  moment  think  of  abandoning  the 
property. 

The  cries  of  those  in  the  rear  attracted  the  atten- 
tion of  the  spectators  elsewhere  on  the  grounds, 
and  without  waiting  to  learn  the  cause  of  the  trou- 
ble hundreds  of  men  and  boys  joined  in  the  chase, 
all  shouting  at  the  full  strength  of  their  lungs : 

"Stop  thief!     Stop  thief!" 

The  distance  to  be  traversed  was  nearly  a  quarter 
of  a  mile ;  but  the  many  turns  the  boys  were  forced 
to  make  in  order  to  avoid  those  who  were  ready  to 
capture  them  doubled  this,  and  they  were  yet  very 
far  from  the  goal  when  a  burly,  red-faced  man 
jumped  in  front  of  them. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  163 

It  seemed  as  if  capture  was  inevitable ;  but  Teddy- 
resorted  to  the  last  means  of  defense,  and  was  suc- 
cessful. 

Letting  go  his  hold  of  the  satchel  he  lowered  his 
head,  leaped  forward  with  full  force,  striking  the 
officious  stranger  full  in  the  stomach. 

The  man,  not  anticipating  such  an  attack  at  a 
moment  when  he  almost  had  his  hands  upon  the 
supposed  thieves,  was  bowled  over  like  a  nine-pin, 
and,  jumping  quickly  aside,  Teddy  caught  hold  of 
the  satchel  once  more. 

By  this  time  both  the  boys  were  so  nearly  winded 
that  speech  was  well  nigh  impossible;  but  Dan 
managed  to  gasp  admiringly : 

"You're  a  dandy,  old  fellow,"  and  then,  with  one 
supreme  effort,  increased  his  pace  a  trifle. 

It  was  fortunate  that  there  were  no  spectators  in 
front  of  Mr.  Sweet's  tent  when  the  boys  came  in 
sight  of  it.  The  barker  was  lounging  in  a  chair 
outside,  and  on  catching  a  glimpse  of  the  boys 
recognized  them  immediately. 

The  crowd  iu  pursuit  would  have  told  a  duller 
man  than  he  professed  to  be  that  there  had  been 
some  serious  trouble,  and,  running  to  meet  the  boys 
as  if  to  intercept  them,  he  cried : 

"  Circle  around  the  canvas,  an'  crawl  underneath, 
so's  that  gang  won't  see  where  you've  gone!" 

The  fugitives  understood  the  scheme  at  once,  and 
making  a  short  detour  as  if  to  avoid  him,  dashed 


164  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

under  the  guy-ropes  at  one  end,  gaining  the  inte- 
rior of  the  tent  before  the  pursuers  arrived. 

Mr.  Sweet  had  just  started  toward  the  flap  to 
ascertain  the  cause  of  the  commotion  when  the 
boys  entered,  and,  thinking  himself  about  to  be 
attacked,  leaped  quickly  back  as  he  seized  an  iron- 
bound  stake. 

"Oh,  it's  you,  eh?"  he  said,  on  recognizing  the 
intruders.  "What's  up?  Are  you  the  thieves 
they're  yellin'  for?" 

Teddy  was  hardly  able  to  speak ;  but  he  held  up 
the  satchel,  as  he  panted : 

"Hazelton's— they're  killin'  him — he— -wants — 
this— saved." 

"Yes,  I  understaand  it  now.  Jump  into  the 
wagon  an'  ^et  under  the  stuff  there.  I'll  take  the 
valise.  Them  kind  of  fakirs  are  bound  to  come  to 
grief  sooner  or  later,  an'  honest  people  get  into  a 
muss  tryin'  to  help  'em.  I'd  like  to  see  the  fair 
where  them  kinds  of  games  wasn't  allowed ;  but 
don't  s'pose  I  ever  shall,  although  it's  always 
promised." 

While  Mr.  Sweet  had  been  grumbling,  and  at  the 
same  time  concealing  the  satchel  under  the  box 
containing  the  snakes,  the  boys  were  doing  their 
best  to  hide  themselves  beneath  the  litter  of  ropes 
and  canvas  which  had  been  carelessly  thrown  into 
the  wagon. 

In  the  meantime  the  pursuers  came  up,  discov- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  165 

ered  the  unpleasant  fact  that  the  fugitives  were  no 
longer  in  sight,  and  began  to  parley  with  the 
barker. 

"I  tried  to  catch  'em,"  the  boys  heard  the  latter 
say ;  "  but  they  got  around  the  tent  before  I  had 
time  to  find  out  what  the  matter  was." 

"They've  gone  inside !"  one  of  the  crowd  shouted. 
"Don't  let's  allow  swindlers  to  get  the  best  of  us 
so  easy!" 

"That's  the  way  to  talk  I"  another  cried.  "  We'll 
have  'em  out  if  the  show  has  to  come  down !" 

At  this  moment  Mr.  Sweet,  looking  calm  and  un- 
disturbed, emerged  from  the  flap. 

"Bring  out  them  boys,  or  down  comes  your  tent!" 
a  man  yelled. 

"  I  reckon  the  wisest  plan  for  you  to  pursue  is  to 
wait  till  I  find  out  what  all  this  means,"  the  pro- 
prietor of  the  museum  said  loudly,  at  the  same  time 
beckoning  the  barker  and  the  clown  to  his  side. 
"  It  looks  to  me  as  if  this  was  the  same  gang  who 
came  here  last  night  tryin'  to  clean  us  out,  an'  war- 
rants for  their  arrest  are  in  the  hands  of  the  con- 
stables now.  I  paid  one  hundred  dollars  for  the 
privilege  of  exhibitin'  here,  an'  that  means  I'm  to 
have  all  the  protection  the  managers  of  this  fair 
and  the  authorities  of  the  town  can  give  me.  I've 
warned  you  off ;  but  if  you  still  want  to  finish  up 
the  work  of  last  night,  an'  the  constables  don't  come 
in  time,  there  are  three  of  us  here  who  are  good  for 


166  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

twice  that  number  of  your  gang,  an'  when  a  man 
gets  a  tap  over  the  head  with  one  of  these  he's  not 
in  it  any  longer!" 

Mr.  Sweet  flourished  the  heavy  stake  as  he  spoke, 
and  his  employes  shov/ed  that  they  were  armed  in 
the  same  manner. 

"We  didn't  come  to  disturb  you,"  one  of  the 
crowd  said,  in  a  milder  tone,  as  the  greater  number 
fell  back  before  the  threats  made  of  invoking  the 
aid  of  the  law.  "All  we  want  is  a  valise  two  boys 
broug:ht  here,  for  in  it  is  quite  a  pile  of  our 
money." 

"How  did  they  get  it  from  you?"  the  proprietor 
of  the  museum  asked  for  the  purpose  of  gaining 
time  in  the  hope  the  constables  would  put  in  an 
appearance, 

"We  were  swindled  by  a  jewelry  agent,  an'  are 
goin'  to  get])ack  our  own." 

"Oh,  you  are,  eh?  Well,  I  haven't  got  the  stuff; 
but  if  you  allow  yourselves  to  be  swindled,  will  you 
help  matters  by  turning  thieves?  You  can  sue  the 
man  who  has  done  you  up;  but  there's  a  penalty 
for  stealing,  as  you  will  find  out  if  you  keep  on  in 
this  way." 

The  less  impetuous  among  the  pursuers  under- 
stood that  the  showman  was  speaking  only  the 
truth,  and,  now  that  they  had  an  opportunity  for  re- 
flection, began  to  be  ashamed  of  the  part  they  were 
playing.    One  by  one  walked  away  without  making 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  167 

any  further  remonstrance,  and  in  a  short  lime  only 
a  dozen  or  so  remained  in  front  of  the  tent. 

All  these  were  young  men,  and  several  had  been 
drinking,  therefore  the  danger  was  not  yet  past. 

"  You  stand  here  and  brain  the  first  man  who 
attempts  to  enter,"  Mr.  Sweet  said,  as  he  disap- 
peared inside  the  tent.  Then  hurrying  to  where 
Teddy  and  Dan  were  hidden,  he  whispered : 

''  It  may  be  possible  that  in  order  to  avoid  a  row 
I  shall  be  obliged  to  let  this  gang  in.  There  is  no 
one  behind  the  canvas,  and  you  can  slip  out  read- 
ily. Go  directly  back  where  you  belong,  an'  if 
anybody  accuses  you  of  being  the  boys  who  brought 
away  the  valise  deny  it.  I'm  goin'  to  make  a  big 
bluff  about  lookin'  for  constables,  an'  the  minute 
you  hear  me  talking,  move  lively." 

"What  about  Hazelton's  money?"  Teddy  asked. 

"He'll  find  it  here  when  he  dares  to  come  for  it." 

An  instant  later  the  fugitives  heard  him  say  from 
the  outside: 

"I  propose  to  call  for  help  in  case  you  very 
respectable  young  gentleman  should  take  a  notion 
to  break  in  and  steal." 

"All  we  ask  is  that  you'll  turn  out  them  boys," 
one  of  the  party  replied,  angrily,  "for,  whether  it's 
stealing  or  not,  we're  bound  to  have  that  fakir's 
money." 

"That  part  of  it  is  nothing  tome.  There  are  no 
boys  inside,  an'  if  you  want  to  go  in  one  at  a  time, 


168  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

so  there'll  be  no  chance  of  gettin'  the  best  of  me  an' 
destroyin'  my  property,  I  don't  think  there'll  be 
any  objection  made." 

"Now's  our  time  before  they  come?"  Dan  whis- 
pered, as  he  slipped  softly  down  from  the  wagon, 
and  Teddy  followed. 

It  Avas  but  the  work  of  a  moment  to  raise  the 
canvas  and  step  out.  There  was  absolutely  no  one 
in  sight.  The  tent  had  been  erected  near  the  edge 
of  the  grounds,  and  there  was  nothing  in  the  vicin- 
ity to  attract  the  sight-seers. 

"We'll  get  over  the  fence,  an'  come  in  through 
the  main  gate.  It's  better  to  pay  for  admission 
than  to  let  people  suspect  we  were  the  ones  who 
have  been  chased." 

"Go  on;  I'll  stay  close  at  your  heels." 

Five  minutes  later  they  were  walking  along  the 
dusty  road  looking  as  innocent  as  possible,  and 
feeling  comparatively  safe. 

"Do  you  suppose  any  one  will  know  us?"  Teddy 
asked  after  they  had  trudged  some  distance  in 
silence. 

"There  can't  be  much  danger  of  that.  All  the 
crowd  saw  were  our  backs,  and,  besides,  after  those 
fellows  cool  off  they'll  be  ashamed  of  themselves. 
I  don't  reckon  you'll  have  any  trouble;  but  I  may 
get  it  hot  from  the  boss  because  I've  been  away  so 
long." 

"I  guess  there  won't  be  much  danger  of  that; 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  169 

but  if  anything  should  happen  come  to  my  stand. 
After  what  has  happened  I  reckon  I  can  afford  to 
whack  up  with  you  on  some  of  the  profits,  especially 
since  every  one  says  to-morrow  is  to  be  such  a  big 
day.     Where  do  you  suppose  Hazelton  is?" 

"He  must  have  had  a  chance  to  get  off  when  the 
men  started  for  us;  but  I'll  bet  he  don't  look  as 
nice  as  he  did  this  morning." 

By  this  time  the  boys  were  at  the  ticket-office, 
and,  paying  the  price  of  admission,  they  walked  into 
the  inclosure  without  atiracting  the  slightest  atten- 
tion. 

On  the  way  to  his  place  of  business  Teddy 
chanced  to  think  of  the  errand  on  which  they  had 
started  out,  and  he  bought  a  generous  supply  of 
sandwiches  for  Dan,  Tim,  and  himself. 

When  the  two  arrived  at  the  cane-board  busi- 
ness was  at  its  height,  and  the  clerk  and  his  assist- 
ant were  having  quite  as  much  as  they  could  do  to 
attend  to  the  customers. 

This  saved  Teddy  the  necessity  of  entering  into 
any  explanation  while  strangers  were  near,  and 
he  immediately  went  to  work,  not  having  an  idle 
moment  until  nearly  nightfall,  when  the  greater 
portion  of  the  visitors  had  departed. 

"Where  did  you  and  Dan  go  that  you  staid  away 
so  long?"  Tim  asked  as  he  and  Teddy  began  to 
pack  up  the  stock  of  canes  and  knives. 

"Oh,  it's  a  long  story;  I'll  tell  you  all  about  it 


170  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

while  we  are  eating  supper,"  Teddy  replied,  with  a 
significant  look  in  the  direction  of  the  assistant. 

Tim  understood  that  there  was  some  secret 
regarding  the  matter,  and  he  at  once  proceeded  to 
get  rid  of  a  possible  eavesdropper  by  saying  to  the 
assistant: 

"Here's  the  money  I  promised.  There's  no  need 
of  your  stay  in'  any  longer." 

"Shall  1  come  to  work  in  the  morning?" 

Tim  looked  toward  his  employer,  and  the  latter 
said : 

"  Yes,  of  course,  if  it  is  pleasant  weather.  Every- 
body says  there'll  be  a  bigger  crowd  than  ever,  an' 
I  reckon  we  shall  have  work  enough  for  all  hands." 

The  boy  had  but  just  taken  his  departure  when 
Dan  approached,  looking  very  mournful. 

"Have  you  been  bounced?"  Teddy  cried,  ex- 
citedly. 

"jSTot  a  bit  of  it;  but  look  here,"  and  Dan  held  up 
a  staw  hat.  "That's  poor  Sam's !  His  boat  has  been 
found  bottom  up,  an'  this,  with  one  of  the  oars, 
was  fished  out  of  the  creek  a  few  moments  ago. 
While  we  were  talking  rough  about  him  the  poor 
boy  was  drowning!" 


BOY  AT  A  CO UNTR Y  FAIR.  171 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

THE  ARREST. 

TEDDY  was  dazed  by  the  tidings  and  apparent 
proof  of  Sam's  death.  Without  being  able  to  ex- 
plain why,  it  seemed  as  if  the  amateur  detective 
was  not  the  sort  of  a  boy  who  might  be  expected 
to  depart  this  life  suddenly,  and  the  news  saddened 
him  wonderfully. 

"Just  think,"  he  said,  "the  poor  fellow  wouldn't 
try  to  save  the  women  because  of  the  danger  of 
approaching  a  drowning  person,  and  in  such  a 
short  time  he  himself  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  creek." 

"If  he  has  got  any  folks  some  word  ought  to  be 
sent  to  them." 

"  I  never  heard  him  say  whether  he  had  or  not. 
Will  any  one  search  for  the  body?" 

"The  man  who  represents  the  Davis  Company 
says  he  will  have  men  out  in  the  morning,  if  it  is 
possible  to  hire  any;  if  not,  there  will  be  plenty 
wanting  a  job  by  Saturday,  and  he  can  then  get 
all  he  wants.  It's  bound  to  be  a  long  search,  for 
there's  no  telling  where  the  boat  capsized." 

Nothing  save  Sam's  untimely  fate  was  spoken  of 
during  the  time  they  were  packing  up  the  goods 


172  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

and  carrying  them  to  the  tent,  and  then  Mr.  Sweet, 
after  having  been  told  the  sad  news,  said,  without 
commenting  upon  it : 

"You  boys  had  better  go  to  supper  now,  an'  get 
back  before  dark,  for  there's  no  knowin'  but  that 
some  of  those  fellows  who  called  on  me  may  be 
waiting  to  take  their  revenge  out  on  you." 

"How  did  you  get  rid  of  them?"  Dan  asked. 

"That  part  of  it  was  as  easy  as  rollin'  off  a  log, 
after  you  boys  were  out  of  sight.  I  let  'em  in  one 
at  a  time,  an'  the  chumps  never  tumbled  to  the  fact 
that  you  had  gone  under  the  canvas.  The}^  came  to 
the  conclusion  you  must  have  climbed  over  the 
fence,  an'  we  didn't  take  the  trouble  to  show  them 
the  mistake.  It  was  a  close  shave,  though.  At  one 
time,  when  I  was  talkin'  so  loud  about  stealing,  I 
thought  we'd  have  the  toughest  kind  of  a  row." 

"Is  the  money  all  right?" 

"It's  jest  where  I  left  it,  an'  won't  be  touched 
till  he  comes  to  claim  it,  unless  you  boys  want  to 
take  charge  of  the  property." 

"Indeed  we  don't,"  Teddy  replied,  quickly.  "I've 
had  all  I  want  of  such  caretaking." 

"Then  go  to  supper,  an'  hurry  back." 

The  boys  waited  only  long  enough  to  stow  their 
goods  in  the  wagon,  and  then  Mr.  Sweet's  advice 
was  acted  upon. 

As  a  matter  of  course  Tim  wanted  to  know  what 
the   proprietor  of  the  museum    had    been  talking 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  173 

about,  and  as  they  were  walking  across  the  grounds 
Teddy  told  the  whole  story,  concluding  by  say- 
ing : 

"It  was  a  little  the  worst  scrape  I  ever  got  into; 
but  after  the  money  had  been  placed  in  our  hands, 
and  the  man  who  left  it  went  off,  we  couldn't  do 
different  from  what  we  did." 

"That  Hazelton  had  no  business  to  get  you  into 
such  a  row,"  Tim  replied,  indignantly.  "Why 
didn't  he  hang  on  to  the  stuff,  an'  take  his  lickin' 
like  a  man  ?" 

"I  don't  think  he  knew  it  was  to  be  given  to  us. 
The  fellow  who  did  it  had  seen  him  leave  the 
satchel  with  us  once,  most  likely,  an'  when  there 
was  dano^er  of  being  robbed,  believed  we  could  look 
out  for  it  again.  It's  the  last  time  such  a  thing  will 
happen,  for  I'm  going  to  tell  Hazelton  that  I  don't 
want  to  be  mixed  up  in  his  business." 

At  this  point  Dan  changed  the  subject  of  conver- 
sation by  speculating  upon  the  way  in  which  Sam 
met  his  death,  and  this  topic  was  such  a  mournful 
one  that  nothing  else  was  thought  of  until  the  party 
returned  to  the  tent  once  more. 

Then  came  the  question  of  how  much  money  had 
been  taken  in  during  the  day,  and  after  figuring 
up  the  amount  he  had  spent,  Teddy  reckoned  the 
cash  on  hand,  announcing  the  result  as  follows : 

"  Countin'  what  I  paid  out,  we've  taken  sixty-one 
dollars  an'  seventy  cents  since  morning.     It  don't 


174         THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

seem  reasonable,  but  a  feller  has  to  believe  it  after 
seein'  the  money." 

"You'll  have  a  much  better  trade  to-morrow, 
if  it  is  fair,  and  you're  not  recognized  as  one  of  the 
boys  who  helped  to  get  Hazelton's  money  away," 
Mr.  Sweet  said,  cheerily.  "I  predict  that  the  re- 
ceipts will  figure  up  hard  on  to  a  hundred  dollars." 

Teddy  gasped  like  a  person  who  is  suddenly 
submerged  in  cold  water  at  the  thought  of  earning 
so  much,  and  he  realized  that  if  such  should  be  the 
case  he  Avould  be  able  to  assist  his  mother  very 
materially. 

"I'll  pay  you,  Tim,  before  I  get  so  dazzled  as  to 
forget  it,"  he  said,  with  a  laugh,  and  the  clerk  felt 
alrrrost  as  rich  as  his  employer  when  he  received 
six  dollars  and  seventeen  cents  for  a  day's  labor 
which  came  very  near  being  sport. 

"I  only  wish  the  fair  held  on  for  six  months,"  he 
said,  gleefully.  "It  seems  too  bad  that  there  are 
only  two  days  more,  for  Saturday  never  counts." 

"You  can  go  to  the  Holtown  fair,  and  try  it  for 
yourself.  I'll  give  you  what  stock  we  have  left  on 
hand." 

"Then  I'll  do  it,"  Tim  replied,  emphatically,  and 
straightway  he  began  to  speculate  as  to  the  enor- 
mous amount  of  money  he  would  earn. 

Teddy  tied  his  money  in  as  compact  a  packasfe  as 
possible,  intending  to  give  it  to  his  mother  when 
she  should  arrive  on  the  morrow,  and  Mr.    Sweet 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  175 

had  advised  that  all  hands  "turn  m"  early,  when 
the  flap  was  raised,  admitting  a  man  who  appeared 
to  be  covered  v/ith  adhesive  plaster  and  bandages. 

Not  until  the  newcomer  had  approached  within 
the  circle  of  light  cast  by  the  lantern  did  the  occu- 
pants of  the  tent  recognize  him  as  the  jewelry  fakir, 
and  Teddy  cried  in  surprise : 

"Why,  Mr.  Hazelton!  We  didn't  expect  to  see 
you  to-night!" 

"Did  you  think  I  was  dead?" 

"  It  looked  as  if  you  would  be  killed  for  a  cer- 
tainty, and  you  did  get  pretty  well  done  up." 

"  Yes ;  as  the  reports  of  the  prize  fights  put  it,  *T'm 
badly  disfigured,  but  still  in  the  ring.'  Was  the 
money  taken  away  all  right?" 

"Mr.  Sweet  has  hidden  it." 

"And  how  did  you  come  out  of  the  scrape?" 

"If  it  hadn't  been  for  the  folks  here  we  should 
have  fared  about  the  same  as  you  did." 

"  I'm  sorry,  my  boy,  that  you  were  dragged  into 
the  matter,  and  it  wouldn't  have  happened  if  I'd 
understood  what  Kelly  was  going  to  do.  He  knew 
you  could  be  trusted,  and  so  turned  it  over;  but  it 
was  a  mean  situation  to  put  you  in." 

"It  wasn't  pleasant  for  any  of  us,"  Mr.  Sweet 
said;  "but  you  can  thank  the  boys  for  hanging  on 
to  the  bag  as  if  it  had  been  their  own.  Most  fellows 
of  their  age  would  have  dropped  it  long  before 
reaching  here.     How  did  you  get  off?" 


176  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"When  the  cry  was  raised  that  the  money  had 
gone  the  greater  portion  of  the  crowd  started  in 
pursuit,  an'  my  partners  and  I  managed  to  hold 
our  own  until  a  couple  of  constables  came  up.  They 
took  charge  of  the  team,  and  gave  us  a  chance  to 
slip  through  the  gates." 

"What  are  you  going  to  do  now?  Try  it  to-mor- 
row ?" 

"With  this  face?  Well,  I  should  say  not.  There 
is  a  fellow  here  who  has  bought  my  right  to  the 
privilege,  and  I  shall  leave  Peach  Bottom  early  in 
the  morning." 

"That's  about  the  best  thing  you  can  do,  and  I'd 
advise  that  you  don't  spend  much  time  out  of  doors 
until  then." 

"I'm  not  intending  to.  It  was  necessary  to  come 
here,  and,  unless  you  object,  I'll  stay  a  while  so's 
they  will  have  time  to  sober  up  a  bit." 

"You're  welcome  to  what  we've  got,  even  if  I 
don't  like  your  way  of  doing  business." 
"  I  want  to  straighten  matters  with  the  boys,  and 

if  they " 

Hazelton  did  not  finish  the  sentence,  for  at  that 

moment  the  canvas  flap  was  pushed  aside  and  a 

man  entered  with  an  unmistakable  air  of  authority. 

"Hold  on  there,  friend,"  Mr.  Sweet  shouted.   "We 

don't  allow  visitors  at  this  time  of  night." 

"I  understand  that,  but  reckon  you  won't  make 
any  very  big  kick  when  I  tell  you  that   I'm   one   of 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  177 

the  deputy  sheriffs  of  this  county,  and  have  come 
to  serve  a  warrant." 

"On  whom?" 

"Frank  Hazelton,  who  claims  to  bean  agent  for  a 
firm  of  jewelry  manufacturers.  I  believe  you're  the 
man,"  he  added,  approaching  the  disfigured  fakir. 

"You've  got  that  part  of  it  straight  enough,  but 
what  am  I  to  be  arrested  for?" 

"  You  are  suspected  of  being  concerned  in  the 
burglary  which  was  committed  in  this  town  last 
night." 

Hazelton  did  not  express  nearly  as  much  surprise 
as  the  boys,  who  were  really  dazed  by  the  an- 
nouncement. 

"So  Hargreaves  has  finally  succeeded,"  the  fakir 
said  half  to  himself,  and  the  oillcer  replied,  quickly : 

"This  has  nothing  to  do  with  old  Nathan's  affair, 
although  it  does  look  as  if  the  two  burglaries  were 
committed  by  the  same  person." 

Hazelton  remained  silent  several  seconds,  during 
which  time  the  sheriff  waited  patiently  for  him  to 
say  he  was  ready  to  go,  and  then  he  asked : 

"  Can  I  speak  to  one  of  these  boys  in  private.  It 
has  nothing  to  do  with  the  charge,  but  I  want  him 
to  aid  me  in  getting  a  good  lawyer. " 

"  I  am  sorry  to  say  I  must  hear  all  that  is  talked 
about,  however  trifling  it  may  be." 

"Well,  I  don't  suppose  it  can  make  much  differ- 
ence," and  without  rising  from  his  seat,  Hazelton 


178  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

continued,  "  Teddy,  you  believe  I  had  nothing  to  do 
with  this  thing?" 

"  I  can  tell  what  I  heard  those " 

"Don't  tell  an3^thing  yet  a  while;  at  least,  not 
now.  I  want  you  to  do  this  for  me :  After  the  fair 
closes  go  to  that  merchant  who  was  so  kind  to  you, 
and  explain  to  him  the  whole  affair,  including  your 
suspicions.  Ask  him  to  direct  you  to  the  best  attor- 
ney in  the  county;  get  all  the  money  from  Mr. 
Sweet  that  may  be  needed,  and  pay  the  lawyer's 
fee.  Send  him  to  me  as  soon  afterward  as  possible. 
It  is  nothing  more  serious  than  lying  in  jail  a  few 
days,  and  that  won't  be  such  a  great  hardship,  now 
I've  got  this  face  on  me." 

"Shall  I " 

"There  is  no  need  of  saying  anything  more,"  Ha- 
zelton  interrupted,  fearing  the  boy  was  about  to 
speak  of  the  money  the  proprietor  of  the  museum 
had  hidden.  "  The  merclmnt  will  understand  and 
advise  if  you  tell  him  everything— that  is,  I  think 
he  will ;  but  in  case  he  refuses,  talk  with  some  one 
else  whom  you  can  trust." 

As  he  finished  speaking  the  fakir  arose  to  his 
feet,  motioned  to  the  officer,  and  walked  directly 
out  of  the  tent  without  so  much  as  bidding  the  oth- 
ers goodby.  ' 

No  one  spoke  until  after  he  had  been  absent  sev- 
eral minutes,  and  then  Teddy  asked,  with  a  long- 
drawn  sigh : 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  179 

"  Do  you  think  he  will  come  out  all  right.,  Mr. 
Sweet?" 

"That's  hard  to  say,  for  I  don't  know  how  much 
proof  they  may  have  against  him.  It's  his  business 
that  has  done  a  great  deal  toward  inducing  a  mag- 
istrate to  issue  the  warrant,  for  once  a  man  shows 
himself  to  be  a  swindler,  anything  else  can  readily 
be  believed  of  him." 

"But  what  about  his  money?"  Dan  asked. 

"That  is  to  be  handed  over  to  Teddy." 

"What  have  I  got  to  do  with  it?"  the  boy  asked, 
in  amazement. 

"  He  told  us  that  as  plainly  as  he  dared  to  talk  be- 
fore the  officer,  and  we'll  count  it  out,  after  which 
his  stock  in  trade  shall  be  buried,  for  I  want  noth- 
ing to  do  with  it." 


180  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER     XX. 
A  PROPOSITION 

TEDDY  had  the  most  decided  objections  to  taking 
charge  of  Hazelton's  nione}^  and  for  several 
reasons.  In  the  first  place  he  did  not  want  to  have 
the  responsibility,  and  again,  the  fact  of  its  being  in 
his  possession  seemed  to  make  him  a  partner  in  the 
business. 

Mr.  Sweet  was  determined,  however.  He  insisted 
that  Hazelton  had  stated  this  as  plainly  as  was  pos- 
sible under  the  circumstances,  and,  despite  the  boy's 
protests,  immediately  began  the  transfer. 

"It.  shall  be  done  in  such  a  way  that  he  can't  ac- 
cuse you  of  having  taken  any,"  the  proprietor  said, 
as  he  pulled  the  satchel  from  its  hiding-place  and 
broke  the  lock  open  with  a  hatchet.  "We'll  count 
it  in  the  presence  of  all  hands,  and  each  one  shall 
give  Teddy  a  written  statement  of  how  much  was 
found." 

An  exclamation  of  surprise  burst  from  Tim's  lips 
as  the  receptacle  was  spread  out  on  the  ground,  for 
it  appeared  to  be  literally  crammed  with  money. 

Mr.  Sweet  separated   the  silver  from  the  bank 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  Fj)  TR.  181 

notes,  spreading  both  on  the  ground  where  they 
could  be  seen  by  every  person  present,  and  then  he 
counted  them  slowly,  taking  care  that  the  specta- 
tors were  following  his  every  movement. 

"I  make  it  three  hundred  an'  forty-eight  dollars," 
he  announced.  "If  there's  anybody  here  who  ain't 
sure  that's  right,  say  so  now." 

Each  member  of  the  party  had  seen  the  amount 
counted,  and  agreed  with  the  result  as  declared  by 
Mr.  Sweet,  who  forthwith  wrote  the  following : 

"We,  the  undersigned,  have  seen  a  valise  belong- 
ing to  Frank  Hazelton  broken  open,  and  certify 
that  three  hundred  and  forty-eight  dollars,  the  only 
money  found  therein,  was  handed  by  Jacob  Sweet 
to  Edward  Hargreaves  in  conformance  with  the  or- 
ders, as  we  understood  them,  from  tlie  said  Frank 
Hazelton." 

"Now  I  want  every  one  to  sign  that,"  Mr.  Sweet 
said,  as  he  handed  his  lead-pencil  first  to  the  barker, 
"and  then  Teddy  and  I  will  have  some  proof  of  the 
amount." 

It  required  quite  a  while  for  all  to  conform  with 
the  wishes  of  the  proprietor  of  the  museum,  owing 
to  the  fact  that  several  of  the  party  were  far  from 
being  skillful  penmen,  but  the  task  was  finally  ac- 
complished, and  as  the  money  was  handed  to  Teddy, 
the  latter  asked,  ruefully : 

"What  shall  I  do  with  it?  I'm  afraid  of  losing  so 
much." 

"That's  a  risk  Hazelton  is  bound  to  take.     Fasten 


182  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

it  in  your  clothes  somehow,  an'  be  sure  you  don't 
get  into  any  row  where  it  can  be  stolen." 

By  the  aid  of  many  pins,  and  with  the  assistance 
of  both  Dan  and  Tim,  Teddy  finally  succeeded  in 
disposing  of  the  money  about  his  person  in  such  a 
way  that  it  was  not  an  unusual  burden,  and  then  Mr. 
Sweet  insisted  that  all  hands  should  try  to  get  some 
rest  in  order  to  be  fresh  for  the  supposedly  enor- 
mous amount  of  work  to  be  done  on  the  following 
day. 

Teddy  lay  down  on  the  ground  with  the  others, 
but  it  was  many  hours  before  his  eyes  were  closed 
in  slumber.  Sam's  untimely  death,  the  guardian- 
ship of  so  much  money,  and  his  own  business  affairs 
all  served  to  keep  his  eyes  open  until  nearly  mid- 
night:, when  he  fell  into  a  sleep  so  troubled  by  fright- 
ful dreams  that  it  was  far  from  being  restful. 

It  seemed  as  if  he  had  but  just  lost  consciousness 
when  Mr.  Sweet  aroused  him  with  the  information 
that  the  "  big"  day  of  the  fair  was  breaking. 

Turn  out  an'  get  your  breakfast  before  sunrise,  for 
on  this  morning  the  early  bird  will  pick  up  many  a 
penny  while  the  lazy  ones  are  yet  in  bed,  an'  fakirs 
must  make  hay  when  the  sun  shines." 

Teddy  was  on  his  feet  in  an  instant,  and  half  an 
hour  later,  having  broken  his  fast,  he  was  at  the 
booth  with  his  clerk  and  Dan,  the  latter  volunteer- 
ing his  assistance  until  the  exhibition  buildings 
should  be  opened. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  183 

The  proprietor  of  the  museum  had  advised  him 
well;  the  receipts  of  the  cane  and  knife  boards  were 
nearly  five  dollars  before  more  than  half  of  the 
booths  were  in  condition  for  trade,  because  the 
trains  were  running  unusually  early  in  order  to  ac- 
commodate the  crowds,  and  when  Dan  felt  obliged 
to  leave,  business  was  so  good  that  the  proprietor, 
clerk,  and  assistant  were  all  working  industriously. 

" If  I  can  get  off  I'll  see  you  about  noon,"  Dan 
said,  as  he  walked  away,  and  Teddy  replied : 

"Be  sure  to  come,  for  mother  will  be  here,  and  I 
want  you  to  meet  her." 

From  that  time  until  nine  o'clock  the  crowd  in- 
creased in  numbers,  and  as  Teddy  said  during  a  lull 
in  business,  "it  seemed  as  if  the  grounds  were  so 
full  that  no  more  could  get  in." 

When  Mrs.  Hargreaves  arrived  her  son  could  pay 
little  attention  to  her,  but  he  proposed  that  she 
should  amuse  herself  by  looking  at  the  different  ex- 
hibits until  nearly  noon,  when  he  stated  that  he 
would  take  an  hour  off,  no  matter  how  great  a  rush 
of  customers  might  be  around  his  booth. 

"I  earned  sixty  dollars  yesterday,  an'  before 
night  I'll  have  a  hundred  more,  so  there's  little 
doubt  that  this  week's  work  as  a  fakir  will  en- 
able me  to  pay  all  you  owe  on  the  house,"  he  whis- 
pered, triumphantly,  and  his  mother  walked  away, 
hardly  daring  to  believe  what  Teddy  had  told  her. 

During  the  next  hour  it  seemed  as  if  a  steady 


184  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

stream  of  money  was  flowing  into  the  box,  and 
Teddy  was  feeling  confident  that  Mr.  Sweet's  pre- 
diction w^ould  prove  to  be  correct,  when  tlie  one 
especial  man  he  wanted  to  see  came  up  with  a 
folded  paper  in  his  hand. 

It  was  the  merchant  from  Waterville,  and  he 
said,  as  he  handed  the  document  to  the  boy : 

"  Here  is  the  receipted  bill,  and  I  am  more  than 
glad  to  see  you  doing  so  well." 

"Can  I  talk  with  you  for  five  minutes?"  Teddy 
asked,  hardly  noticing  the  paper  as  he  put  it  in  his 
pocket. 

"As  long  as  you  want  to.  What  is  the  matter? 
Kunning  out  of  stock?" 

"Oh,  no,  your  clerk  made  such  a  good  selection 
for  me  that  I've  got  all  I  shall  need.  This  is  some- 
thing more  important." 

Then  Teddy  hurriedly  told  the  merchant  how  and 
where  he  had  first  met  Hazelton ;  explained  fully 
what  the  iatter's  business  was ;  of  the  accusations 
made  by  Uncle  Nathan;  what  he  and  Dan  had 
heard  and  seen,  and  concluded  by  repeating  the  re- 
quest made  by  the  fakir  as  he  was  led  away  to  jail. 

"Are  you  willing  to  do  anything  for  him?"  the 
boy  asked,  as  his  story  was  finished. 

"  I  can't  say  it  is  a  matter  which  appeals  very 
strongly  to  my  sympathies,  because  of  the  swindles 
he  perpetrated,  but  if  it  is  an  unjust  accusation 
something   should  be   done   to  help  him.     The   one 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  185 

lawyer  above  all  others  who  can  be  of  assistance 
came  over  with  me  this  morning.  I  will  see  him, 
and  later  in  the  day  you  shall  have  a  call  from  us." 

"Before  you  go  I  wish  you  would  take  this 
money,"  Teddy  said,  earnestly.  "It  is  too  large  an 
amount  for  me  to  carry  around,  and  it  will  be  safe 
with  you." 

The  merchant  consented  to  take  charge  of  Hazel- 
ton's  ill-gotten  gains,  and  Teddy  felt  decidedly  re- 
lieved when  the  cash  was  in  another's  keeping,  and 
he  had  nothing  of  more  value  than  an  acknowledg- 
ment of  the  same  to  look  after. 

"  In  this  matter  I  shall  recognize  no  other  order 
than  yours,"  the  merchant  said  when  the  transac- 
tion was  concluded,  "  and  if  the  fakir  should  suc- 
ceed in  regaining  his  liberty  he  must  come  to  you 
for  the  necessary  document. 

"  I  don't  care  how  it  is  fixed  so  long  as  the  money 
is  not  in  my  hands,"  Teddy  replied,  in  a  tone  of  sat- 
isfaction, and  then  he  was  called  upon  to  attend  to 
another  rush  of  customers,  every  one  of  whom  was 
eager  to  be  waited  upon  first. 

Another  hour  passed,  and  it  was  more  evident 
than  before  that  Mr.  Sweet  had  been  correct  when 
he  stated  the  sum  which  should  be  taken  in  at  the 
cane-board. 

Teddy,  having  breakfasted  early,  was  so  hungry 
that  he  was  on  the  point  of  going  out  to  buy  a  sup- 
ply of  sandwiches,  when  another  visitor  arrived. 


186  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

This  was  no  less  a  personage  than  Uncle  Nathan, 
and  he  greeted  his  nephew  with  the  utmost  cordial- 
ity, as  he  said : 

"  It  looks  to  me  as  if  you  were  makin'  a  power  of 
money  here,  Teddy.  I  had  no  idea  these  triflin' 
games  would  so  attract  the  people." 

Glad  to  be  on  pleasant  terms  with  the  old  man 
once  more,  Teddy  stated  that  they  had  been  at 
work  very  hard  since  the  first  train  arrived,  and 
concluded  by  saying: 

"I  took  over  sixty  dollars  yesterday,  and  Mr. 
Sweet  says  it'll  come  near  to  a  hundred  to- 
day." 

"Sixty  dollars!"  the  old  man  cried.  "Are  you 
telling  me  the  truth,  Teddy  Hargreaves?" 

"Of  course  I  am,  an'  I've  got  the  money  in  my 
pocket  to  prove  it." 

"Why,  at  this  rate  you'll  soon  be  a  rich  man,  for 
you  don't  seem  to  lose  much  of  the  stock." 

"We  buy  a  good  many  canes  or  knives  back. 
When  a  man  puts  a  ring  over  one  that  he  don't 
want  we  take  it  in,  and  give  him  five  more  chances. 
In  that  way  there  is  very  little  goes  out  compared 
to  the  amount  of  money  received." 

Uncle  Nathan  looked  around  at  the  players  for  a 
moment,  and  then  in  a  very  confidential  tone  he 
whispered : 

"See  here,  Teddy,  don't  you  want  a  partner?  I'll 
pay  for  the  stock  you  bought,  an' " 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  187 

"I've  already  done  that  out  of  yesterday's  re- 
ceipts," Teddy  cried.  "All  the  bills  are  settled,  an' 
what  comes  in  now  is  clear  profit." 

"But  suppose  I  stood  here  an'  called  up  the  peo- 
ple I  know,  don't  you  think  it  would  make  business 
better?" 

"And  if  it  should,  do  you  think  we  could  attend 
to  more  customers?  Every  minute  I  talk  with  you 
is  so  much  money  lost,  for  the  other  fellers  can't 
pick  up  rings  an'  make  change  fast  enough." 

"Does  that  mean  you  don't  want  to  go  into  busi- 
ness with  me?"  the  old  man  asked,  angrily. 

"  No ;  but  it  means  that  there  would  be  no  reason 
for  doing  such  a  thing.  I've  got  no  debts,  an'  there 
are  more  customers  than  can  be  attended  to  on  so 
small  a  board.  If  you'd  made  the  proposition  last 
Monday  it  would  have  been  different,  but  now  you 
can't  expect  me,  after  taking  all  the  risk,  to  divide 
after  the  work  has  been  done." 

"Who  lent  you  the  money  to  start,  Teddy  Har- 
greaves?"  Uncle  Nathan  cried,  his  face  growing 
purple  with  rage. 

"You  did." 

"And  how  have  you  repaid  such  generosity? 
How " 

"  I  gave  you  three  dollars  for  the  use  of  fifteen 
two  days,"  was  the  prompt  reply. 

"  But  how  have  you  repaid  me  for  remaining  in- 
active after  my  money  was  stolen?" 


188  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"That  was  something  which  did  not  concern  me, 
therefore  I  had  nothing  to  repay." 

"  It  has  a  great  deal  to  do  with  you,  as  shall  be 
shown  before  this  day  is  ended,  unless  you  consent 
to  take  me  as  an  equal  partner  in  this  enterprise. 
Your  friend  in  crime  has  been  arrested,  and  I  can 
swear  that  he  turned  over  to  you  his  ill-got'ten 
gains.  One  word  from  me  at  thi«  time  and  you  will 
be  in  the  same  prison." 

The  fact  of  his  having  been  threatened  before 
made  Teddy  bold,  and  he  said,  quietly : 

"I  won't  pay  you  for  holding  3'our  tongue.  Uncle 
Nathan,  so  do  whatever  you  choose." 

"I  will  inform  the  authorities  of  all  I  have  learned 
this  morning,  and  we  shall  see  what  the  result  will 
be,"  the  old  man  cried,  in  a  fury,  as  he  walked 
away,  and  despite  the  bold  bearing  he  had  assumed 
Teddy  firmy  believed  that  if  the  magistrate  who  is- 
sued the  warrant  for  Hazelton's  arrest  should  know 
he  was  in  possession  of  the  fakir's  money,  he  would 
be  brought  before  a  bar  of  justice  to  explain  mat- 
ters. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  189 


CHAPTER    XXI. 
WITH    THE   BURGLARS. 

IT  is  well  to  look  in  upon  Sam  during  his  enforced 
vigil  of  Wednesday  night. 

For  at  least  two  hours  after  the  burglars  had  de- 
parted he  thought  of  nothing  save  that  he  would 
soon  be  killed,  and,  perhaps,  devoured  by  wild  ani- 
mals. Then  the  pain  in  his  jaw  and  limbs  became 
so  great,  o^ving  to  the  tightly  bound  cords  and  his 
inability  to  move,  that  his  sufferings  overcame  the 
fear  to  a  certain  extent,  and  he  had  not  even  the 
poor  consolation  of  being  able  to  give  vent  to  an 
audible  groan. 

Notwithstanding  the  mental  and  bodily  torture 
he  did  sleep  occasionally  during  the  night,  which 
appeared  to  be  of  twenty-four  hours'  duration, 
and  never  had  he  heard  a  sweeter  sound  than 
when  his  captors  approached,  the  hum  of  their 
voices  reaching  him  before  the  noise  of  their  foot- 
steps. 

The  burglars  were  laden  with  packages  of  what 
appeared    to  be  merchandise,  and  by  the  faint  light 


190  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

of  the  coming  day  Sam  could  see  that  they  looked 
heated  and  tired. 

"Well,  how's  our  detective?"  Long  Jim  asked, 
with  a  laugh,  as  he  threw  himself  on  the  ground  by 
the  boy's  side.  "Has  he  decided  to  arrest  his  vic- 
tims, or  will  he  give  them  a  little  show  of  leaving 
the  country?" 

As  a  matter  of  course  Sam  could  not  make  any 
reply;  but  the  expression  in  his  eyes  must  have  told 
of  the  suffering  which  he  was  forced  to  endure,  for 
Phil  said,  as  he  began  to  untie  the  rope  holding  the 
gag  in  place : 

"There's  no  need  of  keepin' him  trussed  up  any 
longer,  an'  I  reckon  it'll  be  a  relief  to  have  a  chance 
to  use  his  tongue  once  more." 

Even  when  he  was  free  the  prisoner  was  unable 
to  do  more  than  roll  upon  his  side.  His  limbs  were 
so  stiff  and  cramped  that  he  had  no  power  over 
them,  and  he  could  not  have  risen  to  his  feet  just 
at  that  moment  if  his  life  had  depended  upon  it. 

Jim  seemed  to  think  all  this  was  very  comical,  for 
he  laughed  loudly  at  the  prisoner's  helplessness, 
and  suggested  that  if  he  intended  to  follow  the 
business  of  a  detective  to  practice  remaining  in  one 
position  in  order  to  avoid  such  a  complete  collapse 
when  fortune  should  again  be  so  unkind  to  him  as 
she  had  been  in  this  particular  case. 

When  the  burglar's  mirth  finally  ceased  the  two 
men  lighted  their  pipes,  and  proceeded  to  enjoy  a 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  191 

season  of  repose  after  so  much  fatiguing  work, 
while  Sam  was  left  to  recover  as  best  he  might. 

Fully  half  an  hour  elapsed  before  he  succeeded  in 
crawling  to  the  brook  where  he  quenched  his  thirst, 
and  then  his  one  desire  was  for  sleep. 

Stretched  out  on  the  ground  within  a  few  feet  of 
his  captors  the  blissful  unconsciousness  of  slumber 
came  upon  him,  and  the  sun  was  high  in  the  heav- 
ens before  he  awoke. 

Long  Jim  was  seated  on  the  turf,  his  back  against 
a  tree,  and  a  quantity  of  food  spread  out  in  front  of 
him ;  but  Phil  was  not  in  sight. 

"Well,  it  strikes  me  you've  been  takin'  things 
mighty  comfortable,"  the  man  said,  with  a  grunt. 
"  Don't  give  yourself  so  far  over  to  a  life  of  pleasure 
as  to  forget  that  I  promised  to  give  you  the  great- 
est floggin'  of  your  life  before  we  part,  for  then  you 
won't  be  so  much  surprised  when  it  comes." 

The  sight  of  the  food  caused  Sam  to  realize  how 
very  hungry  he  was,  and,  regardless  of  the  subject 
introduced  by  Jim,  he  asked,  timidly : 

"Can't  I  have  somethin'  to  eat?" 

"I  don't  think  you  can,  my  son.  In  the  first 
place  you  haven't  earned  it,  an'  then,  again,  my 
partner  an'  I  may  need  all  the  grub  we've  got  on 
hand." 

Then,  as  if  reconsidering  his  determination,  the 
man  selected  two  small  crackers,  tossing  them  to 
Sam  as  he  cut  a  slice  of  boiled  ham  for  himself. 


192  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"That's  more'n  you  deserve,"  he  said,  as  the 
prisoner  began  to  devour  them  eagerly;  "so  don't 
count  on  gettin'  another  bite  to-day." 

Sam  literally  devoured  the  food,  and  then  went 
once  more  to  the  brook  to  wash  down  the  dry 
repast. 

It  seemed  as  if  the  crackers  increased  rather 
than  satisfied  his  hunger,  and  he  watched  Jim 
eagerly  as  the  latter  finished  a  generous  meal  of 
meat,  cheese,  and  hard-boiled  eggs. 

The  burglar  lighted  his  pipe,  and  paid  no  atten- 
tion to  the  hungry  boy,  who  now  had  ample  time 
for  reflection. 

He  remembered  that  this  was  the  important  day 
of  the  fair,  and  pictured  to  himself  Teddy  and  Dan 
at  their  work  enjoying  themselves  at  the  same 
time  they  were  making  money.  Then  he  thought 
of  what  he  might  be  doing  if  the  detective  fever 
had  not  taken  so  firm  a  hold  upon  him,  and,  despite 
all  efl:*orts  to  prevent  it,  the  tears  coursed  down  his 
cheeks,  plowing  wide  furrows  in  the  dirt  with 
which  his  face  was  encrusted. 

This  painful  revery  was  not  prolonged.  Shortly 
before  noon  Phil  came  into  the  hiding-place,  his 
face  wearing  an  expression  of  entire  satisfaction. 

"I  reckon  we  needn't  be  afraid  any  one  will  be 
here  lookin'  for  us  now  our  detective  has  been 
drowned,"  he  exclaimed. 

"What's  up?"  Jim  asked. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  193 

"Hazelton,  the  fakir,  has  been  arrested  for  the 
burglary  at  Peach  Bottom,  an'  men  are  draggin' 
the  creek  to  find  the  body  of  the  boy  wlio  worked 
for  the  Davis  Boat  Company." 

Sara  actually  shuddered  at  the  thought  that  peo- 
ple were  looking  for  his  corpse,  and  it  gave  him  an 
"uncanny"  feeling,  this  idea  that  he  was  numbered 
with  the  dead. 

"When  was  the  arrest  made?"  Jim  asked. 

"  Last  night.  Old  Nathan  from  the  Run  says  the 
fakir  turned  over  a  lot  of  money  to  the  boy  who 
was  goin'  to  buy  your  cane-board,  an'  it  looks  very 
much  as  if  he  would  be  locked  up  with  the  man 
whom  people  believe  is  his  partner." 

"Nothin'  said  about  what  the  cubs  saw  at  the 
barn?" 

"Not  a  w^ord." 

"Then  we  can  count  on  havin'  the  balance  of  this 
week  in  which  to  leave  the  country." 

"  As  much  as  that,  if  not  more.  Another  load  will 
get  the  stuff  together;  but  I've  been  thinkin' we'd 
better  bury  it  here,  an'  not  try  to  move  a  thing  for 
a  month  or  two." 

"In  that  case  we'd  be  obliged  to  take  that  speci- 
men along,"  and  Jim  pointed  with  a  contemptuous 
gesture  toward  Sam.  "It  wouldn't  do  to  let  goof 
him  while  there  was  a  chance  of  his  givin'  the 
game  away." 

"I'll  'tend  to  that  part  of  it,  an'  guarantee  he 


194  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

won't  be  in  condition  to  make  us  much  trouble," 
Phil  said  so  confidently  that  Sam  began  to  shake 
as  with  an  ague  fit,  for  it  seemed  positive  to  him 
this  burglar  had  decided  upon  his  murder. 

"If  things  were  so  comfortable  like  why  don't 
you  try  to  make  a  dollar,  for  I  reckon  there's  a  big 
crowd  at  the  fair?" 

"The  grounds  are  packed;  but  it  ain't  exactly 
safe  to  do  much  business,"  and  Phil  told  of  the 
assault  upon  Hazelton.  "  The  whole  boilin'  of  'em 
now  think  everybody's  tryin'  to  work  some  swin- 
dle," he  added,  "an'  the  consequence  is  that  it 
would  go  hard  with  any  feller  who  should  slip  up. 
We've  done  enough  for  one  week,  an'  I'd  rather 
not  take  chances  till  this  stuff  is  off  our  hands." 

"Do  you  count  on  goin'  back  agin  to-day?" 

"What's  the  use?" 

"I  only  asked,  for  you're  managin'  this  whole 
thing  now." 

"  My  idea  was  to  sneak  up  alone  to-night ;  take 
on  the  balance  of  the  stuff,  an'  then  lay  low  till 
Saturday  evenin',  when  we'll  make  the  big  break." 

"It's  goin'  to  be  mighty  dull  business  sittin'  here 
with  nothin'  to  do,"  Jim  replied,  in  a  tone  of  com- 
plaint. 

"I  don't  see  how  we  can  fix  it  much  quicker, 
unless  we  go  to-morrow,  while  there  are  so  many 
around." 

It  was  evident  Jim  did  not  relish  the  idea  of 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  195 

leaving  everything  to  his  companion,  and  the  latter 
so  understood  the  expression  on  his  friend's  face, 
for  he  said,  angrily : 

"You're  cookin'  up  some  foolish  scheme  now, 
an'  in  spite  of  all  I  can  do  to  prevent  it  we'll  prob- 
ably succeed  in  gettin'  nabbed  before  matters  are 
arranged  as  they  should  be." 

"Oh,  you're  too  smart,  that's  what  ails  you. 
Take  all  the  soft  snaps,  an'  leave  me  here  to  suck 
my  thumbs  without  even  the  chance  of  movin' 
around." 

"  If  you  think  it's  sich  a  snap  to  row  up  there  an' 
back,  why  don't  you  try  your  hand." 

"That's  jest  what  I'm  vvillin' to  do.  Anything's 
better'n  stayin'  here,  an'  I'd  like  you  to  have  a 
taste  of  it." 

Sam,  who  was  expecting  each  moment  to  see  the 
thieves  come  to  blows,  understood  at  once  that  this 
arrangement  did  not  please  Phil ;  but  he  made  no 
further  object'on  than  to  say : 

"  If  you  wasn't  so  blamed  careless  I'd  like  to  have 
you  do  a  share  of  the  hard  work ;  but  it's  ten  to  one 
you'll  contrive  to  let  everybody  know  you  are 
there." 

"  I  may  not  be  so  all-fired  smart  as  you  think  you 
are,  but  I  ain't  quite  a  fool.  Why,  I've  managed 
bigger  things  than  this  when  you  was  around  beg- 
gin'  for  something'  to  eat,  'cause  you  was  too 
chicken-hearted  to  do  this  kind  of  work." 


196  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"You'd  better  not  say  too  much;  I've  stuck  by 
you  when  worse  men  would  have  a'  given  you  the 
cold  shake,  an'  don't  intend  to  take  any  guff,  es- 
pecially since  I've  had  sich  hard  work  to  get  us  out 
of  the  scrape  you  jumped  into." 

"I  shall  talk,  an'  if  you  don't  want  to  listen,  there 
are  plenty  of  places  to  lay  off  in  outside  of  this." 

Then  the  two  thieves  glared  at  each  other  several 
moments  in  silence,  and  finally  Phil  said,  with  a 
mirthless  laugh : 

"We  won't  fight  till  this  job  is  finished.  Go  an' 
get  the  balance  of  the  stuff,  an'  we'll  make  a  break 
whenever  you  are  readv ;  but  after  one  pull  up  an' 
back  there'll  be  somebody  besides  me  who'll  think 
it  hard  work." 

Then,  in  order  to  heal  the  breach  which  had 
opened  between  them,  Phil  produced  a  suspicious 
looking  black  bottle  from  his  pocket,  and  handed  it 
without  comment  to  his  partner. 

"Why  didn't  you  bring  this  out  before,  an'  then, 
perhaps,  the  business  would 'a'  looked  ditt'erent?" 
Jim  growled,  as  he  drank  long  and  deep;  "but  it 
won't  make  any  difference  about  my  goin'  up  the 
creek." 

"That's  all  right;  I'm  satisfied." 

As  the  two  men  began  to  drink  a  great  hope 
sprang  up  in  Sam's  heart  that  they  would  become 
so  stupefied  by  the  liquor  that  he  might  make  his 
escape.     They  had    not    thought    it    necessary  to 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  197 

replace  the  bonds  which  had  cost  him  so  much 
suffering,  and  at  tlie  ^rst  signs  of  unconsciousness 
he  resolved  to  make  one  dash  for  liberty,  either  by 
taking  to  the  boat,  or  attempting  to  make  his  way 
toward  the  fair  grounds  on  that  side  of  the  creek. 

There  was  no  such  good  fortune  in  store  for  the 
prisoner,  however.  The  men  drank  themselves 
into  the  most  friendly  humor,  and  then  the  supply 
of  liquor  was  exhausted. 

After  advising  Jim  not  to  start  until  sunset,  Phil 
lay  down  to  sleep,  and  Sam  thought  it  wise  to  feign 
slumber  also,  lest  the  wakeful  burglar  should  take 
it  into  his  head  to  administer  the  promised  flog- 
ging in  order  to  pass  the  time  more  agreeably. 


198         THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XXTI. 
A  DISASTER. 

TEDDY  was  decidedly  uncomfortable  in  mind 
after  Uncle  Nathan  departed.  By  a  combination 
of  circumstances  which  could  not  well  have  been 
avoided,  he  had  been  made  to  appear  as  a  confed- 
erate of  Hazelton,  and  if  all  the  facts  concerning 
his  relations  with  the  fakir  should  become  known 
public  opinion  would  be  against  him. 

He  did  not  allow  these  forebodings  to  interfere 
with  business,  however.  Customers  were  plenty; 
the  nickels  were  coming  in  as  rapidly  as  he  could 
make  change,  and  Tim  had  no  hesitancy  in  saying 
that  Mr.  Sweet  had  set  their  receipts  of  one  day 
considerably  too  low. 

"We've  done  twice  as  much  as  we  did  yesterday 
at  this  time,  an'  I'm  countin'  on  gettin'  twelve  or 
fifteen  dollars  as  my  share  of  this  day's  work." 

"It  looks  as  though  you  wouldn't  be  disap- 
pointed, and  that's  a  fact.  I  wish  I  knew  where 
we  could  get  a  few  more  canes,  for  we've  lost  quite 
a  good  many  this  morning." 

"There's  no  time  to  go  to  Waterville;  but  we 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  199 

can  shorten  the  board  by  putting  the  uprights 
closer  together,  an'  that'll  make  the  layout  look  all 
right.  Here  comes  your  mother,  an'  if  you  want  to 
go  off  with  her  I'll  promise  to  keep  things  goin' 
here." 

That  was  exactly  what  Teddy  did  want  to  do. 
He  felt  that  it  was  necessary  she  should  know  the 
true  condition  of  affairs,  and  he  could  not  talk  with 
her  confidentially  near  the  cane-board,  therefore 
when  she  came  up  he  proposed  that  they  walk 
toward  the  grand  stand,  where  the  Waterville 
band  was  doing  its  best  to  put  in  the  shade  the 
performances  of  the  musicians  from  the  Run. 

"You  are  looking  worried,  Teddy,  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves  said,  as  they  moved  away  in  the  proposed 
direction.  "What  is  the  matter?  Isn't  business  as 
good  as  you  expected?" 

"  It  is  a  great  deal  better ;  but  Uncle  Nathan  has 
been  here  again,  and  this  time  I'm  afraid  it  is  in  his 
power  to  do  me  some  harm." 

Then  Teddy  told  his  mother  all  that  had  hap- 
pened, explaining  in  detail  the  suspicions  which 
might  be  aroused  against  him,  and  she  was  quite 
as  disturbed  as  he  when  the  recital  was  finished. 

"I  will  talk  with  him  myself,"  she  said,  after 
some  thought. 

"Don't  do  anything  of  the  kind,  for  then  he  will 
be  worse  than  ever,  thinking  he  can  frighten  me 
into  giving  half  of  all  I  have  made,  and  that  I 


200  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

won't  do,  no  matter  how  many  warrants  he  gets 
out." 

"But  Teddy,  don't  you  thmk " 

Mrs.  Hargreaves  was  interrupted  by  a  cry  from  a 
half-intoxicated  man  who  halted  directly  in  front 
of  the  young  fakir,  and  shouted  to  some  of  his  com- 
panions in  the  rear : 

"Here  he  is  I  This  is  the  sneak  who  helped  take 
that  jewelry  swindler's  money  away.  I  saw  him 
then,  an'  can  swear  to  his  face." 

Asa  matter  of  course  the  tone  as  well  as  the 
words  was  sufficient  to  attract  a  crowed  in  this 
place  where  the  throng  was  so  dense  that  one  could 
only  make  his  way  from  one  portion  of  the  grounds 
to  the  other  w^ith  the  greatest  difficulty,  and  for  a 
moment,  while  Teddy  stood  unable  to  decide  what 
should  be  said  or  done,  every  person  looked  at  him 
threateningly. 

"His  partner  has  been  arrested,  an' we'll  serve 
him  in  the  same  way,"  the  man  continued,  as  he 
advanced  toward  the  boy. 

"W]iy  do  3^ou  want  to  talk  to  me  like  that?" 
Teddy  cried,  looking  around  in  vain  for  a  friend. 
"  There  are  plenty  of  people  here  who  know  me,  for 
I  live  down  at  the  Run,  an'  never  swindled  any- 
body." 

"That's  a  lie  I"  the  man  replied,  fiercely,  seizing 
the  boy  by  the  collar. 

"It's  the  truth  I"  Mrs.  Hargreaves  cried.     "I'm 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  201 

his  mother,  and  we  have  lived  at  the  Run  ever 
since  he  was  born.  Deacon  Jones  is  our  neighbor, 
and  he  can  answer  for  the  truth  of  it." 

"I'll  see  whether  he  can  or  not,"  and  the  bully 
was  about  to  drag  Teddy  away,  aided  by  his  half  • 
intoxicated  friend,  when  a  familiar  voice  from  the 
outskirts  of  the  crowd  cried: 

"Hold  on  there!     What  are  you  about?" 

"  I've  caught  the  feller  what  sneaked  away  the 
jewelry  swindler's  money,  an'  am  goin'  to  put  him 
with  his  partner." 

"  You  are  going  to  take  your  hand  off  his  collar 
this  instant,  or  get  yourself  into  trouble,"  and  the 
merchant  from  Waterville  forced  his  way  through 
the  throng  until  he  stood  by  Teddy's  side. 

"Is  that  you,  Mr.  Reaves?"  the  bully  asked,  in 
surprise.  "Well,  you  don't  want  to  interfere  in 
this  business,  for  the  hoy  is  a  bad  one  all  the 
way  through.  He  was  deep  enough  to  get  the 
best  of  us  yesterday;  but  he  won't  be  so  lucky 
now." 

"  I  tell  you  to  let  go  of  him.  He  is  an  acquaint- 
ance of  mine  whom  I  would  trust  a  good  deal 
sooner  than  some  whom  I  see  now." 

"But  you  are  makin'  a  big  mistake,  Mr.  Reaves, 
for  I  saw  him  makin'  off  with  the  valise  where  our 
money  had  been  put." 

It  was  evident  the  bully  had  considerable  respect 
for  the  merchant,  for  he  released  his  hold  on  Teddy ; 


202  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

but  was  determined  that  the  boy's  alleged  character 
should  be  made  known  to  all  in  the  vicinity. 

"I  happen  to  know  all  about  that  affair,"  Mr. 
Reaves  replied,  as  he  led  Teddy  and  his  mother  out 
of  the  throng,  "and  if  you  want  the  full  particulars 
of  the  affair  come  to  my  store  when  you  are  more 
sober  than  now." 

A  very  large  number  of  those  present  were  ac- 
quainted with  the  merchant,  and  for  the  majority 
his  statement  was  sufficient  to  absolve  Teddy  of 
wrongdoing;  but  a  few,  among  whom  were  the 
intoxicated  party  and  his  friends,  vowed  to  sift  the 
matter  more  thoroughly  before  the  fair  came  to  an 
end. 

Mrs.  Hargreaves  was  terribly  excited,  and  at 
once  insisted  that  Teddy  should  go  home  with  her 
immediately,  regardless  of  how  much  money  he 
was  making ;  but  Mr.  Reaves  said  in  a  matter-of- 
fact  tone,  as  if  such  incidents  were  of  everyday 
occurrence : 

"It  would  be  foolish  for  him  to  do  that,  more 
especially  since  it  would  be  a  tacit  acknowledg- 
ment of  guilt,  and,  besides,  his  business  here  is  too 
valuable  to  be  abandoned  simply  because  a  drunken 
rowdy  chooses  to  make  trouble.  I  was  on  my  way 
to  see  him;  I  have  found  a  lawyer  who  will  under- 
take Hazelton's  case,  and  he  can  at  the  same  time 
give  Teddy  some  good  advice." 

Then  the  merchant  introduced  Mr.  Harvey  as  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  203 

most  prominent  attorney  in  the  county,  and,  offer- 
ing Mrs.  Hargreaves  his  arm,  added : 

"We  will  go  toward  the  cane-board,  and  give 
them  an  opportmiity  to  talk. 

"  There  is  a  great  deal  to  be  said  which  cannot 
interest  us,  and  when  they  are  done  we  shall  be 
readily  found." 

The  widow  could  do  no  less  than  comply,  and  as 
soon  as  they  were  comparatively  alone  the  lawyer 
said  to  Teddy: 

"  Now,  I  want  you  to  begin  and  tell  me  the  whole 
story  from  the  time  your  money  was  stolen  until 
this  minute.  Don't  omit  any  particulars  because 
you  may  chance  to  think  they  are  not  important ; 
but  give  every  detail,  and  thus  I  shall  be  made 
acquainted  with  your  own  case  as  well  as  that  of 
Hazelton." 

Teddy  obeyed  this  command  to  the  letter.  He 
dwelt  upon  the  most  minute  transaction  or  trifling 
movement  at  sufficient  length  to  give  the  listener 
a  clear  idea  of  all  that  had  happened,  and  laid  bare 
his  own  business  affairs,  even  to  the  extent  of  mak- 
ing the  lawyer  acquainted  with  the  amount  of 
receipts  each  day. 

"  I  don't  suppose  it  makes  any  difference  what  I 
think,"  he  said,  in  conclusion;  "but  I  am  almost 
certain  Mr.  Hazelton  did  not  have  anything  to  do 
with  the  robbery,  and  even  if  I  had  suspected  him, 
that  which  Dan  and  I  heard  while  we  were  in  the 


204  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

museum  tent  would  have  convinced  me  that  the 
men  whom  we  saw  on  the  creek  are  the  thieves." 

"  I  believe  as  you  do,  my  boy,  and  will  send  a  man 
to  the  barn  you  speak  of  this  very  night,  although 
so  much  time  has  now  elapsed  that  I  have  no  hope 
of  finding  anything  criminating.  However,  regard- 
less of  what  may  happen,  I  believe  we  can  show 
that  the  fakir  was  not  the  guilty  party,  and,  to 
guard  against  a  possible  attack  by  your  uncle,  it 
will  be  necessary  to  know  exactly  where  we  can 
get  bail  in  case  you  should  be  arrested." 

"Then  he  can  take  me  to  jail.^"  Teddy  asked, 
with  quivering  lips. 

"  If  he  proves  what  he  claims  to  know  there  is  no 
question  that  he  will  be  able  to  cause  your 
arrest ;  but  whether  he  can  send  you  to  prison  is 
an  entirely  different  matter.  I  would  now  like  to 
have  a  talk  with  Mr.  Keaves,  and  shall  see  you 
before  I  leave  the  grounds.  Do  not  be  frightened; 
but  continue  your  business  as  usual,  and  in  a  few 
moments  I  will  give  you  full  particulars  as  to  what 
must  be  done  in  the  event  anything  happens." 

Teddy  understood  this  to  be  an  intimation  that 
the  interview  was  at  an  end,  and  he  started  toward 
the  cane-board,  the  lawyer  asking  as  he  followed 
him: 

"How  shall  I  find  your  friend  Dan?" 

"  Go  down  to  the  exhibit  of  the  J,  Stevens  Arms 
and  Tool  Company  in  that  yellow-roofed  building, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  205 

and  you  will  see  him  sliOAving  model  pocket  rifles. 
I  will  go  with  you  if  you  think  there  is  any  chance 
of  missing  him." 

"  I  can  find  him  without  difficulty.  Do  not  leave 
your  place  of  business  until  after  I  have  seen  you 
again." 

By  this  time  they  had  arrived  at  the  cane-board, 
where  Mrs.  Hargreaves,  looking  decidedly  relieved 
in  mind,  was  talking  with  Mr.  Reaves. 

The  lawyer  invited  the  merchant  to  accompany 
him,  and  as  the  two  walked  away  Mrs.  Hargreaves 
said: 

"  After  talking  with  Mr.  Reaves  I  will  take  back 
what  I  proposed  regarding  taking  3^ou  home.  It 
is  not  possible  that  anything  but  the  right  shall 
conquer  in  a  case  like  this,  and  I  believe  you  will 
come  out  all  right,  as  a  boy  should  who  has  always 
been  as  obedient  and  loving  as  you.  It  is  time  for 
me  to  be  going  now ;  but  I  will  come  back  again  in 
the  morning." 

"Then  take  this  money  with  you,  for  I  don't 
want  any  more  in  my  pockets  than  is  absolutely 
necessary,"  and  Teddy  counted  out  the  contents  of 
the  box  which  served  him  as  a  "safe." 

There  was  but  little  time  for  any  lengthy  leave- 
taking.  The  customers  were  plenty;  Tim  and  his 
assistant  had  been  working  several  hours  without 
cessation,  and  Teddy  felt  that  it  was  his  duty  to 
relieve  them. 


206  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"You  can  trust  Mr.  Reaves,  whatever  happens," 
his  mother  said,  as  she  kissed  him  goodby,  "  and  I 
shall  be  back  to-morrow  to  learn  if  you  are  all 
right. " 

"Don't  worry  about  me,"  Teddy  replied,  cheer- 
ily. "Uncle  Nathan  can't  have  everything  his  own 
way,  and  he  will  soon  discover  that  fact." 

It  seemed  to  Teddy  that  his  mother  had  but  just 
left  him,  when  a  party  of  young  men  who  had  been 
talking  in  an  apparently  friendly  manner  directly 
in  front  of  his  place  of  business,  suddenly  began  to 
quarrel,  and  before  he  was  aware  of  what  had  hap- 
pened his  booth  was  overturned,  and  a  fierce  battle 
being  waged  upon  the  ground  which  he  fancied 
belonged  temporarily  to  him  because  of  the  money 
paid  to  the  managers  of  the  fair  as  rent. 

Canes,  knives,  rings,  and  timbers  were  thrown 
violently  about,  and,  while  trying  to  save  the  prop- 
erty, Teddy  and  his  clerk  received  several  severe 
blows  intended  for  some  of  the  combatants. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  207 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 
A    SECOND    ARREST. 

WHEX  the  fight  began  Teddy's  first  thought 
was  that  it  had  been  prearranged  by  some 
one  who  wanted  to  do  him  an  injury  without  taking 
the  chances  of  being  arrested  on  a  charge  of  mali- 
cious raischief . 

Tim  believed  it  to  be  a  scheme  for  robbing  the 
money  box,  and  while  the  combatants  were  strug- 
gling close  around  him  he  emptied  the  contents 
into  his  trousers  pockets,  regardless  of  the  chance 
blows  received  meanwhile. 

That  both  were  wrong  in  their  conjectures  could 
be  told  later,  as  the  fight  assumed  the  proportions 
of  a  small  riot,  and  the  battle  ground  was  soon 
shifted  to  an  open  space  in  front  of  the  exhibition 
buildings. 

It  was  nothing  more  than  a  causeless  row  such 
as  is  often  witnessed  at  fairs  where  intoxicating 
beverages  are  sold,  and  which  start  from  compara- 
tively nothing,  illustrating  the  proverb :  "  See  what 
a  great  fire  a  little  spark  can  kindle." 

"This  is  goin'  to  knock  our  hundred  dollars  in  the 


208  THE  ADVENTVUES  OF  A  COUNTEY 

head,"  Tim  said,  ruefully,  as  he  began  to  gather  up 
the  scattered  stock  when  the  combatants  had 
surged  to  and  fro  until  they  were  some  distance 
from  the  wrecked  cane-board.  "  It'll  take  an  hour 
to  straighten  things  out,  an'  all  that  time  will  be  the 
same  as  lost." 

"It  might  be  worse,"  Teddy  replied,  philosophic- 
ally, "and,  besides,  we  shouldn't  be  able  to  do  any 
business  while  that  row  is  going  on.  If  you  hadn't 
thought  of  the  money  it  might  have  been  lost,  for 
there  were  so  many  close  around  me  that  I  couldn't 
get  at  the  box." 

"Oh,  if  you  want  to  pick  somethin'  good  out  of 
the  trouble,  I'll  help.  This  will  give  us  a  chance  to 
shorten  the  board  so  the  stock  won't  look  quite  so 
small." 

The  young  fakirs  were  ready  for  business  in 
considerably  less  time  than  they  had  fancied  would 
be  the  case.  Nearly  every  one  on  the  grounds  was 
attracted  by  the  riot,  and  among  those  who  came 
to  the  scene  of  the  conflict  was  Dan. 

Instead  of  watching  the  struggling,  yelling 
throng,  he  helped  Teddy  and  Tim  restore  the  booth 
to  order,  and  with  such  aid  as  the  assistant  could 
give  the  work  was  done  very  quickly. 

Before  the  spectators  had  quieted  down  suffi- 
ciently to  turn  their  attention  to  sport  once  more 
everything  was  ready  for  business,  and  when  the 
constables  had  taken  the  ringleaders  in  the  fight 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  209 

away,  money  began  once  more  to  roll  into  Teddy's 
coffers. 

Before  Dan  returned  to  his  own  work  he  heard 
of  all  that  had  occurred  since  morning,  and  his 
comments  on  Uncle  Nathan's  behavior  were  more 
forcible  than  polite. 

"He's  an  old  fool  what  oughter  be  rode  on  a  rail 
till  he  can't  see,  an'  I'm  goin'  over  to  the  Run  be- 
fore I  start  for  home  jest  to  give  the  duffer  a  piece 
of  my  mind." 

"  I  don't  believe  that  would  do  either  you  or  him 
any  good,"  Teddy  replied,  laughingly. 

"I  don't  know  what  effect  it'll  have  on  him;  but 
I'll  feel  a  mighty  sight  better.  He  shows  himself  to 
be  the  worst  swindler  on  the  grounds  when  he  tries 
to  scare  you  into  givin'  him  half  you've  made,  for 
that's  what  his  talk  means." 

"If  ho  don't  do  any  worse  than  threaten  I  won't 
say  a  word;  but  he's  so  mad  there's  no  knowin' 
what'll  happen." 

"  The  lawyer  will  see  that  you  pull  through  all 
right;  but  if  trouble  should  come,  be  sure  to  send 
for  me.     I'll  manage  to  get  off  somehow." 

With  this  assurance  Dan  hurried  back  to  the 
exhibition  buildings,  and  Teddy  was  free  to  assist 
Tim  in  waiting  upon  the  customers. 

During  the  remainder  of  the  afternoon  the  young 
fakirs  had  quite  as  much  as  they  could  attend  to, 
and  then,  just  as  trade  had  so  fallen  off  that  Tim 


210  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

could  wait  upon  the  customers  alone  with  the  aid 
of  the  assistant,  Teddy  received  a  call  from  Mr. 
Harvey,  the  lawyer. 

'*  Come  here  behind  the  booth  where  we  can  talk 
without  being  overheard,"  he  said,  peremptorily, 
and  the  boy  obeyed  at  once^  asking  before  the  at- 
torney had  time  to  speak: 

"Do  you  know  if  Uncle  Nathan  is  goin'  to  do  any- 
thing?" 

"  He  is  certainly  trying  very  hard,  and  in  case  he 
should  succeed  in  getting  a  warrant,  you  will  de- 
mand of  the  officer  who  serves  it  to  be  taken  di- 
rectly to  Deacon  Jones.  Mr.  Reaves  and  1  have 
just  had  a  talk  with  him,  and  in  our  absence  he  will 
render  such  assistance  as  you  may  require." 

"  That  sounds  as  if  you  believed  Uncle  Nathan 
vvould  be  able  to  do  as  he  threatened." 

"It  is  well  to  be  prepared  for  any  emergency, 
since  no  man  can  say  exactly  what  may  happen. 
During  the  night  two  constables  will  go  to  the  barn 
on  the  marshes  where  you  saw  the  burglars  carry 
some  of  the  goods,  although  I  do  not  think  any 
good  is  liable  to  result  from  the  visit,  for  the  men 
have  probably  been  frightened  away  by  this  time. 
Enough  may  be  found,  however,  to  prove  the  truth 
of  your  story,  and  that  will  be  sufficient  to  give  the 
thick-headed  authorities  an  inkling  that  their  judg- 
ment as  to  who  the  burglars  are  is  not  infallible." 

"Have  you  seen  Mr.  Hazelton  yet?" 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  211 

"No;  but  I  shall  call  on  him  before  going  home. 
The  best  thing  which  could  happen  now  for  all  con- 
cerned would  be  the  arrest  of  the  man  you  call 
Long  Jim,  and  to  that  end  both  you  and  Dan  must 
keep  a  sharp  lookout,  for  it  is  barely  possible  he 
may  be  bold  enough  to  come  on  the  grounds  again." 

"But  what  could  we  do  in  case  we  did  see  him?" 

"Follow  him  quietly  until  you  meet  a  constable, 
and  then  insist  that  he  be  arrested  for  swindling 
you  out  of  fifteen  dollars.  There  is  not  sufficient 
proof  to  connect  him  with  the  robbery  here  or  at 
the  Run;  but  I  will  take  care  that  he  is  held  long 
enough  as  a  common  swindler  to  enable  us  to  sift 
the  other  matter.  Let  me  see,  you  said  Dan  was 
with  you  at  the  time  of  the  transaction  in  Water- 
ville?" 

"No;  it  was  poor  Sam,  and  now  that  he  is  dead 
I'm  the  only  one  who  saw  Long  Jim  there.  Do  you 
know  if  they  have  found  Sam's  body?" 

"I  think  not;  men  have  been  dragging  the  creek 
all  day,  and  the  probabilities  now  are  that  some 
time  will  elapse  before  it  can  be  recovered.  I  want 
you  to  be  very  careful  during  the  remainder  of  to- 
day and  to-night.  Go  to  the  tent  where  you  sleep 
before  dark,  and  do  not  venture  outside  under  any 
provocation,  no  matter  what  message  may  be 
brought." 

"What  do  you  mean?"  Teddy  asked,  in  surprise. 

"  Nothing  particular ;    I  am  only  taking  precau 


212  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

tions,  that  is  all.  I  shall  be  here  to-morrow,  and 
will  see  you  then." 

The  lawyer  turned  to  go,  and  had  just  passed  out 
from  behind  the  end  of  the  booth  when  Teddy 
seized  his  arm,  pulling  him  back  very  suddenly. 
"There's  Long  Jim  now!"  he  whispered,  excitedly. 
"Seel  That  man  over  thereby  the  striking 
machine  I" 

It  was  indeed  the  burglar  whose  partner  had 
warned  him  against  visiting  the  fair,  or  even  show- 
ing himself  in  the  vicinity  during  the  daytime.  It 
could  be  plainly  seen  that  he  was  decidedly  under 
the  influence  of  liquor,  and  he  swaggered  to  and 
fro  as  if  in  his  drunken  brain  was  the  idea  that  no 
one  would  dare  cause  him  trouble. 

"Are  you  certain  there  is  no  mistake?"  the  law- 
yer asked,  as  he  watched  the  man. 

"I'd  be  able  to  recognize  him  anywhere,  no  mat- 
ter how  he  was  dressed,  an'  so  would  Dan,  for  Sam 
an'  me  pointed  him  out  two  or  three  times." 

"  Then  the  hardest  portion  of  our  work  is  finished. 
I  shall  have  him  arrested  on  the  charge  of  swin- 
dling you,  and  can  arrarge  it  without  the  formality 
of  first  getting  a  warrant.  It  is  now  more  neces- 
sary than  ever  that  3^ou  should  remain  where  I  can 
find  you  readily  at  any  hour  of  the  day  or  night." 

"Except  when  I  go  for  supper,  I'll  be  here  or  in 
the  tent,"  Teddy  replied,  and  then  there  was  no 
further  opportunity  for  conversation. 


BOY  AT  A  CO UNTR Y  FAIR,  2ia 

Long  Jim  had  started  leisurely,  and  on  anything 
rather  than  a  straight  course,  toward  the  grand 
stand,  and  Mr.  Harvey  followed  so  near  that  he 
could  have  placed  his  hand  on  the  burglar's 
shoulder. 

Teddy  watched  until  the  two  were  lost  to  view 
amid  the  throng,  and  then  said  to  himself,  with  a 
sigh : 

"I'll  bet  the  lawyer  can't  find  a  constable,  an' 
that  Long  Jim  gets  clear  somehow.  But  what  I 
don't  understand  is  how  he  dares  to  come  here." 

He  would  have  run  down  to  tell  Dan  of  the  start- 
ling news  had  it  not  been  for  Mr.  Harvey's  injunc- 
tion to  remain  in  the  places  designated,  and  he  was 
so  nervous  that  only  with  the  greatest  difficulty 
could  he  wait  upon  an  impatient  customer. 

An  hour  passed,  and  nothing  had  been  heard 
from  either  the  lawyer  or  the  burglar. 

The  visitors  remained  later  on  this  day  than 
usual;  but  the  tardy  ones  were  departing,  and  it 
was  with  a  decided  sense  of  relief  that  Teddy  be- 
gan to  pack  up  his  stock  for  the  night.  Dan  arrived 
before  the  work  was  finished,  and  his  excitement 
was  great  when  he  learned  of  what  had  happened. 

"Can't  we  go  somewhere  to  find  out  if  the  man 
was  arrested?"  he  asked,  eagerly. 

"  I  promised  to  be  on  hand  in  case  the  lawyer 
should  want  me." 

"Then  we'll  get  the  stuff  to  the  tent,  go  to  sup- 


214  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

per,  an'  afterward  I'll  snoop  'round  to  hear  the 
news.'' 

All  hands  worked  rapidly,  and  in  ten  minutes  the 
three  boys  were  at  the  boarding-house,  eating 
as  if  each  moment  were  of  the  utmost  importance, 
when  they  overheard  a  conversation  between  two 
men  at  the  next  table  which  caused  them  no  slight 
degree  of  relief  and  pleasure: 

"Who  was  that  drunken  fellow  Constable  Ford 
lugged  off  this  evening?"  one  of  the  men  asked,  and 
the  other  replied : 

"  A  man  who  swindled  a  boy  over  at  Waterville 
out  of  fifteen  dollars." 

"I  didn't  see  any  boy  in  the  crowd." 

"He  wasn't  there.  La^vyer  Harvey  recognized 
the  fellow,  and  insisted  on  his  arrest,  sayin'  that 
the  'Squire  already  knew  about  the  case." 

"  I  thought  at  first  it  might  be  some  one  who  had 
been  robbing  the  stores  around  here." 

"Oh,  the  burglar  has  been  caught  already,  an' 
laid  in  jail  since  yesterday." 

"But  he  was  only  arrested  on  suspicion." 

"There'll  be  proof  enough  to  convict  him,  I 
reckon,  an'  if.  there  isn't  he  ought  to  be  sent  to  jail 
for  six  months  because  of  what  he  has  done  on  the 
grounds." 

Then  the  conversation  was  changed  to  a  subject 
in  Avhich  the  boys  had  no  interest,  and  Dan  whis- 
pered to  Teddy: 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  215 

"That  settles  Long  Jim,  an' now  if  your  lawyer 
is  as  smart  as  he  appears  to  be  it  won't  take  long 
to  show  that  Hazelton  didn't  have  anything  to  do 
with  the  burglar  try  in'  to  get  me  in  jail,"  Teddy 
replied,  with  a  sigh. 

"  Of  course  it  will.  Things  are  turning  out  all 
right  after  all,  an'  if  poor  Sam  hadn't  been  drowned 
we'd  have  a  reg'lar  celebration  to-night." 


216         THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 
A  THIRD  ARREST 

WHEN  the  boys  returned  to  the  museum  tent 
from  supper  they  had  a  long  and  mteresting 
story  to  tell  Mr.  Sweet;  but  to  their  surprise,  after 
the  recital  was  concluded,  he  said  calmly: 

"  I  knew  all  of  that  except  about  the  burglar's 
arrest." 

"Why,  how  did  you  hear  it?"  Dan  asked. 

"  The  lawyer  an'  the  merchant  have  been  over 
here  twice  since  noon,  pumpin'  me  about  Hazelton, 
an'  tryin'  to  find  out  how  you  boys  have  behaved 
yourselves." 

"Why  did  they  want  to  know  anything  about 
us?"  Teddy  asked,  in  surprise. 

"So's  to  make  sure  your  stories  were  straight. 
When  men  like  them  take  hold  of  a  thing  they 
don't  want  to  run  any  chances  of  bein'  fooled. 
What  has  been  done  about  Sam?" 

Dan  could  best  answer  this  question,  and  he  re- 
plied : 

"The  body  hasn't  been  found;  but  I  heard  the 
manager  of  the  Davis  Boat  Company's  exhibit  say 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR,  217 

that  he  should  keep  men  at  the  work  of  draggin' 
the  creek  till  the  work  was  finished.  I  can't  get 
through  my  head  how  he  happened  to  capsize  the 
craft,  for  she  didn't  seem  to  be  cranky." 

,"That  is  something  none  of  us  will  ever  know," 
Mr.  Sweet  replied,  solemnly,  and  then,  as  if  to 
change  the  mournful  subject,  he  asked :  "  How  did 
business  pan  out  to-day,  Teddy?" 

"I'll  count  up.  We  must  have  come  pretty  near 
to  what  you  predicted ;  but  we  would  have  done  a 
great  deal  better  if  it  hadn't  been  for  the  big  row. 
That  made  us  lose  at  least  an  hour,  to  say  nothin' 
of  havin'  six  canes  broken  just  when  we  needed 
every  one  in  order  to  make  a  good  show." 

Then  Teddy  and  Tim  emptied  the  contents  of 
their  pockets  on  a  piece  of  canvas,  and  the  other 
occupants  of  the  tent  waited  patiently  for  the  result 
to  be  announced. 

"It's  ninety-four  dollars  and  forty-five  cents,"  the 
former  said,  after  counting  the  money  twice  as  if 
doubtful  of  the  first  result.  "That's  a  big  sum  of 
money,  but  there's  no  chance  of  a  mistake." 

"  You  can  figure  that  the  row  cost  you  six  dol- 
lars," Mr.  Sweet  replied,  putting  vigorously  at  his 
pipe.  "  I  haven't  been  'tendin'  out  on  fairs  these 
eight  years  without  bein'  able  to  name  the  amount 
of  such  a  business  as  yours." 

"We'd  have  had  twenty-five  more  but  for  that 
row,"  Tim  said,  decidedly. 


218  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"You're  wrong  there,  my  boy,"  and  the  proprie- 
tor of  the  museum  wore  an  air  of  one  who  "knows 
it  all."  "That  is  about  as  much  as  two  boys  can 
take  in,  an'  you  don't  want  to  kick,  for  I've  seen 
lots  of  fakirs  come  on  to  a  fair  ground  with  a  better 
cane-board  than  yours  an'  not  get  expenses.  Be 
thankful  for  what  you've  earned,  an'  hope  that  you 
can  pay  expenses  to-morrow,  for  there  won't  be  any 
too  much  money  floatin'  around  after  such  a  busi- 
ness as  we've  had  to-day." 

"I'm  more  than  satisfied,"  Teddy  replied,  as  he 
set  aside  the  amount  due  Tim,  and  the  latter  ap- 
peared to  be  more  than  contented  with  having 
earned  nine  dollars  and  forty-four  cents  so  easily. 

"You  can  suck  your  thumbs  from  now  out,"  the 
barker  said,  philosophically,  "for  the  backbone 
of  trade  has  been  broken,  an'  the  Peach  Bottom 
fair  is  already  numbered  with  the  things  of  the 
past." 

"Don't  you  think  we'll  do  anything  more?"  Teddy 
asked. 

"Oh,  yes,  there'll  be  a  little  to  pick  up  until  to- 
morrow night,  but  it  won't  amount  to  anything 
near  like  what  has  already  been  done,  although 
it'll  be  clear  profit." 

"Since  I  am  more  than  satisfied,  there's  no  chance 
of  being  disappointed,"  Teddy  replied,  and  at  that 
moment  the  head  of  a  stranger  appeared  between 
the  flaps  of  canvas. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  219 

"Is  there  a  boy  named  Teddy  here?"  the  new- 
comer asked. 

"Well,  what  do  you  want  of  him?"  and  Mr.  Sweet 
sprang  to  his  feet  as  if  anticipating  trouble. 

"  Nothing  more  than  what  Hazelton  wanted  me 
to  say,"  was  the  reply,  as  the  stranger  entered,  evi- 
dently thinking  his  search  was  at  an  end. 

"And  what  is  that?"  the  proprietor  of  the  museum 
asked,  motioning  Teddy  to  remain  silent. 

"  There's  no  need  of  all  this  secrecy  with  me,  for 
I'm  Hazelton's  partner  in  everything  except  the 
give-away  game,"  the  stranger  said,  with  a  laugh. 
"  It  appears  a  man  has  been  arrested  by  a  party 
whom  this  boy  Teddy  knows,  and  I'm  to  say  that 
he  is  to  come  to  jail  very  early  to-morrow  morning." 

Even  now  Mr.  Sweet's  suspicions  were  not  al- 
layed, and  he  asked,  cautiously : 

"Could  you  tell  me  what  he's  wanted  for?" 

"  Lawyer  Harvey  will  be  there,  and  is  going  to 
talk  with  him  where  Hazelton  can  hear  what  is 
said." 

"Is  that  all?" 

"Everything:  and  if  you  see  the  boy,  can  I  de- 
pend on  your  repeating  the  message?" 

"Under  the  circumstances  there  can  be  no  harm 
in  taking  every  precaution,"  the  proprietor  of  the 
museum  replied,  "and  if  your  errand  is  finished, 
I  may  as  well  say  that  this  is  the  boy  Teddy  whom 
Hazelton  sent  you  to  see," 


220  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"That's  all  right;  there  was  no  need  of  pointing 
him  out ;  but  since  you  have  done  so,  I  simply  want 
to  ask  if  he  can  spare  the  time  to  do  as  Hazelton 
and  the  lawyer  wish?" 

"Of  course  I  can,"  and  now  Teddy  spoke  for 
himself.  "Say  that  if  nothing  happens  I'll  be 
there." 

"Have  you  heard  whether  your  uncle  has  suc- 
ceeded in  getting  a  warrant?"  the  stranger  asked. 

"  No ;  but  Mr.  Harvey  seemed  to  think  he  might 
be  able  to  do  so,  and  I  don't  want  to  make  any 
promises  that  can't  be  carried  out." 

"Then  I'll  count  on  your  being  there,  but  since 
leaving  the  jail  I've  heard  enough  to  warrant  my 
advising  you  to  remain  under  cover  to-night." 

"Why?" 

"Those  fellows  who  started  the  fight  when  you 
got  away  with  the  money  are  swearing  vengeance. 
I  don't  think  it's  likely  they'll  attack  the  tent,  for, 
owing  to  the  representations  made  by  the  lawyer, 
there'll  be  a  big  force  of  constables  on  duty  to- 
night ;  but  if  you  should  venture  outside  the  grounds 
it  might  be  impossible  to  keep  any  engagement  in 
the  future." 

"I  wasn't  thinkin'  of  leaving  here,"  Teddy  re- 
plied; but  the  mere  fact  that  he  ought  not  do  so 
made  him  feel  ver}"  uncomfortable. 

"I  couldn't  be  in  any  worse  fii^  if  1  had  committed 
gome  big  crime,"  he  said,  bitterly,  "and  it  is  tough 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  221 

to  feel  like  a  criminal  when  a  fellow  is  only  trying 
to  earn  honest  money." 

'^  It  isn't  the  rule  that  honest  people  fare  the  best," 
the  stranger  replied,  with  a  laugh;  "but  I  hope 
you'll  come  out  on  the  top  of  the  heap.  At  all 
events,  my  business  here  is  finished  and  I'll  go." 

The  folds  of  canvas  dropped  behind  him,  and  Mr. 
Sweet  said,  musingly : 

"It  beats  all  how  you  boys  have  succeeded  in 
getting  yourselves  mixed  up  in  this  affair.  If  I 
didn't  know  all  the  circumstances  I'd  say  there 
must  be  some  fire  where  there  is  so  much  smoke." 

"The  smoke  isn't  of  our  makin',  an'  Teddy's  un- 
cle can  be  blamed  for  the  most  of  it,"  Dan  said, 
angrily.  "I  only  wish  he  was  here  to  know  my 
opinion  of  him." 

"Are  you  talkin'  about  me?"  Uncle  Nathan  asked, 
as  he  pushed  aside  the  canvas  and  entered  without 
so  much  as  asking  permission. 

"That's  exactly  what  I  was  doing,"  Dan  replied, 
without  any  show  of  fear,  "an'  if  you've  been 
sneakin'  'round  to  listen,  there's  no  need  of  my 
tellin'  over  ag'in  jest  what  I  think  of  a  man  who 
tries  to  frighten  an  honest  boy  into  givin'  up  half 
of  what  he  has  made." 

"An  honest  boy?"  the  old  man  repealed,  with  a 
sneer,  and  Teddy  whispered  to  his  friend: 

"  Don't  say  anything  to  make  him  angry,  for  I'll 
only  get  the  worst  of  it." 


222  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"Of  course  you  will,"  Uncle  Nathan  replied, 
having  overheard  the  words.  "  When  an  ungrate- 
ful wretch  like  you  conspires  to  rob  the  hand  that 
has  fed  him  he  must  expect  to  get  the  w^orst  of  it." 

"I  never  took  from  you  the  value  of  a  cent," 
Teddy  said,  stoutly,  and  Dan  cried  as  he  sprang  to 
his  feet : 

"If  there  has  been  any  attempt  at  robbery,  you're 
the  guilty  one,  for  you've  tried  to  steal  half  the 
money  he  made  by  threatening  to  have  him 
arrested  if  he  didn't.divide  his  profits." 

" That  was  only  a  business  proposition,"  the  old 
man  replied,  not  in  the  least  abashed,  "and  he 
has  aided  others  in  stealing  from  me." 

"What  do  you  want  here?"  Mr.  Sweet  cried, 
angrily.  "This  is  my  tent;  I  have  paid  for  the 
privilege  of  putting  it  upon  these  grounds,  and  have 
the  right  to  prevent  such  old  hypocrites  as  you 
from  entering  without  paying  an  admission." 

"  Look  out  that  you  do  not  come  within  reach  of 
the  law,"  Uncle  Nathan  replied,  threateningly, 
stepping  back  quickly,  as  if  expecting  an  attack. 
"I  am  here  armed  with  the  right  to  take  this  boy, 
and  shall  exercise  it  despite  all  that  may  be  said. 
Come  in,  Mr.  Officer." 

In  response  to  this  call  a  constable  entered,  and 
Teddy's  heart  sank  within  him,  for  he  understood 
that  the  long-deferred  arrest  was  about  to  be  made. 

"There  is  your  prisoner,"  the  old  man  said,  vin- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  223 

dictively,  as  he  pointed  to  the  boy,  "and  the  sooner 
you  take  him  to  jail  where  he  belongs  the  sooner 
we  shall  be  rid  of  a  viper." 

Teddy's  grief  and  fear  were  so  great  that  he  could 
not  speak,  and  even  Dan  appeared  to  have  been 
made  dumb  by  this  show  of  authority;  but  Mr. 
Sweet  was  somewhat  accustomed  to  such  scenes, 
and  he  demanded : 

"  Show  me  the  warrant.  I  do  not  propose  to  let 
any  one  be  taken  out  of  my  tent  by  such  an  old 
reprobate  as  that  until  I  am  satisfied  it  is  done  un- 
der the  sanction  of  the  law." 

"Convince  yourself,"  Uncle  Nathan  replied,  as 
the  constable  held  out  a  folded  document.  "That 
will  show  under  what  authority  we  act," 

Sweet  read  it  carefully,  and  handed  it  to  the 
officer  as  he  said  to  the  old  man : 

"  This  shows  that  the  constable  has  the  right  to 
take  Teddy  to  prison  ;  but  as  certain  as  there  will 
be  a  sun  in  the  sky  to-morrow  so  certain  will  I  aid 
him  in  making  you  suffer  for  doing  this  thing. 
You  know  he  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  burglary 
committed  at  your  store,  and  have  only  had  this 
issued  in  the  hope  of  defrauding  him  of  what  he 
has  earned  honestly." 

"Talk  is  cheap,"  Uncle  Nathan  said,  impatiently. 
"  Officer,  take  your  prisoner  away  unless  you  count 
on  stayin'  here  all  night." 

The  short  parley   between  the  proprietor  of  the 


224  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

museum  and  the  accuser  p^ave  Teddy  time  to  think 
of  what  the  lawyer  had  said,  and  he  added,  as  the 
constable  approached  him : 

"I  demand  to  be  first  carried  to  Deacon  Jones'." 

"  Now  what  kind  of  a  bee  have  you  got  in  your 
bonnet?"  the  old  man  cried,  displaying  both  sur- 
prise and  fear.  "I  say  you  are  to  go  to  jail,  an' 
that  settles  it." 

"  If  he  wants  to  see  the  deacon  I'm  bound  to  take 
him  there,"  the  constable  said. 

"Who's  been  makin'  sich  foolish  talk  to  you?" 
Uncle  jSTathan  screamed. 

"  Lawer  Harvey  told  me  what  the  law  was,  an'  I 
don't  intend  to  get  into  any  fuss  by  deprivin'  a 
prisoner  of  his  rights,"  was  the  stolid  reply. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  225 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

ON  BAIL. 

WHEN  Urcle  Nathan  learned  that  the  celebra- 
ted lawyer  had  made  preparations  for  this 
move  on  his  part  he  was  literally  beside  himself 
with  rage,  and  vowed  that  the  warrant  should  be 
served  and  the  prisoner  taken  to  jail  immediately, 
or  he  would  see  to  it  that  the  constable  was  deprived 
of  his  commission  without  delay. 

"I've  served  the  warrant,"  the  man  said,  quietly, 
"an'  now  the  prisoner  is  in  my  custody.  You  have 
no  more  to  say  what  shall  be  done  with  him  than 
that  goat,  so  shut  your  mouth." 

"I'll  shut  yours  so  close  it  won't  be  opened  again 
for  a  month!"  the  old  man  screamed.  "Do  as  I 
tell  you,  or  take  the  consequences." 

"And  I'm  goin' to  give  you  the  same  advice," 
Mr.  Sweet  cried,  as  he  advanced  toward  Uncle 
Nathan  threateningly.  "Now  the  boy  has  been 
arrested,  you  are  an  intruder  here,  an'  I'll  give  you 
thirty  seconds  in  which  to  get  out ;  after  that  we'll 
make  an  example  of  such  a  reprobate." 

"  I'll  go  when  I  get  ready,  an'  not  a  minute  before. 


226  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Lay  a  hand  on  me  an'  I'll  have  a  warrant  for 
you." 

"  If  you  can  get  it,  well  and  good.  I  now  order 
you  out  for  the  last  time.  In  thirty  seconds  I'll 
guarantee  you  won't  be  in  condition  to  walk." 

While  their  employer  had  been  speaking  the 
barker  and  the  clown  silently  ranged  themselves 
by  his  side,  ready  for  any  commands  which  might 
be  given,  and  the  infuriated  old  man  had  sufficient 
sense  left  to  let  him  understand  it  would  be  unsafe 
to  linger. 

"I'll  serve  you  out  before  this  thing  is  ended,"  he 
cried,  shaking  his  fist  in  impotent  rage  as  he  went 
toward  the  flap,  and  Dan,  who  could  control  himself 
no  longer,  replied : 

"You'd  better  begin  on  me,  for  I'm  goin'  to  tell 
this  thing  to  everybody  who  comes  to  the  fair  to- 
morrow, an'  from  what  I've  heard  it  wouldn't  take 
much  coaxin'  to  get  the  band  from  the  Eun  up  here, 
so's  I  could  sing  it.  You're  havin'  a  good  time  now; 
but  there'll  be  a  different  side  to  the  matter  to- 
morrow." 

Mr.  Sweet  had  followed  Uncle  Nathan  so  closely, 
literally  turning  him  out,  that  he  could  not  reply 
while  inside  the  canvas ;  but  once  in  the  open  air, 
he  made  threats  that  would  have  frightened  any 
one  who  did  not  know  the  motive  by  which  they 
had  been  inspired. 

Meanwhile  the  constable    appeared  disposed  to 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  227 

take  matters  in  the  most  comfortable  manner.  He 
asked  Teddy  why  he  wished  to  see  Deacon  Jones, 
and  the  boy  said : 

"I  don't  know;  but  Mr.  Harvey  told  me  that  if 
anything  happened  to-night  I  was  to  see  the  dea° 
con." 

"Then  we'll  go  there.     Are  you  ready?" 

Teddy  thought  of  his  money,  and,  fearing  lest 
it  might  be  taken  from  him,  asked  if  he  could  hand 
something  to  Mr.  Sweet. 

"I  think  not,"  was  the  undecided  reply.  "The 
deacon  will  know,  an'  whatever  he  says  I'll  stand  by. " 

"Don't  bother  about  anything  just  now,"  the 
proprietor  of  the  museum  said.  "We'll  all  go  with 
you,  an'  there'll  be  plenty  of  time  to  make  neces- 
sar}^  arrangem.ents  before  you're  taken  to  jail." 

Although  the  lawyer  had  assured  him  he  could 
be  involved  in  no  serious  trouble,  the  mere  fact 
that  he  was  under  arrest  sufficed  to  make  Teddy 
wretched,  and  like  one  under  sentence  of  death,  he 
prepared  to  accompany  the  constable. 

Dan  and  Tim  intended  to  join  the  party,  as  was 
shown  by  their  remaining  very  close  to  the  pris- 
oner, and  only  the  barker  and  the  clown  were  left 
to  care  for  the  tent. 

Uncle  Nathan  was  met  on  the  outside,  and  he 
immediately  began  to  insist  that  the  boy  be  taken 
to  jail  at  once ;  but  the  officer  paid  no  attention  to 
his  ravings. 


228  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  If  you  don't  hold  your  tongue  I'll  knock  the 
whole  top  of  your  head  off,"  Mr.  Sweet  whispered, 
brandishins:  his  fists  in  the  most  threatening  man- 
ner, and  the  old  man  cried,  excitedly  : 

"Mr.  Officer,  I  call  upon  you  to  bear  witness  that 
this  man  is  threatening  my  life,  and  insist  that  you 
protect  me  from  insult." 

"I've  nothing  to  do  with  you,"  the  constable 
replied,  with  a  laugh.  "The  warrant  has  been 
served,  an'  all  you've  got  to  do  is  hold  your  horses 
till  the  case  is  called  up  in  court." 

"Wait  till  I  get  home  once  more,  an'  then  we'll 
see  that  lie's  got  a  good  deal  to  do  with  the  case," 
Tim  cried,  "I'll  spend  every  minute  from  then  for 
a  week  tellin^  the  folks  that  he  only  did  this  to 
make  Teddy  give  up  half  of  what  he  made,  an'  it'll 
be  a  pretty  poor  kind  of  a  chump  who'll  do  any 
more  tradin'  at  his  store." 

Uncle  Nathan  stepped  toward  the  boy  who  had 
spoken  so  boldly  as  if  he  would  inflict  the  direst 
punishment  then  and  there ;  but  he  probably  real- 
ized that  this  would  prejudice  his  case,  and  con- 
tented himself  by  saying : 

"We'll  see  whether  the  people  at  the  Run  will 
believe  a  couple  of  boys  who  have  been  in  league 
with  burglars,  for  you  mustn't  forget,  Tim  Jones, 
that  I  have  proof  you  helped  Teddy  to  carry  away 
the  burglar's  money." 

"If  it'll  do  you  any  good  I'll  own  up  to  the  fact 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  229 

now,"  the  boy  replied.  "It  can't  be  so  bad  to  do 
that  as  it  is  to  arrest  your  own  nephew  because  he 
won't  give  you  half  his  money." 

"Don't  say  anything  more,"  Teddy  whispered  to 
his  friend.  "It's  only  makin'  matters  worse,  an' 
he's  got  the  upper  hand  of  us  all  jest  now." 

"I  don't  know  whether  he  has  or  not,"  the  valiant 
Tim  replied;  "but  at  the  same  time  it'll  do  him  a 
world  of  good  to  let  him  hear  the  truth." 

At  this  point  Uncle  Nathan  appeared  to  under- 
stand that  he  was  not  coming  out  victor  in  this 
battle  of  tongues,  and  he  wisely  held  his  peace, 
saying  not  another  word  until  the  little  party 
arrived  at  the  home  of  Deacon  Jones. 

The  manager  of  the  fair  was  resting  after  a 
particularly  hard  day's  work.  More  than  one  of 
the  citizens  of  Peach  Bottom  had  openly  said  he 
was  responsible  for  the  riot  by  allowing  liquor  to 
be  sold  on  ths  grounds,  and  his  greeting  of  the  vis- 
itors was  not  calculated  to  assure  the  frightened 
Teddy. 

"Well,  what  do  you  want?"  he  cried,  roughly,  as 
they  entered  his  library.  "If  it's  anything  con- 
cerning the  fair  I  won't  open  my  mouth.  A  man 
can't  be  driven  to  death  with  work  and  then  dis- 
turbed at  all  hours  of  the  night,  simply  to  give  the 
fools  in  this  town  a  chance  to  make  trouble." 

"  All  I  know  about  it  is  that  E  arrested  this  boy, 
and  he  insisted  on  being  brought  to  you,  saying 


230  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

it  was  Lawyer  Harvey's  advice,"  the  constable 
began,  and  the  angry  deacon  immediately  began 
to  appear  interested. 

"Is  this  your  nephew,  Nathan?"  he  asked  of  the 
old  man,  who  now  had  a  smirk  of  confidence  on 
his  face. 

"I'm  sorry  he  is,  deacon,  an'  after  I  set  him  up 
in  business  he  goes  ag'in  me  by  givin'  information 
to  burglars,  who  rob  me." 

"And  you  have  had  him  arrested?" 

"I  felt  obliged  to  in  the  interest  of  society." 

"That's  a  lie,"  Mr.  Sweet  interrupted,  angrily. 
"  He  tried  to  make  the  boy  pay  him  half  he  earned 
on  the  fair  grounds,  and  has  done  this  thing  only 
because  Teddy  refused." 

"We  won't  go  into  the  details  of  the  case,  because 
I  am  not  a  magistrate,"  the  deacon  replied,  with  a 
majestic  wave  of  the  hand.  "  Mr.  Officer,  tell  the 
'Squire  that  I  am  prepared  to  go  bail  to  any 
amount,  and  ask  if  the  business  can't  be  conducted 
here,  for  I'm  too  tired  to  go  out  of  doors  unless  it  is 
absolutely  necessary." 

"What?"  the  old  man  screamed.  "Will  you 
answer  for  that  little  villain's  appearance  at  court?" 

"That's  what  I  said,  Nathan.  This  affair  is  none 
of  my  business  other  than  I  have  stated;  but  I 
must  say  you  are  goin'  a  leetle  too  far,  not  only  in 
my  opinion,  but  in  that  of  others,  an'  it  may  prove 
a  costly  job  for  somebody  before  it's  finished," 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  231 

The  old  man  was  literally  speechless. 

He  could  not  understand  why  the  deacon  should 
have  turned  against  him  so  suddenly,  and  the  last 
words  made  him  decidedly  uneasy. 

He  was  not  to  be  silenced  without  a  struggle, 
however.  After  the  first  surprise  had  died  away 
he  said,  with  a  comical  assumption  of  dignity : 

"I  will  see  whether  I'm  to  be  browbeaten  in 
this  manner.  The  'Squire  does  not  dare  to  release 
the  boy  on  bail,  and  I  shall  tell  him  so." 

With  these  words  he  left  the  house  hurriedly, 
and  the  constable  said  to  the  deacon : 

"If  you  will  write  a  line  to  the 'Squire,  saying 
that  you're  ready  to  go  bail,  I  do  not  think  there 
will  be  any  necessity  of  troubling  you  again  to- 
night." 

This  suggestion  was  immediately  acted  upon, 
and  the  weary  manager  of  the  fair  penned  the  fol- 
lowing words: 

"  I  am  ready  to  enter  security  to  any  amount  for 
the  appearance  at  court  of  Edward  Hargreaves, 
and  if  you  should  not  consider  my  bond  sufficient, 
I  am  empowered  to  say  that  John  Reaves,  of  Water- 
ville,  will  add  his  name,  therefore  there  can  be  no 
good  reason  for  committing  him  to  jail,  since  we 
are  both  responsible  for  the  prisoner  until  the  bond 
can  be  executed.  A.  Jones." 

Having  received  this  the  constable  departed  with 
the  prisoner  and  his  friends,  and  once  on  the  out- 
side he  said,  confidently : 


232  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"The  matter  is  settled,  no  matter  how  much  old 
ISTathan  may  rave.  Both  Mr.  Reaves  an'  the  deacon 
have  got  the  'Squire  by  the  nose,  and  he  must 
dance  to  their  fiddlin'." 

That  this  assertion  was  correct  Teddy  realized  a 
few  moments  later  when  he  was  ushered  into  the 
'Squire's  dining-room,  and  the  latter,  without  pay- 
ing the  slightest  attention  to  the  prisoner,  said  to 
the  officer : 

"  I  have  just  heard  that  you  served  the  warrant  I 
issued,  and  then  took  the  boy  to  Deacon  Jones' 
house.     Is  that  correct?" 

"Straight  as  a  string,  'Squire.  Lawyer  Harvey 
told  him  if  an^^thing  happened  to  go  there,  an'  I 
thought  he  had  a  right  to  look  up  bail  before  being 
lugged  off  to  jail.  Here's  what  the  deacon's  got  to 
say  about  it." 

The  'Squire  took  the  paper  which  the  officer  held 
out,  and  after  reading  it,  said  benignly : 

"You  were  quite  correct  in  doing  what  you  did, 
Mr.  Constable.  This  is  quite  sufficient  guarantee 
that  lie  will  be  produced  when  wanted,  and  you 
may  let  him  go.  Give  me  the  papers,  and  I  will 
indorse  them." 

After  this  formality  had  been  gone  through  with 
the  constable  said  to  Mr.  Sweet: 

"That  settles  the  matter  so  far  as  Teddy  is  con- 
cerned, and  with  such  men  as  the  deacon,  Mr. 
Beaves,  and  Lawyer  Harvey  to  back   him,  I  don't 


BOY  AT  A  CO UNTR Y  FAIR.  233 

believe  old  Nathan  will  make  auv  too  much  out  of 
this  job." 

"You  are  free  to  go  where  you  please,"  the 
'Squire  added,  and  the  young  fakir  with  his  friends 
left  the  house,  wondering  very  much  at  the  amount 
of  influence  which,  unsolicited,  had  been  exerted 
in  Teddy's  behalf. 

As  for  the  boy  himself,  he  was  far  from  feeling 
comfortable  in  mind.  Unless  the  burglary  could  be 
brought  home  to  Long  Jim  it  did  not  seem  possible 
that  Hazelton  could  be  set  free,  and  this  last  was 
absolutely  necessary  in  order  to  establish  his  own 
innocence. 

It  was  a  great  consolation  for  him  to  be  with  such 
good  friends,  however,  and  each  in  turn  tried  to 
cheer  him,  but  without  success  until  Mr.  Sweet 
said: 

"There's  no  question  of  your  getting  out  of  the 
scrape  with  fl^^ing  colors,  and  to  celebrate  I'm  goin' 
to  give  a  regular  dinner  party  to  every  decent 
fakir  on  the  grounds.  Come  over,  boys,  an'  help 
me  get  ready.  Business  has  been  so  good  to-day 
that  I  can  afford  to  indulge  in  a  little  extrava- 
gance." 


234  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 
THE  FAKIRS'  PARTY. 

THE  idea  of  a  party  in  the  museum  tent,  where 
there  would  be  no  guests  save  fakirs,  struck 
Teddy  as  being  very  comical,  and  he  laughed  heart- 
ily despite  the  fact  that  he  was  still  virtually  a  pris- 
oner in  the  meshes  of  the  law ;  but  at  the  same  time 
he  did  not  think  Mr.  Sweet  was  really  in  earnest 
when  he  made  the  proposition. 

It  was  not  many  moments,  however,  before  he 
understood  that  the  party  was  to  be  given  in  the 
most  elaborate  manner  possible. 

On  arriving  at  the  tent  Mr.  Sweet  sent  the 
bouncer  out  with  invitations  to  such  of  the  fakirs  as 
remained  on  the  grounds  all  night,  or  lived  in  the 
immediate  vicinity,  and  at  the  same  time  the  clown 
started  for  the  town  in  order  to  purchase  refresh- 
ments. 

"Now,  you  boys  are  to  take  right  hold  an'  help 
the  best  you  know  how,"  the  proprietor  of  the 
museum  said  as  he  pulled  off  his  coat  and  vest 
preparatory  to  making  ready  for  the  feast.  "If 
them  as  comes  want  to  sit  down  it  must  be  on  the 
ground,  owing  to  the  lack  of  chairs,  therefore  it 


ra 

3 

3 

3 

D- 

Cfl 

^ 

a>    en 

^    n) 


-  3 


THE  NEW  YORF 
PUBLIC  LIBRA: 


ASTOK,  LEr;  ;..  ... 
TILDEN   FOUNDAT:..' 
H  ,    L 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  235 

don't  make  much   difference  if  the  table  is  a  trifle 
high." 

To  the  surprise  of  the  boys  he  proceeded  to  con- 
vert the  wagon  into  a  "festal  board"  by  first  pull- 
ing it  into  the  center  of  the  tent,  and  then  removing 
the  sides.  Over  the  floor  of  this  newspapers  were 
spread,  and  two  plates,  three  forks,  one  knife,  and 
four  tin  dippers  were  placed  on  the  impromptu 
cloth. 

"The  provisions  will  be  cut  ready  for  eating," 
Mr.  Sweet  explained,  "  so  one  knife  must  serve  for 
all  hands,  and  it  won't  hurt  any  of  the  crowd  if 
they're  obliged  to  take  turns  using  the  dippers." 

The  clown  returned  before  the  guests  began  to 
assemble.  He  brought  cold  sausage,  sliced  ham, 
cold  fried  potatoes,  sweet  crackers,  cake,  pie,  and 
a  quantity  of  lemons  and  sugar. 

Contrary  to  his  expectations,  Mr.  Sweet  did  not 
think  this  assortment  sufiicient  for  the  kind  of  a 
dinner  he  proposed  to  give,  and  the  messenger  was 
forced  to  return  in  search  of  cheese,  pickled  pig's 
feet,  sardines,  and  milk  for  the  coffee. 

Matters  were  in  a  decided  state  of  confusion 
when  the  first  of  the  guests  arrived.  Mr.  Sweet, 
not  troubled  by  the  absence  of  dishes,  had  placed 
the  various  articles  on  the  wagon-table  in  the 
brown  paper  coverings  as  they  had  been  received, 
and  it  was  upon  his  skill  as  a  maker  of  coffee  that 
he  based  his  reputation  as  a  host. 


236  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Therefore  everything  was  neglected  for  this  one 
important  thing,  and  the  proprietor  was  standing 
over  the  oil  stove  with  a  look  of  grave  responsi- 
bility on  his  face  when  the  owner  of  the  envelope 
game  and  his  assistant  arrived. 

"The  boys  will  take  care  of  you,"  he  said,  hur- 
riedly, bending  over  the  huge  pot  to  inhale  the 
odor,  in  order  to  know  exactly  how  the  berries 
were  adapting  themselves  to  the  infusion,  and, 
much  to  his  surprise,  Teddy  found  himself  the  one 
especial  feature  of  the  party. 

All  on  the  ground  had  evidently  heard  of  his 
arrest,  for  each  new  arrival  asked  concerning  the 
events  of  the  evening,  and,  what  was  more  to  the 
purpose,  so  far  as  he  was  concerned,  all  seemed  to 
think  his  troubles  were  only  temporary. 

"You'll  come  out  of  it  all  right,"  the  manager  of 
the  largest  sandwich  booth  said,  confidently,  as  he 
entered  with  his  hat  on  one  side  of  his  head  and  a 
cigar  held  in  his  mouth  at  an  angle  of  forty-five 
degrees.  "  I  heard  of  your  uncle  last  year,  when  he 
tried  to  make  trouble  for  a  friend  of  mine  in  the 
spittoon  game,  an'  you  can  bet  your  bottom  dollar 
that  the  people  here  are  not  going  to  take  much 
stock  in  w^hat  he  says." 

"It  seems  they  did,  so  far  as  to  issue  a  warrant 
for  my  arrest,"  Teddy  replied,  with  a  mirthless 
smile. 

"But  that  won't  amount  to  anything.     I  hear  you 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  237 

have  got  John  Reaves  as  a  friend,  an'  he  comes 
pretty  near  runnin'  things  to  suit  himself  in  Peach 
Bottom.  He  helped  my  friend  out  of  the  scrape 
your  uncle  put  him  into,  an'  folks  say  there's  no 
love  lost  between  him  an'  Nathan  Hargreaves." 

"  I  want  to  get  out  of  my  trouble  simply  on  the 
ground  that  I  am  not  guilty,"  Teddy  replied.  "If 
I  am  charged  with  aiding  burglars,  there's  precious 
little  consolation  in  being  set  free  simply  because 
people  do  not  like  the  man  who  made  the  charge." 

"  Nobody  believes  you  guilty,  and  for  the  matter 
of  that  I'm  certain  Hazelton  had  nothing  to  do 
with  the  job.  His  game  ain't  exactly  square;  but 
he  don't  go  around  breaking  into  stores." 

Teddy  was  on  the  point  of  telling  that  Long  Jim 
had  been  arrested  because  of  the  burglaries  com- 
mitted ;  but  he  remembered  in  time  that  this  fact 
was  as  yet  a  secret,  and  remained  silent. 

The  man  who  leased  the  only  "Great  African 
Dodg'^^r"  was  the  next  to  arrive,  and  he  also  seemed 
to  think  it  necessary  to  condole  with  the  young 
fakir  in  his  troubles,  as  did  the  remainder  of  the 
guests,  and  by  the  time  all  were  assembled  Teddy 
began  to  think  his  experience  was  only  such  as 
every  other  person  in  the  tent  had  undergone  at 
some  time  in  his  career. 

"You  see  this  is  the  way  the  matter  stands," 
the  whip  man  said,  confidentially,  while  Mr.  Sweet 
was  bending  all  his  energies  to  mixing  the  lemon- 


238  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

ade.  "People  think  fakirs  are  the  worst  class  of 
men  in  the  world,  whereas,  if  the  matter  was  sifted 
right  down,  they'd  find  the  class  as  a  v/hole  was 
honest  because  they  couldn't  afford  to  be  other- 
wise. I'm  not  talking  now  about  those  who  run 
strong  games,  like  Hazelton;  but  ourselves  who 
do  a  legitimate  business.  You've  got  canes  an' 
knives  to  sell,  while  I  deal  in  whips;  now  all  we 
want  is  a  fair  show  to  dispose  of  our  goods,  an' 
we  know  everything  must  be  done  on  the  square, 
or  there's  bound  to  be  trouble  sooner  or  later,  con- 
sequently we  keep  straight,  an'  take  all  the  abuse 
which  those  who  have  come  to  swindle  the  folks 
deserve.  Why,  what,  I  ask  you,  would  the  man- 
agers of  these  fairs  do  if  they  couldn't  get  us  to 
come  up  with  our  money  for  privileges?  They 
couldn't  pay  expenses,  an'  that's  the  whole  amount 
of  the  story.  They  run  after  us,  an'  yet  when  we 
come  there's  the  same  old  howl  about  swind- 
lers." 

The  man  talked  until  he  was  litprally  forced  to 
stop  for  lack  of  breath,  and  Teddy  had  not  so  much 
as  spoken ;  but  proved  a  good  listener,  which  was 
all  his  condoler  appeared  to  expect  of  him. 

When  the  clown  returned  with  the  last  install- 
ment of  eatables  there  was  nothing  to  prevent  the 
assembled  crowd  from  partaking  of  Mr.  Sweet's 
hospitality.  The  coffee  was  done  to  a  turn;  the 
lemonade  was  neither  too  sour  nor  too  sweet,  and 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR,  239 

the  proprietor  of  the  museum  summoned  his  guests 
to  the  feast  by  saying : 

"Now  turn  to  an'  fill  yourselves  up.  It  ain't  often 
I  do  this  sort  of  thing;  but  somehow  or  other  I've 
got  a  reg'lar  admiration  for  our  cane-board  fakir, 
an'  after  comin'  out  as  he  has  to-night  it  seems 
only  right  we  should  kinder  spread  ourselves. 
There's  no  liquor  in  the  tent,  which  is  as  it  should 
be,  for  I'm  a  temperance  man,  an'  them  as  wants 
it  can  make  hogs  of  themselves  somewhere  else. 
Take  hold  hearty,  an'  remember  that  this  layout  is 
in  honor  of  them  as  did  a  good  turn  to  the  whole 
gang  by  savin'  the  lives  of  the  women  what  would 
likely  have  drowned  if  there  hadn't  been  any  fakirs 
in  the  country." 

This  was  an  unusually  long  speech  for  the  pro- 
prietor of  the  museum,  and  when  it  was  ended  he 
set  an  example  to  his  guests  by  attacking  the  eat- 
ables as  if  he  had  not  indulged  in  a  square  meal 
since  the  fair  was  opened. 

Each  person  present  imitated  him,  and  Tim  whis- 
pered to  Teddy,  when  his  mouth  was  so  full  of  cake 
that  it  was  only  with  the  greatest  difficulty  his 
words  could  be  understood : 

"This  is  what  I  call  a  great  snap,  an'  when  I've 
been  fakin'  at  the  fairs  long  enough  to  get  some 
money  ahead  I'll  give  fellers  like  us  a  good  chance 
to  fill  up,  the  same  as  Mr.  Sweet  has  done." 

Dan  was   equally  enthusiastic.     In  all  his  experi- 


240  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

ence,  which  extended  over  two  years  at  the  very 
least,  he  declared  that  he  had  never  seen  so  much 
done  for  a  boy,  and  concluded  by  saymg: 

"There's  no  question,  Teddy,  but  that  you're  a 
big  gun  here,  an'  I'll  advise  you  to  keep  right  on  in 
this  business." 

"I've  had  enough  of  it,"  was  the  reply.  "Such 
times  as  these  are  very  nice;  but  think  of  what 
may  happen  when  I'm  brought  up  for  trial.  Who 
knows  but  Uncle  Nathan  can  succeed  in  makin' 
folks  think  I'm  guilty  of  helpin'  the  burglars,  an' 
then  what'll  be  the  consequences?" 

"I  know  he  can't  do  anything  of  the  kind,  an' 
that's  enough,"  was  the  confident  reply;  but  yet  it 
failed  to  satisfy  the  boy  who  had  been  bound  over 
to  appear  at  court. 

The  entire  party  appeared  to  be  having  the 
jolliest  kind  of  a  jolly  time ;  but  ever  before  Ted- 
dy's mental  vision  came  the  picture  of  himself  in 
prison,  and  even  the  fact  that  Long  Jim  had  been 
arrested  failed  to  render  him  confident  as  to  the 
final  result. 

Again  and  again  was  he  called  upon  to  reply  as 
one  after  another  wished  him  good  luck  in  the  case, 
and  the  amount  of  lemonade  which  was  consumed 
on  each  occasion  caused  the  clown  to  make  a  third 
visit  to  the  town  in  order  to  purchase  the  where- 
withal to  satisfy  the  demands  of  the  guests. 

It   was   nearly  midnight   when   the  last   of    the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  241 

revelers  departed  and  the  boys  were  called  upon  to 
help  set  the  interior  of  the  tent  to  rights. 

"It  hasn't  been  sich  a  bad  time  after  all,"  Mr. 
Sweet  said,  musingly,  as  Teddy  and  Dan  aided  him 
in  wheeling  the  wagon  into  place.  "  A  man  can 
remember  an  evening  like  this  with  pleasure,  when 
liquor  has  been  kept  out  of  the  bill  of  fare,  an'  who 
shall  say  that  we're  not  better  off  than  if  our  legs 
were  so  tangled  as  to  make  walking  an  impossi- 
bility?" 

The  barker's  red  nose  was  slightly  elevated, 
much  as  if  its  owner  could  explain  why  spirits 
were  superior  to  lemon-juice  and  water ;  but  Mr. 
Sweet's  question  remained  unanswered,  and  the 
party  set  about  making  the  final  preparations  for 
the  night. 

"Poor  Sam  ain't  here  to  be  troubled  by  the  goat, 
so  we  can  set  him  loose,"  the  proprietor  of  the 
museum  said  as  he  unfastened  the  rope  from  the 
neck  of  his  pet. 

"He'll  have  a  great  time  pickin'  up  odds  an'  ends 
between  now  an'  daylight,  an'  then  feel  so  lazy 
that  it'll  be  hard  work  to  make  him  do  his  tricks." 

"Do  you  suppose  Uncle  Nathan  will  be  around  in 
the  morning?"  Teddy  asked  as  he  lay  down  by 
the  side  of  Dan  and  Tim. 

"  Not  a  bit  of  it ;  he  got  sich  a  dose  to-night  that 
I  don't  count  on  seein'  him  ag'in  till  this  fair  is 
ended,  an'  then  I'm  going  to  take  a  trip  over  to  the 


242  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Kun  for  the  express  purpose  of  givin'  him  a  piece 
of  my  mind." 

"But  suppose  he  should  come,  what  shall  I  say?" 

"Pay  no  attention  to  the  old  fool,  an'  above  all, 
don't  let  him  trap  you  into  talking.  Mr.  Harvey 
v^ill  be  here  to-morrow,  an'  he  can  post  you  better 
than  ever  I  could." 

"Don't  fuss  about  the  thing  at  all,"  Dan  replied, 
philosophically.  "There's  plenty  here  who  know 
you  hadn't  anything  to  do  with  the  burglaries,  an' 
he  won't  have  as  much  as  a  friend  by  the  time  the 
trial  is  ended." 

"Dan  comes  pretty  nigh  being  right,"  Mr.  Sweet 
added,  "an'  now  I  want  all  hands  to  go  to  sleep,  for 
there's  one  more  day  of  this  fair,  an'  we  need  to  be 
somewhere  near  fresh,  because  to-morrow  the  dol- 
lars won't  tumble  without  a  good  deal  of  coaxing. 
Good-night." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  243 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 
IN  HIDING. 

THAT  the  incidents  may  be  related  as  nearly  as 
possible  in  the  order  of  their  occurrence  it  is 
time  to  return  to  the  spot  where  the  burglars  are  in 
hiding. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  we  last  saw  Sam  after 
Phil  had  fallen  asleep,  and  he  was  feigning  uncon- 
sciousness lest  Long  Jim,  having  nothing  else  to 
do,  should  take  it  into  his  ugly  head  to  administer 
the  promised  flogging. 

Although  Sam's  eyes  were  apparently  closed,  he 
took  good  care  to  keep  strict  watch  on  the  burglar ; 
but  for  what  seemed  a  very  long  time  he  saw 
nothing  to  cause  any  apprehensions,  and  was  just 
on  the  point  of  going  to  sleep  in  reality  when  Jim 
asked,  as  he  gave  the  boy  a  vicious  kick  on  the 
side : 

"Where's  the  grub?" 

"I  don't  know.  You  put  it  away  after  finishing 
your  dinner." 

"Oh,  I  remember  now,"  and  the  burglar,  still 
considerably  more  than  half  stupefied  by  the 
amount  of  liquor  he  had  drunk,  arose  to  bis  feet  so 


244  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

unsteadily  that  it  seemed  as  if  only  the  lightest 
touch  would  be  necessary  to  send  him  headlong. 

After  a  short  search  the  man  found  that  which  he 
wanted,  and  proceeded  to  make  a  hearty  meal,  re- 
gardless of  the  hungry  glances  which  the  boy 
bestowed  upon  him. 

"Don't  think  I'm  goin'  to  give  you  any,"  he  said, 
with  a  leer,  as  he  concluded  the  repast,  "You're 
lucky  to  be  alive,  an'  that's  enough  for  sich  a 
duffer.  I'll  put  this  stuff  back,  an'  you'll  have 
every  bone  in  your  body  broken  if  you  so  much  as 
smell  of  it." 

Sam  made  no  reply.  He  had  already  learned 
that  there  are  very  many  times  when  silence  is  in- 
deed "golden." 

"I've  made  up  my  mind  to  see  what  can  be  done 
at  the  fair,"  Jim  said,  as  he  lighted  his  pipe  with 
great  deliberation.  "Phil  thinks  he's  the  only 
smart  man  in  the  world,  an'  it's  time  to  show  him 
what  a  mistake  he's  been  makin'  all  his  life.  Why 
don't  you  say  something?"  he  cried,  angrily,  as 
Sam  continued  silent. 

"I  don't  know  what  you  want  me  to  say.  If 
you're  goin'  that  settles  it ;  I  sha'n't  be  any  better 
off." 

"You  can  stake  your  life  on  that,  for  while  I'm  a 
gentleman  an'  behave  myself  as  such,  Phil  is  a 
reg'lar  brute,  an'  will  make  things  mighty  uncom- 
fortable for  a  sneak  like  you," 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  245 

Sam  thought,  but  was  very  careful  not  to  say, 
that  it  was  hardly  possible  for  a  boy  to  have  a 
worse  master  than  the  alleged  gentleman  in  front 
of  him,  and  the  burglar  continued,  as  he  arose  to 
his  feet : 

"I  want  to  leave  without  wakin'  Phil,  but  you 
must  do  it  as  soon  as  1  push  off  from  the  shore,  for 
we  don't  intend  to  give  you  a  chance  of  slipping 
aAvay.  I  shall  watch  mighty  close,  an'  if  he  isn't 
on  his  feet  before  I'm  a  dozen  yards  out  into  the 
creek  you'll  get  a  reminder  from  this,"  and  the 
man  ostentatiously  displayed  a  revolver. 

"I  don't  count  on  runnin'  off,"  Sam  replied, 
thoroughly  frightened  by  the  threat.  "  I  can  stay 
here  till  you  get  ready  to  let  me  go,  because  I've 
got  to,  an'  I'm  not  sich  a  fool  as  to  git  into  any 
worse  scrape." 

"Now  you're  talkin'  somethin'  like  sense,  an'  if 
you  keep  on  in  this  way  I'll  see  to  it  that  you  don't 
have  any  harder  time  than  a  detective  oughter 
expect.  Phil  will  be  on  his  ear  when  he  knows  I've 
gone,  an'  you  must  tell  me  all  he  says.  Remember 
that  if  he  isn't  on  his  feet  before  I've  got  beyond 
range,  I'll  use  your  head  for  a  target." 

With  this  threat  the  burglar  staggered  out  of  the 
thicket,  and  Sam  began  to  speculate  as  to  whether 
he  should  make  one  supreme  effort  to  escape  be- 
fore his  other  captor  awakeneci. 

A  second  glance  at  the  weapon  decided  him  in  the 


346  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COTjNTRY 

negative,  however,  and  he  meekly  stepped  to  the 
edge  of  the  woods  in  order  to  obey  tlie  instructions 
given. 

Despite  Jim's  apparent  intoxication  he  watched 
the  boy  closely,  still  holding  the  revolver  ready 
for  use,  and  after  pushing  the  boat  into  the  stream 
he  cried: 

"Now  go  ahead,  an'  let  me  see  him  in  about  two 
minutes,  or  I'll  fill  you  full  of  bullets." 

If  Sam  had  been  a  brave  boy  he  would  have  made 
a  dash  for  liberty  at  this  moment;  but  he  was  in 
nearly  every  sense  of  the  word  a  coward,  and 
obeyed  the  order  literally. 

"Who's  there?"  Phil  asked,  angrily,  as  the  boy 
shook  him  vigorouslyo 

"Jim  told  me  to  make  you  get  up,  or  he'd  shoot," 
Sam  replied,  meekly. 

"Make  me  get  up?    What  time  is  it?" 

"I  don't  know;  but  it  doesn't  seem  to  be  more 
than  three  o'clock." 

"Where's  Jim?" 

"Jest  startin'  for  the  fair  grounds,  an'  if  you 
don't  show  yourself  pretty  soon  he's  sure  to  shoot 
me." 

"  There  wouldn't  be  any  particular  harm  in  that, 
for  you  deserve  it ;  but  it  can't  be  possible  the  fool 
is  goin'  to  show  himself  in  daylight  when  more  than 
one  is  lookin'  for  him." 

"That's  what  he  said,"  and  Sam,  fearing  lest  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  247 

half-drunken  burglar  would  begin  his  pistol  prac- 
tice, seated  himself  behind  the  largest  tree  that 
might  protect  him  from  the  bullets. 

Now  that  Phil  was  awake,  he  did  not  lose  any 
further  time  in  talking,  but  ran  out  to  where  he 
could  command  a  view  of  the  creek,  and  once  more 
Sam  had  an  opportunity  for  escape  w^hich  he  did 
not  dare  to  embrace. 

"Come  back  here,  an'  don't  make  a  fool  of  your- 
self,",Jim's  partner  cried,  angrily,  as  he  saw  the 
man  pulling  leisurely  from  the  bank. 

"What's  crawlin'  on  you?  Don't  I  know  my  busi- 
ness?" 

"Kot  if  you  count  on  goin'  up  there  before  dark." 

"That's  jest  what  I  intend  to  do,  so  don't  screech 
so  much." 

"  Come  back,  I  tell  you,  or  it'll  be  all  up  for  both 
of  us!" 

"  I've  been  in  this  business  long  enough  to  know 
it,"  was  the  reply,  as  Jim  continued  to  row,  increas- 
ing each  instant  the  distance  between  himself  and 
the  shore. 

"Now,  don't  spoil  a  good  thing,"  Phil  said,  plead- 
ingly, and,  understanding  that  this  conversation 
might  be  continued  for  a  short  time,  Sam  plucked 
up  sufficient  courage  to  make  an  attack  upon  the 
provisions. 

He  took  from  the  general  store  a  large  piece  of 
cheese,  some  crackers  and  as  much  meat  as  he  be- 


248  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

lieved  would  suffice  to  make  a  hearty  meal,  after 
which  he  hid  the  lot  near  the  tree  behind  which  he 
was  hiding. 

Then  he  crept  back  to  his  former  position,  and 
listened  to  the  conversation  between  his  captors. 

Phil  alternately  coaxed  and  threatened  his  part- 
ner ;  but  all  to  no  purpose,  as  could  be  told  by  the 
tones  of  the  latter's  voice  while  he  pulled  up  stream, 
and  the  baffled  burglar  returned  to  the  camping 
place  absolutely  furious  with  rage. 

"This  comes  of  my  bein' so  foolish  as  to  bring 
that  fool  liquor,"  he  said  half  to  himself.  "It's 
mighty  lucky  he  didn't  know  I  had  more  than  one 
bottle." 

Then  he  took  from  one  of  his  pockets  a  second 
flask,  refreshing  himself  with  a  portion  of  the  con- 
tents before  asking : 

"  What  did  he  say  to  you?" 

"Nothin'  except  that  he  was  goin'  up  to  the  fair," 
Sam  replied,  timidly, 

"But  what  made  him  tell  you  to  waken  me?" 

"I  s'pose  that  was  so  I  couldn't  have  a  chance  to 
run  away." 

"  What  else  did  he  say  ?" 

"  That  I  was  to  tell  him  jest  how  you  took  his 
leavin'." 

"Well,  if  he's  lucky  enough  to  get  back,  tell  him 
I  said  he  was  the  biggest  fool  that  ever  walked  on 
two  legs.     Them  chums  of  your'n  are  sure  to  spot 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  249 

him,  an'  it's  ten  to  one  he's  pinched  before  sunset." 

Sam  did  not  understand  what  the  man  meant  by 
the  term  "pinched,"  but  under  the  circumstances 
he  hardly  thought  it  safe  to  inquire,  and  the  angry 
burglar  continued : 

"  We'll  make  ready  to  get  out  of  this  if  he  isn't 
back  by  daylight,  an'  while  there's  nothin'  else  to 
do  you'd  better  put  that  stuff  under  ground,  for 
there's  no  knowin'  now  when  we'll  be  able  to  take 
it  away." 

The  spade  was  near  at  hand  ready  for  use,  and 
while  Phil  alternately  smoked  and  drank  from  the 
bottle,  Sam  set  about  burying  the  plunder. 

This  man  was  quite  as  hard  a  taskmaster  as  the 
one  who  had  just  departed,  and  the  boy  was  forced 
to  work  as  he  had  probably  never  done  before,  until 
sufficient  of  an  excavation  had  been  made  to  con- 
ceal the  goods. 

Under  the  direction  of  the  burglar  Sam  covered 
the  different  packages  with  earth ;  did  his  best  to 
hide  all  traces  of  his  work,  and  when  it  was  so  dark 
that  he  could  no  longer  see  to  move  about  was  al- 
lowed to  rest. 

During  this  time  Phil  had  been  drinking  and 
smoking,  with  the  result  that  he  could  hardly  speak 
plainly  when  the  task  was  accomplished,  and  so  in- 
toxicated did  he  appear  to  be  that  Sam  thought  it 
safe  to  eat  the  food  he  had  concealed. 

"Keep  on  talkin'  so's  I'll  know  where  you  are,  or 


250  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

on  goes  the  ropes  an'  gag  again,"  Phil  cried,  and 
the  boy  obeyed,  repeating  over  and  over  the  same 
words  in  order  to  satisfy  his  suspicious  captor. 

After  eating  a  hearty  meal,  Sam  succeeded  in 
mustering  sufficient  courage  to  admit  of  his  think- 
ing about  attempting  to  escape. 

From  the  manner  in  which  the  burglar  spoke  he 
knew  it  could  not  be  very  much  longer  before  the 
man  would  be  so  completely  under  the  influence  of 
liquor  as  to  render  him  helpless,  and  he  said  to  him- 
self: 

"If  I  could  get  the  rope  around  his  hands  an'  legs 
I'd  soon  be  out  of  this  place." 

"What's  that  you  are  saying?"  Phil  cried,  an- 
grily. 

"Nothin';  I  was  only  doin'  as  you  told  me, 
talkin'  so's  you'd  know  where  I  was." 

"I'll  save  all  that  trouble,"  and  the  man  lurched 
to  his  feet  as  he  picked  up  the  rope. 

"Please  don't  tie  me  ag'in,"  Sam  pleaded.  "I 
won't  try  to  git  away." 

"I'll  go  bail  that  you  don't  after  I'm  through  with 
you.     Put  out  your  hands." 

Phil  was  yet  capable  of  mischief,  even  though  his 
brain  was  clouded,  and  Sam  did  not  dare  to  diso- 
be}^ 

He  suffered  himself  to  be  tied  without  making 
any  remonstrance,  and  as  the  burglar  staggered  to 
his  former  resting  place,  the  boy  tested  the  bonds. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  251 

Previously  he  had  been  lashed  in  such  a  manner 
that  it  was  impossible  to  move  hand  or  foot,  but 
now  he  soon  realized  that  he  could  do  both,  and  the 
happy  thought  came  that  he  might  free  himself 
v/ith  but  little  difficulty  if  a  favorable  opportunity 
for  escape  should  present  itself. 

"Now  you're  fixed,"  Phil  said,  half  to  himself, 
"an' I  may  as  well  take  things  comfortable  till 
we're  certain  that  that  fool  of  a  Jim  is  settled." 

"Are  you  goin'  to  leave  here  to-night?"  Sam 
asked,  more  for  the  purpose  of  learning  how  far  the 
man  was  on  the  road  to  intoxication  than  for  in- 
formation. 

"If  he  ain't  here  by  twelve  o'clock  we'll  know 
the  jig  is  up,  an'  skip  so's  to  be  out  of  the  way  be- 
fore any  one  can  come  sneakin'  around  for  the 
stuff." 

"Then  if  Jim  isn't  back  by  that  time,  an'  he 
keeps  on  drinkin',  I'll  take  all  the  chances,"  Sam 
said  to  himself,  and  from  that  instant  he  strained 
every  nerve  to  learn  how  nearly  the  burglar  had 
succeeded  in  making  a  worse  brute  of  himself  than 
nature  intended. 


252  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 
A  FAILURE. 

TIRED  though  Teddy  was,  a  long  time  elapsed 
after  the  conclusion  of  the  fakirs'  feast  before 
he  could  close  his  eyes  in  slumber. 

Now  that  the  excitement  of  the  party  had  died 
away,  the  fact  that  he  was  a  prisoner,  suffered  to 
remain  outside  the  prison  only  because  men  of 
wealth  were  willing  to  guarantee  he  would  respond 
to  the  call  of  the  court,  came  into  his  mind  even 
more  vividly  than  at  the  time  of  the  arrest,  and  de- 
spite all  the  words  of  cheer  which  had  been  spoken 
he  really  began  to  believe  Uncle  Nathan  could  show 
plausible  proof  of  his  guilt. 

Under  almost  any  other  circumstances  he  would 
have  speculated  upon  what  should  be  done  with  the 
large  amount  of  money  he  had  already  earned,  and 
rejoiced  at  the  thought  that  he  could  supply  his 
mother  with  what  she  might  need  for  the  present, 
at  all  events. 

The  profits  of  the  cane  and  knife  boards  were 
hardly  thought  of  on  this  night  while  the  one  pain- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  253 

ful  fact  stood  before  him  so  prominently  and  men- 
acingly. 

His  companions  had  been  asleep  many  hours  be- 
fore slumber  visited  his  eyelids,  and  so  heavy  was 
his  heart  even  while  in  dreamland  that  he  awoke 
with  the  first  dawn  of  day,  and  aroused  the 
others  to  the  last  day's  work  they  would  be  called 
upon  to  do  at  the  Peach  Bottom  fair  during  the 
present  season. 

"  Why  is  it  that  you  have  turned  out  so  early?" 
Mr.  Sweet  asked,  in  a  sleepy  tone,  rising  to  his  feet 
as  the  only  effectual  method  of  driving  the  drowsi- 
ness from  his  eyelids. 

"I  sha'n't  feel  much  like  sleeping  till  I  know  how 
the  case  is  coming  out,"  Teddy  replied,  sadly. 

"There  is  no  need  to  worry  with  such  friends  as 
you  have  got.  Pat  it  right  out  of  your  mind  until 
business  closes  to-night,  for  there's  a  big  pile  of 
work  to  be  done  if  you  expect  to  make  much 
money." 

"I  wish  I  could,"  Teddy  said,  with  a  long-drawn 
sigh  as  he  aroused  Tim  and  Dan. 

Half  an  hour  later  the  three  boys  were  eating 
what  it  was  believed  would  be  their  last  meal  in 
the  very  unsatisfactory  boarding-house,  and 
Teddy's  place  of  business  was  the  first  opened  on 
that  morning. 

There  were  no  more  early  visitors ;  but  the  fakirs 
who  had  been  present  at  the  feast  on  the  evening 


254  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

previous  gathered  around,  all  appearing  very  eager 
to  spend  money,  and  trade  v^as  as  lively  as  it  had 
been  on  any  other  morning. 

The  crowd  bought  rings  and  threw  them  reck- 
lessly until  each  man  had  spent  considerably  more 
than  a  dollar,  when  Teddy  suddenly  realized  that 
this  sudden  passion  for  canes  only  arose  from  a  de- 
sire to  aid  him.     Then  he  said,  decidedly : 

"There's  no  need  of  you  fellows  doin'  this.  I 
know  you  want  to  see  me  out  of  the  scrape ;  but 
I've  made  a  lot  of  money  already,  an'  don't  want 
to  take  yours." 

"You  can't  have  too  much,  my  boy,"  one  of  them 
said  with  a  laugh,  "and  we  want  to  see  you  go 
away  with  a  pile.  Trade  has  been  boomin'  for  all 
hands,  an'  it  would  be  kinder  rough  if  we  couldn't 
have  a  little  fun  now  the   fair  is  the  same  as  over." 

This  did  not  satisfy  Teddy,  and  he  continued  to 
expostulate  against  the  generosity ;  but  all  to  no 
purpose.  The  fakirs  played  until  a  sufficient  num- 
ber of  visitors  had  arrived  to  warrant  their  opening 
the  other  booths,  and  then  Tim  and  Teddy  were  left 
alone,  Dan  having  started  for  the  exhibition  build- 
ing some  time  previous. 

Until  ten  o'clock  there  was  no  more  than  work 
enough  to  keep  one  boy  moderately  busy,  and  Teddy 
experienced  a  deep  sense  of  relief  as  Mr.  Harvey 
came  up  to  the  stand  with  a  cheery  "good  morning." 

"I  hear    that    your  Uncle  Nathan  succeeded  in 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  255 

carrying  out  his  threat,"  the  visitor  said,  as  if 
speaking  about  what  was  a  very  trifling  matter. 

"Yes,  sir;  an'  do  you  think  lie  can  send  me  to 
prison?" 

"Not  a  bit  of  it.  You  are  under  bail,  and  I  ven- 
ture to  predict  that  he  will  not  carry  it  to  court,  for 
he  has  sufficient  sense  to  know  it  may  prove  a  very 
expensive  job.  We  sent  our  men  to  the  barn  on  the 
marshes  last  night." 

"What  did  you  find?"  Teddy  asked,  eagerly. 

"More  than  I  expected.  There  were  no  goods  in 
the  building,  but  some  have  evidently  been  buried 
there,  and  this  fact,  together  with  the  evidence  that 
boats  have  been  drawn  up  on  the  shore  recently, 
proves  your  story  as  to  what  was  seen  when  you 
boys  followed  the  two  men  to  be  correct." 

"The  other  fellow  has  run  away,  I  suppose." 

"I  think  he  is  yet  in  the  immediate  vicinity, 
otherwise  Jim  would  be  willing  to  talk." 

"Have  you  seen  him  since  he  was  arrested?" 

"I  have  just  come  from  the  jail.  I  told  him  of  the 
evidence  we  already  had  to  connect  him  with  the 
burglary,  and  that  we  should  pusli  him  hard  in  the 
interest  of  you  and  Hazelton.  He  understands  that 
there  is  an  opportunity  to  turn  State's  witness,  but 
he  absolutely  refuses  to  speak  on  any  subject. 
Therefore  I  fancy  his  partner  has  not  yet  got  away." 

"Then  there  has  been  no  good  done  in  arresting 
him,"  Teddy  said,  mournfully. 


256  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"  That  is  where  you  are  making  a  mistake.  I  have 
prepared  an  affidavit  for  you  and  Dan  to  swear  to, 
and  shall  endeavor  to  have  a  warrant  issued  at 
once  charging  him  with  burglary,  so  he  can't  give 
us  the  slip  in  case  he  gets  clear  in  the  matter  of 
swindling." 

"Do  you  want  Dan  an'  I  now?" 

"  Yes ;  go  after  him.  I  will  only  keep  you  ten  or 
fifteen  minutes." 

Teddy  turned  to  go  toward  the  exhibition  build- 
ings, but  halted  an  instant  to  ask : 

"Have  you  seen  my  uncle  this  morning?" 

"No,  but  I  shall  do  so  later  in  the  day,  and  after 
we  have  a  little  conversation  I  do  not  think  he  will 
be  so  eager  to  see  you  in  prison." 

The  lawyer's  confident  manner  had  very  much  to 
do  with  taking  the  load  of  sorrow  from  Teddy's 
mind,  and  he  looked  almost  cheerful  as  he  asked  of 
the  manager  of  the  Stevens  exhibit  that  Dan  be 
allowed  to  accompany  him,  explaining  the  reason 
for  making  the  request. 

"Of  course  he  can  go,"  the  gentleman  replied, 
readily.  "  Trade  won't  be  so  good  to-aay  but  that 
he  can  be  spared  as  well  as  not,  and  even  if  it  was 
rushing,  he  should  have  permission  to  leave." 

When  the  boys  were  at  the  cane-board  onco 
more  Mr.  Harvey  hurried  them  away  to  the  magis- 
trate's office,  and  there  a  long  document  was  read, 
which  described  in  detail  all  they  had  seen  on  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  257 

day  when  Sam  first  gave  an  exhibition  of  his  skill 
as  a  detective. 

They  marveled  not  a  little  that  the  lawyer  should 
have  remembered  so  well  every  trifling  incident. 
Nothing,  however  apparently  unimportant,  had  es- 
caped him,  and,  as  Dan  said : 

"  It  is  written  down  better  than  if  he  had  really 
been  with  us." 

This  document  was  sworn  to  and  signed  by  both, 
after  which  Mr.  Harvey  told  them  that  they  might 
return  to  work,  adding  as  he  turned  to  Teddy : 

"The  man  who  has  been  arrested  on  your  com- 
plaint will  have  a  hearing  to-morrow,  and  it  is  ab- 
solutely necessary  you  should  be  at  this  office  as 
early  as  nine  o'clock.  I  don't  know  whether  Dan 
will  be  allowed  to  tell  what  he  has  heard  Sam  say 
regarding  the  matter,  but  he  had  better  come  with 
you." 

"I'll  be  on  hand,"  the  young  fakir  replied.  "Do 
you  know  when  I'm  to  be  tried?" 

"That  case  won't  come  up  for  some  time  in  view 
of  the  evidence  your  lawyer  is  collecting,"  the 
'Squire  said. 

"  Don't  worry  about  it,  for  I  think  the  real  burg- 
lars will  soon  be  caught." 

"  An'  does  Mr.  Hazelton  have  to  stay  in  jail  all 
the  time?" 

"There  is  no  other  way  out  of  it,  since  he  hasn't 
got  friends  who  can  go  bail  for  him." 


258  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Teddy  wanted  very  much  to  ask  permission  to  see 
the  prisoner,  but  inasmuch  as  he  was  accused  of 
being  equally  guilty  with  the  fakir  it  hardly 
seemed  just  the  proper  thing  to  make  the  request, 
and  he  left  the  office,  followed  by  Dan,  who  said,  as 
they  gained  the  open  air : 

"You  ain't  goin'  to  have  half  so  much  trouble  as 
you  think,  Teddy.  Anybody  can  see  that  even  the 
'Squire  is  on  your  side,  although  he  did  issue  the 
warrant,  an'  the  proof  must  be  mighty  strong  to 
make  any  of  'em  believe  you  did  anything  against 
the  old  miser.  But  this  keeps  us  here  on  the  grounds 
another  day,  doesn't  it?" 

"Yes,  an'  if  Mr.  Sweet  packs  up  his  tent  to-night, 
we'll  have  to  hunt  for  a  place  to  sleep  in  the  vil- 
lage." 

"  That  don't  worry  me  very  much.  I've  made  a 
good  week's  work  out  of  the  fair,  an'  can  afford  to 
spend  a  little  money." 

"I  shall  pay  all  the  bills,  of  course,"  Teddy  re- 
plied, quickly.  "It  wouldn't  be  any  more'n  right 
because  you  are  goin'  to  stay  to  help  me." 

Dan  was  quite  positive  he  would  pay  his  own  bills, 
and  his  companion  equally  certain  he  should  not ; 
but  there  was  little  chance  for  discussion,  since 
they  had  arrived  opposite  the  grand  stand  by  this 
time,  and  were  hailed  by  Deacon  Jones,  who  looked 
as  if  he  considered  himself  the  one  important  per- 
sonage on  the  grounds  as  he  said : 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  359 

"  I  want  both  of  you  boys  to  be  here  at  exactly 
two  o'clock.  Don't  fail  to  come,  no  matter  how 
much  business  you  may  have  on  hand." 

"What's  the  matter?"  Teddy  asked,  immediately 
thinking  some  new  trouble  threatened  him. 

"There  will  be  plenty  of  time  for  explanation 
after  you  get  here,"  was  the  mysterious  reply,  and 
then  the  deacon  signified  that  the  interview  was  at 
an  end  by  turning  to  speak  with  some  gentlemen 
who  had  been  watching  the  boys  closely. 

"  What  do  you  suppose  is  up  now?"  Teddy  asked 
with  a  sigh,  and  Dan  replied,  mournfully : 

"I'm  sure  I  don't  know,"  but  in  his  own  mind  he 
was  convinced  that  the  deacon  intended  to  surren- 
der the  boy  whose  surety  he  had  appeared  willing 
to  become  on  the  evening  previous. 

Teddy  was  so  disturbed  by  dismal  forebodings 
that  Dan  was  very  careful  to  hide  his  suspicions, 
since  it  could  do  only  harm  to  discuss  them,  and  the 
two  parted,  feeling  as  if  Uncle  Nathan  had  outwit- 
ted Mr.  Harvey. 

On  retuning  to  his  place  of  business  Teddy  did 
not  have  the  heart  to  wait  upon  the  custom<3rs,  and 
after  telling  Tim  what  had  been  said  to  him,  he 
added: 

"I  can't  work;  it's  no  use  to  try.  There  must 
have  been  something  new  come  up,  an'  I  won't  be 
able  to  show  that  I'm  innocent  of  robbing  the 
store." 


260  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

Dan  could  give  him  no  consolation,  for  he  also 
felt  that  matters  were  approaching  a  dangerous 
crisis,  and  he  simply  said : 

"Loaf  around,  old  fellow,  an'  I'll  look  out  for  the 
work  here.  Try  to  put  it  out  of  your  mind,  for 
things  won't  be  made  better  by  worryin'  over  'em." 

Just  at  this  moment  Teddy's  mother  arrived.  She 
had  heard  all  the  particulars  concerning  the  arrest 
and  subsequent  release,  therefore  began  at  once  to 
sympathize  with  her  son. 

"Then  you  know  what  the  deacon  is  goin'  to  do?" 
Teddy  asked. 

This  was  something  of  which  Mrs.  Hargreaves 
was  ignorant,  but  upon  being  told,  appeared  even 
more  distressed  than  her  son,  thus  increasing  in- 
stead of  lightening  his  troubles. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  261 


CHAPTER    XXIX. 
THE  TESTIMONIAL. 

IT  was  impossible  for  Teddy  to  follow  Tim's  advice 
to  "loaf  around." 

His  heart  was  so  full  of  sorrow  that  his  greatest 
desire  was  to  go  where  those  who  might  believe  he 
had  been  a  partner  of  the  burglars  could  not  see 
him ;  but  since  that  was  impossible,  if  he  intended 
to  obey  the  deacon's  injunctions  and  present  him- 
self at  the  grand  stand  at  the  specified  time,  the 
next  best  thing  was  to  remain  behind  the  booth 
where  his  mother  tried  her  best  to  cheer  him. 

"It  can't  be  possible  that  anything  to  your  dis- 
advantage has  occurred,  Teddy,"  she  said  as  she 
held  his  hand  for  mutual  sympathy.  "  Mr.  Reaves 
would  have  sent  me  word  at  once  if  that  had  hap- 
pened." 

"Perhaps  he  doesn't  Irnow  about  it.  Uncle 
Nathan  may  have  been  talking  with  the  deacon 
again,  an'  turned  him  against  me." 

"I  don't  believe  it  would  be  possible  for  him  to 
do  such  a  thing.     His  reputation  is  not  so  good  that 


262  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

people  coald  put  faith  in  all  he  says,  more  especially 
in  regard  to  this  case." 

"Then  if  he  didn't  doit  some  one  else  has,  an' 
that  makes  it  all  the  worse,"  Teddy  replied,  as  he 
tried  to  force  back  the  tears. 

At  this  moment  the  sorrowing  ones  were  startled 
by  hearing  the  voice  of  the  man  whom  they  had 
every  reason  to  call  their  enemy,  and  an  instant 
later  Uncle  Nathan  stood  before  them. 

"Well,"  he  said  in  what  sounded  more  like  a 
snarl  than  anything  else,  "you  see  the  old  skinflint 
did  jest  what  he  promised,  an'  he'll  see  to  it  that 
the  deacon  don't  stay  on  your  bail  very  long  unless 
I  get  my  rights." 

"  What  do  you  mean  by  your  rights?"  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves  asked. 

"  I  lent  this  ungrateful  boy  the  money  to  start 
him  in  a  business  where  he's  made  more  in  a  week 
than  I  ever  could  in  a  year.  Then  he  helped  people 
to  rob  me.,  an'  after  all  that  I  made  what  any  man 
must  call  a  fair  offer.  See  how  much  I've  lost  by 
him,  an'  then  think  of  my  offerin'  to  straighten 
everything  out  by  goin'  in  as  his  partner." 

"Why  didn't  you  do  this  before  the  fair  opened?" 

"I  couldn't  tell  how  it  would  turn  out,"  the  old 
man  began,  and  then  realizing  that  he  was  admit- 
ting something  to  his  discredit,  he  added,  quickly, 
"I  mean  I  hadn't  lost  my  money  then,  an' never 
suspected  how  he  would  wrong  me." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  263 

It  seemed  as  if  these  last  words  drove  Teddy  to 
desperation,  and  he  no  longer  remembered  the 
respect  due  to  age. 

"Look  here,"  he  cried,  angrily,  rising,  and  stand- 
ing directly  in  front  of  Uncle  Nathan,  "  if  you  be- 
lieve I'm  a  burglar,  you  can't  want  to  be  my 
partner.  It  was  only  after  the  fact  of  my  having 
made  considerable  money  was  known  that  you 
offered  any  trade.  If  the  venture  had  been  a  losing 
one  you  are  the  last  person  who  would  have  taken 
hold  of  it.  Now  I'm  under  arrest  on  a  charge 
made  by  you,  who  know  I  am  innocent,  an'  we'll 
put  an  end  to  all  this  talk.  Don't  come  where  my 
mother  and  I  am;  do  the  very  worst  you  can,  an' 
some  day  I'll  have  my  innings." 

"You  threaten,  eh?" 

"That's  exactly  what  I'm  doing.  I  have  leased 
this  piece  of  ground  until  to-morrow,  and  warn  you 
that  it'll  be  mighty  uncomfortable  if  you  show  your 
nose  here  again.     Go  now  an'  go  quick!" 

"That's  right,  Teddy,"  Tim  shouted  in  a  tone  of 
delight  from  the  opposite  side  of  the  booth.  "Give 
it  to  hiiin  hot,  an'  I'll  do  my  share.  If  you  don't 
want  to  tackle  the  job  till  after  the  trial,  say  the 
word  an'  I'll  sail  in,  for  it  gives  me  a  pain  to  see 
him  around." 

Teddy  made  no  reply  to  this  generous  offer ;  but 
Uncle  Nathan  stepped  back  very  quickly  as  if 
fearing  an  immediate  attack. 


264  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"You  won't  be  so  bold  to-morrow,"  he  snarled, 
shaking  his  fist  in  impotent  rage,  and  then  he  dis- 
appeared from  view  amid  the  crowd  that  had  be- 
gun to  gather. 

Both  Teddy  and  his  clerk  thought  it  very  singular 
that  business  should  be  so  good  on  this  day,  when 
the  majority  of  the  other  fakirs  were  comparatively 
idle,  and  also  in  view  of  what  had  been  said  against 
the  proprietor  of  the  cane-board. 

Yet  the  people  gathered  around  by  scores,  all 
intent  on  patronizing  the  boys,  and  at  the  same 
time  embracing  every  opportunity  to  display  their 
good  will. 

Teddy  and  his  mother  remained  partially  screened 
from  the  gaze  of  the  curious  until  nearly  two 
o'clock,  when  Dan,  looking  decidedly  troubled, 
arrived. 

"I  suppose  we've  got  to  go  to  the  grand  stand  an' 
find  out  what  the  deacon  wants,"  he  said,  mourn- 
fully. "  My  boss  told  me  that  we  must  be  there  on 
time,  an'  we  might  as  well  start." 

"I  want  to  have  it  over  as  soon  as  possible," 
Teddy  replied.  "Nothin'  that  comes  can  be  any 
worse  than  waitin'  here  thinkin'  of  what  may 
happen." 

The  two  boys  walked  either  side  of  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves  as  they  went  to  meet  the  deacon,  and  it 
seemed  very  much  as  if  the  majority  of  the  people 
present  knew  what  was  about  to  occur,  for  the  sad- 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  265 

visaged  party  was  followed  by  crowds  of  the  visitors 
as  they  walked  steadily  onward. 

It  was  exactly  two  o'clock  when  they  arrived  at 
the  stairw^ay  leading  to  the  grand  stand,  and  there 
they  were  met  by  the  leader  of  the  band  from  the 
Run,  who  said  with  a  mysterious  manner  as  he 
opened  a  gate  leading  to  the  track  in  front  of  the 
judges'  stand : 

"You  are  to  come  this  way." 

"Where's  the  deacon?"  Teddy  asked. 

"Waiting  for  you." 

Without  further  explanation  the  musician  led  the 
three  to  a  spot  where  all  could  see  them,  and,  to 
the  intense  surprise  of  the  sorrowful-looking  party, 
the  throng  assembled  on  the  benches  greeted  them 
with  the  most  hearty  applause. 

"You  are  to  come  with  me,  Mrs.  Hargreaves," 
the  conductor  said,  as  he  escorted  her  to  one  of  the 
front  seats,  and  Teddy  and  Dan  stood  as  if  stupe- 
fied, gazing  in  dismay  at  the  sea  of  faces  in  front 
of  them. 

Before  the  boys  had  sufficiently  recovered  from 
their  bewilderment  to  be  able  to  speculate  upon 
what  was  to  happen  Deacon  Jones  came  down  the 
steps  until  he  reached  a  place  where  all  could  see 
him  and  there  began  a  speech  which  caused  at 
least  two  of  that  assemblage  to  gaze  at  him  in  open- 
mouthed  astonishment. 

The  manager  of  the  fair  did  not  intend  to  neglect 


266  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

any  opportunity  of  making  himself  conspicuous, 
and  he  delivered  an  eloquent  address,  looking  first 
at  the  boys  and  then  at  the  audience,  which  cannot 
be  given  here  because  of  lack  of  space. 

He  first  explained  to  the  spectators  that  Teddy 
had  taken  upon  himself  the  business  of  fakir  simply 
that  he  might  aid  his  widowed  mother.  Then  he 
detailed  the  loss  of  the  fifteen  dollars,  and  finally 
broached  the  one  important  matter,  that  of  the 
scene  on  the  creek,  when  the  three  women  w^ere 
rescued  from  drowning. 

By  this  time  the  cheeks  of  Teddy  and  Dan  were 
flaming  red,  and  if  he  had  been  charging  them  with 
the  most  atrocious  crimes  they  could  not  have 
looked  more  guilty  or  uncomfortable. 

"As  you  all  know,"  he  said,  in  conclusion,  "we 
have  met  here  to  see  bravery  and  a  spirit  of  self- 
sacrifice  rewarded.  On  behalf  of  the  ladies  whose 
lives  were  saved  by  these  little  heroes  I  am  about  to 
present  Edward  Hargreaves  and  Daniel  Summers 
with  one  hundred  dollars  each.  In  addition  to  that 
amount  the  managers  of  the  fair  and  several  gen- 
tlemen who  do  not  care  to  have  their  names  made 
public,  have  made  up  a  purse  of  one  hundred  and 
eighty  dollars  to  be  divided  equally  between  them. 
It  is  most  gratifying  to  me  that  I  have  been  select- 
ed as  the  instrument  through  w^hom  this  testimonial 
is  presented,  and  in  behalf  of  my  brother  officers  as 
well  as  myself  I  will  state  that  these  brave  boys 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  267 

have  the  freedom  of  the  grounds  whenever  the 
Peach  Bottom  fair  is  open." 

As  he  concluded,  the  deacon  walked  with  a  ma- 
jestic bearing  down  to  the  bewildered  boys,  pre- 
sented each  with  a  well-filled  pocketbook  and  then 
waved  his  hand  as  a  signal  for  the  band,  every 
member  of  which  did  his  best  to  make  the  music 
heard  above  the  rounds  of  applause  intended  for  the 
blushing  fakirs. 

In  the  meantime  the  people  came  down  from  the 
benches  to  congratulate  the  life-savers,  and  for 
fully  an  hour  the  two  were  forced  to  remain  there 
listening  to  words  of  praise  which  they  felt  were 
not  warranted  by  their  exploit  on  the  creek. 

Among  the  most  welcome  of  these  enthusiastic 
visitors  w^as  Jacob  Sweet,  and  he  said,  heartily : 

"I  heard  of  this  little  performance  jest  in  time  to 
^et  here  before  that  long-winded  speech  w^as  be- 
gun ;  but  what  pleases  me  the  most  is  that  I  was 
ahead  of  the  whole  gang,  an'  started  our  little  blow- 
out when  it  wasn't  known  you  had  so  many 
friends.  I'll  see  you  to-night,  of  course,  an'  1  must 
go  now,  for  the  bouncer  has  been  aruund  tellin'  that 
you've  been  sleepin'  in  my  tent,  an'  I  count  on  a 
good  pay  in'  crowd  this  afternoon." 

It  was  considerably  past  three  o'clock  when  the 
boys  and  Mrs.  Hargreaves  returned  to  the  cane- 
board,  looking  very  much  different  than  when  they 
left  it,  and  Tim  cried  as  they  came  up: 


268  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"I've  heard  all  about  it,  an'  what  I  want  to  know 
is,  where  was  old  Nathan  while  that  speechify  in' 
wasgoin'on?" 

"I  saw  him  when  we  first  arrived,"  Mrs.  Har- 
greaves  replied,  "  but  he  left  a  few  moments  later, 
although  I  have  no  doubt  that  he  remained  where 
he  could  hear  all  that  was  said  without  being  seen." 

"That's  where  he  was  wise.  It  wouldn't  be  very 
pleasant  for  him  to  show  himself  now,  'cause  every- 
body is  down  on  him  after  what  the  deacon  said." 

Dan  was  obliged  to  return  to  his  duties,  and  lie 
whispered  to  Teddy  before  leaving : 

"  I  tell  you  what  it  is,  old  feller,  this  has  been  a 
reg'lar  puddin'  for  us,  an'  I'd  give  a  good  deal  to 
see  another  jest  like  it." 

"  You're  all  right,  but  I  expect  after  this  Uncle 
Nathan  will  be  so  mad  he'll  make  me  a  pile  of 
trouble." 

"Don't  worry  about  that;  his  claws  are  cut  now. 
I'll  be  back  in  time  to  go  to  supper." 

When  he  departed  Teddy  had  an  opportunity  to 
say  a  few  words  to  his  mother  before  she  returned 
home  on  the  stage,  which  was  advertised  to  leave 
at  four  o'clock,  and  while  he  did  this  all  thought  of 
being  under  arrest  was  put  far  from  his  mind  be- 
cause of  the  joy  at  wdiat  he  was  now  able  to  per- 
form. 

"Never  mind  what  happens  to  me,"  he  whispered. 
"  I've  now  got  nearly  money  enough  to  pay  off  all 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  269 

we  owe,  an'  it  has  been  earned  honestly,  too,  al- 
though I  believe  they  paid  a  big  price  for  what  Dan 
an'  I  did  on  the  creek." 

"  I'm  thinking  more  of  the  praise  you  earned  than 
the  money,  Teddy.  It  was  very  sweet  to  hear  the 
deacon  say  so  much  to  you  before  all  those  people." 

"Then  both  of  us  will  be  awfully  jolly  to-night, 
an'  to-morrow  I'll  be  home,  an'  bring  Dan  with 
me." 

"Invite  him  to  stay  just  as  long  as  he  wishes,  and 
I  will  have  a  nice  supper  ready  when  the  last  stage 
arrives." 

Teddy  gave  his  mother  nearly  all  the  money  he 
had,  including  the  "testimonial,"  and  as  she  walked 
away  he  said  to  Tim : 

"I'm  willin'  to  be  arrested,  an'  put  into  jail  a  good 
many  days  for  the  sake  of  being  able  to  help  her  as 
I  can  do  now." 


270  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


•  CHAPTER  XXX. 
THE  TRIAL. 

IT  was  only  natural  that  both  Teddy  and  Dan 
should  feel  highly  elated  after  this  public  expres- 
sion of  admiration  which  culminated  in  the  presen- 
tation of  the  purse,  but  they  immediately  returned 
to  attend  to  their  several  duties  when  the  ceremo- 
nies were  finished. 

Dan  went  back  to  the  exhibition  as  if  he  had  done 
nothing  worth  remembering,  and  in  less  than  half 
an  hour  from  the  time  the  deacon  concluded  his 
flowery  speech  it  would  have  required  a  very 
ardent  student  of  humanity  to  discover  that  any- 
thing out  of  the  natural  course  of  events  had  taken 
place. 

At  the  cane-board  Teddy  waited  upon  his  cus- 
tomers as  before,  a  ad  without  the  slightest  sign  of 
having  been  honored  by  the  magnates  of  the  fair, 
while  Dan  fired  at  the  target  as  if  he  had  been  a 
boy  with  no  other  claim  upon  the  public's  attention 
than  his  ability  to  hit  a  mark. 

Yet  it  must  be  confessed  that  both  experiened  a 
very  pleasing  sense  of   having  satisfied  the  public, 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  271 

and  each,  in  his  own   peculiar  way,  knew  he  had 
risen  a  little  above  the  average  boy. 

There  can  be  no  question  that  any  one  placed 
in  the  same  position  must  have  felt  gratified  by  the 
many  expressions  of  friendship  and  good-will  with 
which  these  two  were  literally  overwhelmed,  and  it 
would  have  been  more  than  could  be  expected  of 
human  nature  had  they  remained  unmoved  under 
the  extravagant  flattery  which  was  sho^\ered  upon 
them  immediately  after  the  close  of  Deacon  Jones' 
speech. 

Although  there  was  not  quite  as  much  money 
flowing  into  the  box  as  on  the  day  previous,  Teddy 
was  more  than  pleased  with  the  receipts,  because 
every  penny  seemed  to  express  just  such  an  amount 
of  good-will. 

Until  nearly  nightfall  he  remained  at  the  booth, 
answering  questions  upon  the  same  subject  till  it 
seemed  to  have  been  worn  threadbare,  and  then, 
however  great  his  desire  to  earn  money,  he  felt  a 
positive  sense  of  relief  that  his  connection  with  the 
Peach  Bottom  fair  had  finally  come  to  an  end. 

"This  is  the  last  time  you  an'  I  will  pack  up  the 
stuff,"  he  said  to  Tim  as  they  put  into  condition  for 
removal  the  cane  and  knife  boards.  "I  promised  to 
give  you  all  that  was  left,  and  you're  more  than 
welcome  to  it." 

"  But  you  surely  don't  mean  to  give  me  the  whole 
lot,"  Tim  cried  in  surprise. 


272  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"That's  exactly  what  I'm  going  to  do,  and  I  sin- 
cerely hope  when  you  make  a  stand  you'll  meet 
with  the  same  good  friends  I  have  here." 

"I  can't  take  these  things  unless  you'll  allow  me 
to  pay  something  toward  what  they  cost." 

"Look  here,  Tim,"  Teddy  said,  earnestly,  "you 
have  shown  yourself  to  be  a  friend  of  mine,  an' 
every  cent  that  has  come  in  here  you've  accounted 
for.  Now,  whatever  may  happen,  I'm  through  bein' 
a  fakir ;  but  if  you  want  to  follow  the  business,  I 
can  only  hope  you'll  come  out  all  right.  We'll  carry 
this  to  Mr.  Sweet's  tent,  an'  I'll  only  be  so  much 
the  better  pleased,  and  in  case  you  don't,  I'm  bound 
to  help  you  in  every  way.  Besides,  I  promised  to 
pay  a  certain  percentage  on  the  profits ;  that  is  yet 
to  be  settled." 

"It  never  will  be,"  Tim  replied  in  the  most  de- 
cided tone.  "  If  I  take  these  goods  I've  got  more 
than  a  fair  share,  an'  won't  listen  to  anything 
else." 

"Very  well,  we'll  leave  it  that  way.  You  now 
own  everything,  an'  I  owe  you  lots  of  good-will." 

On  this  basis  the  remnants  of  the  two  boards  were 
packed  up  for  removal,  and  when  they  were  about 
to  take  the  goods  to  Mr.  Sweet's  tent  Dan  arrived. 

"How  much  business  did  you  do  to-day?"  he 
asked. 

Teddy  delayed  sufficiently  long  to  count  the  re- 
ceipts, and  then  replied : 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  273 

"  Forty-one  dollars  and  fifteen  cents.  That  gives 
Tim  four-eleven,  an'  I  get  more  than  would  have 
been  the  case  but  for  the  testimonial  this  after- 
noon. The  folks  crowded  around  to  see  me,  rather 
than  to  get  the  canes,  an'  so  business  has  picked  up 
better  than  any  one  expected." 

"  It  don't  make  any  difference  how  the  money 
came  in  so  long  as  you  have  got  it,"  Dan  replied, 
philosophically,  "an'  now  the  question  is  what  are 
we  to  do  for  supper,  since  we  paid  our  bill  at  the 
boarding-house  this  afternoon?" 

"Have  you  got  any  idea?" 

"Of  course,  or  else  I  wouldn't  have  asked  the 
question.  Let's  invite  Mr.  Sweet,  the  bouncer,  and 
the  clown  to  some  restaurant  down  town,  an'  try  to 
give  them  as  good  a  time  as  we  had  last  night." 

This  proposition  met  with  Teddy's  approval,  and 
the  party  was  made  up  as  he  suggested,  the  cost 
being  divided  between  the  two  boys  w^ho  had  been 
the  recipients  of  the  public  testimonial. 

Not  until  a  late  hour  in  the  evening  did  these  fes- 
tivities come  to  an  end,  and  then  the  party  retired 
to  the  museum  tent,  where  they  remained  undis- 
turbed until  the  present  season  of  the  Peach  Bot- 
tom fair  had  come  to  an  end. 

It  was  an  unusually  late  hour  for  fakirs  to  arise 
when  Mr.  Sweet  awakened  the  boys  as  he  said : 

"Turn  out  now,  lads,  an'  get  your  stuff  ready  for 
removal.     I'm  sorry  to  part  company,  but  we  can't 


274  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

stay  here  forever,  an'  the  museum  must  be  forty 
miles  the  other  side  of  Waterville  by  Monday  morn- 
ing." 

Dan  had  completed  and  been  paid  for  his  work 
with  the  Stevens  Company,  therefore  he  had  noth- 
ing to  do ;  Teddy  no  longer  claimed  any  interest  in 
the  canes  and  knives  left  over  from  the  week's 
work ;  consequently  he  was  free  to  go  where  he 
pleased,  and  Tim  had  his  goods  in  such  a  condition 
that  they  could  be  removed  at  any  moment,  which 
prevented  him  from  feeling  any  anxiety  regarding 
the  future. 

Thus  it  was  that  all  three  of  the  boys  were  at  lib- 
erty to  assist  the  proprietor  of  the  museum,  and 
this  they  did  with  a  will  until  the  arrival  of  Lawyer 
Harvey  caused  them  to  think  of  what  had  almost 
been  forgotten  in  the  bustle  and  confusion  of  break- 
ing camp. 

"We  are  due  at  the  'Squire's  office  at  nine  o'clock, 
and  it  is  time  you  boys  were  getting  over  that  way," 
he  said,  briskly ;  "our  case  won't  come  up  to-day, 
but  it  has  been  decided  to  give  Hazelton  a  hearing, 
and  I  am  very  much  afraid  he's  going  to  get  the 
worst  of  it." 

"What  do  you  mean?"  Teddy  asked,  anxiously. 

"Well,  you  see  I  have  not  been  able  to  get  any  in- 
formation in  addition  to  what  you  boys  furnished, 
and  there  seems  little  doubt  that  the  'Squire 
must  perforce  bind  him  over  for  trial.     The  fact 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  275 

that  he  has  deliberately  swindled  so  many  people 
will  work  against  him,  and  we  can  do  very  little  to 
save  him." 

"What  will  be  the  result  of  his  being  bound 
over?"  Teddy  asked. 

"He  must  remain  in  jail,  unless  he  can  get  bail, 
until  next  fall." 

"But  that  in  itself  will  be  a  terrible  punishment." 

"True;  yet  it  cannot  be  avoided.  If  he  had 
worked  honestly  the  case  would  be  different ;  but 
now  he  will  be  fortunate  even  to  get  out  in  the  fall." 

"Yet  Uncle  Nathan  says  I  am  equally  guilty." 

"We  can  easily  show  you  had  nothing  to  do  with 
the  robbery,  and  that  is  our  only  care  this  morn- 
ing." 

"What  about  Long  Jim?" 

"He  remains  silent,  refusing  to  answer  the  sim- 
plest questions,  and  unless  he  speaks  Hazelton 
must  be  bound  over ;  the  'Squire  can  pursue  no  other 
course." 

Believing  as  they  did  that  Hazelton  was  inno- 
cent of  the  charge  upon  which  he  had  been  arrest- 
ed, both  Teddy  and  Dan  felt  it  was  a  great  hardship 
for  the  fakir  to  remain  so  long  in  prison ;  but  since 
it  was  beyond  their  power  to  give  him  any  relief, 
neither  expressed  an  opinion  other  than  has  been 
recorded. 

Mr.  Harvey  had  come  for  them  to  accompany 
him  to  the  'Squire's  office,  and  since  there  wasnoth- 


276  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

ing  to  detain  them  they  set  out,  after  first  bidding 
Mr.  Sweet  a  cordial  'goodby,"  for  he  had  an- 
nounced his  intention  of  leaving  Peach  Bottom  on 
the  noon  train. 

"I  shall  see  one  or  both  of  you  at  some  time  in  the 
future,"  he  said,  with  considerable  feeling,  "an' 
there'll  be  no  complaint  to  make  if  I  never  fall  in 
with  worse  boys." 

The  bouncer  and  the  clown  also  had  something  to 
say  in  the  form  of  an  adieu,  and  when  the  boys  left 
the  proprietor  of  the  alleged  wonderful  museum  it 
was  like  parting  with  an  old  friend,  for  he  had 
shown  himself  to  be  a  "very  present  help  in  time 
of  trouble." 

Tim  did  not  propose  to  start  for  the  Eun  until  his 
companions  had  concluded  their  business;  his  goods 
were  packed  ready  for  removal,  and  there  was 
nothing  better  for  him  to  do  than  accompany  them 
to  the  court-room  where  it  seemed  as  if  all  they  might 
say  would  result  only  in  a  long  term  of  imprison- 
ment for  Hazelton  before  he  could  be  tried  on  the 
baseless  charge  brought  against  him,  simply  be- 
cause of  the  disreputable  business  in  which  he  was 
engaged. 

Mr.  Harvey  had  little  or  nothing  to  say  during 
the  walk  to  the  'Squire's  office,  and  arriving  there 
the  jewelry  fakir  was  seen  looking  thoroughly  de- 
spondent. 

"Can  I  speak  with  him?"  Teddy  asked  the  laAvyer 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  277 

"What  do  you  want  to  say?" 

"JSIothing  in  particular,  except  to  tell  him  how 
bad  I  feel  because  we  could  do  nothing  to  clear 
him." 

"Very  well;  but  do  not  talk  long,  for  it  may  prej- 
udice your  own  case.  The  people  whom  he  has 
swindled  are  here  to  see  that  some  form  of  punish- 
ment is  meted  out  to  him,  and  it  can  do  you  no  good 
to  be  seen  acting  as  a  consoler." 

This  possibility  troubled  Teddy  very  little  since 
he  was  confident  of  his  own  innocence,  and  he  ap- 
proached the  prisoner  as  he  said : 

"  I  wish  I  could  do  something,  Mr.  Hazelton,  to 
prove  you  as  innocent  as  I  believe  you  to  be." 

"There's  no  need  of  that,  my  bo^;.  I've  put  you  in 
a  hole  already,  and  you've  done  more  for  me  than 
some  others  who  call  themselves  friends." 

"I  know  it  was  Long  Jim  who  committed  the 
burglary;  but  how  can  it  be  proven  now?" 

"  There  was  only  one  way,  and  that  was  to  catch 
the  real  thieves  with  their  plunder.  Mr.  Harvey 
tells  me  his  attempt  was  a  failure,  an'  it  wouldn't 
surprise  me  if  1  was  not  only  remanded  for  trial, 
but  received  a  sentence  for  something  of  which  I 
am  absolutely  innocent.  I  don't  profess  to  be  very 
good,  my  boy,  as  you  may  understand  after  seeing 
me  work  on  the  fair  grounds ;  but  I  never  yet  de- 
scended to   do  such  things  as   I   am  charged   with 


278  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY- 

"I  am ■  certain  of  that,"  and  Teddy  pressed  the 
prisoner's  hand  in  token  of  friendship,  "and  only 
wish  it  was  possible  to  aid  you." 

"You  have  already  done  more  than  my  partners 
did,"  was  the  grateful  reply,  and  then  further  con- 
versation was  prevented  as  the  'Squire  called  the 
assembly  to  order. 

It  was  not  a  regular  court  of  law ;  but  one  would 
have  thought  it  the  most  dignified  judicial  body  in 
the  country  had  he  seen  the  air  with  which  the 
'Squire  took  his  seat  at  the  head  of  the  long  table 
as  he  called  the  case. 

"That  settles  Hazelton,"  Dan  whispered  as  Teddy 
left  the  prisoner  and  rejoined  his  friends.  "Some- 
body has  got  to  suffer  in  order  to  make  the  law 
come  out  square,  an'  he's  the  feller  what'll  have  to 
stand  the  brunt  of  everything." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  279 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 

AN  ARRIVAL. 

LAWYER  HARVEY  did  not  neglect  anything 
which  might  work  to  the  advantage  of  his 
client ;  but  in  the  face  of  the  evidence  his  efforts 
appeared  to  be  in  vain. 

Uncle  Nathan,  who  arrived  just  as  the  case  was 
called,  swore  to  the  fact  that  Hazelton  had  been  in 
his  store  on  the  Sunday  afternoon  prior  to  the  rob- 
bery, and  that  he  had  told  the  prisoner  of  his  keep- 
ing large  amounts  of  money  in  the  building,  be- 
cause of  the  difficulty  and  expense  of  sending  the 
cash  to  the  Waterville  bank. 

He  also  testified  that  Hazelton  seemed  unusually 
interested  in  everything  pertaining  to  the  store,  and 
asked  many  questions  relative  to  his  (the  witness') 
habits,  such  as  the  time  when  business  usually  be- 
gan, how  late  he  remained  in  the  building  at  night, 
as  well  as  several  other  things  which  now  seemed 
as  if  the  information  had  been  sought  simply  for 
the  purpose  of  knowing  when  would  be  the  safest 
time  to  commit  tlie  crime. 

"How  much  did  you  lose?"  Mr.  Harvey  asked. 


280  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"I  don't  kDOw  for  certain;  but  I  stand  willin'  to 
give  fifty  dollars  if  the  goods  can  be  recovered,  an' 
if  my  nephew  would  tell  all  he  knows " 

"That  will  do,  Mr.  Hargreaves,"  the  lawyer  said, 
sharply.  "Teddy  is  not  under  examina,tion,  and 
until  he  is  we  do  not  care  to  hear  your  opinion  con- 
cerning him." 

"I  reckon  I  can  tell  what  1  want  to,  can't  I, 
'Squire?" 

"You  must  confine  yourself  to  this  particular 
case.  As  to  whether  there  is  sufficient  evidence  to 
bind  the  prisoner  over  does  not  concern  the  charge 
against  your  nephew,  at  least  not  to  the  extent  of 
your  telling  what  you  think." 

"  I  thought,  perhaps,  if  he  heard  me  say  I'd  give 
fifty  dollars  to  know  where  the  goods  w^ere,  an' 
knew  I'd  swear  to  it,  he  might  confess,  for  he  has 
shown  himself  to  be  powerful  fond  of  a  dol- 
lar." 

"That  appears  to  be  a  peculiarity  of  some  of  his 
relatives,"  Mr.  Harvey  said,  dryly,  and  at  this  re- 
mark the  spectators  laughed  heartily,  while  the  old 
man  growled : 

"I  didn't  come  here  to  be  told  that  I  was  a  miser; 
but  it  seems  even  men  who  call  themselves  gentle- 
men think  sich  things  are  all  right." 

"  If  you  have  no  other  evidence  to  give  we  will 
not  detain  you,"  the  lawyer  said,  sharply;  and  as 
Uncle  Nathan  returned  to  his  chair  near  the   door 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  281 

the  proprietor  of  the  hotel  at  the  Run  was  called 
upon  to  testify. 

What  he  said  was  in  favor  of  the  prisoner  rather 
than  otherwise. 

He  swore  to  the  fact  that  the  prisoner  spent  the 
night  on  which  the  burglary  was  committed  at  his 
house ;  that  he  pretended  to  retire  at  an  early  hour, 
and  started  for  Peach  Bottom  on  the  first  stage. 

Under  Mr.  Harvey's  skillful  cross-examination 
the  landlord  admitted  that  unless  a  man  got  out  of 
the  window  he  could  not  have  left  the  house  with- 
out the  knowledge  of  the  watchman,  who  kept  the 
keys  and  remained  in  the  office  all  night.  It  was 
also  shown  that  Hazelton  brought  and  carried  away 
with  him,  so  far  as  was  known  at  the  hotel,  nothing 
but  a  small  traveling  satchel. 

Then  several  people  from  the  Run  were  called  to 
prove  that  the  fakir  was  really  in  the  town  on  this 
particular  Sunday,  and  the  driver  of  the  stage  testi- 
fied that  the  prisoner  rode  with  him  the  entire  dis- 
tance to  Peach  Bottom.  The  landlord  of  the  hotel 
where  Hazelton  boarded  during  the  fair  week,  or  so 
much  of  it  as  he  was  at  liberty,  swore  to  the  fact 
that  the  prisoner  had  never  brought  any  quant Ity  of 
baggage  to  his  house,  and  appeared  to  be  very  reg- 
ular in  his  habits.  So  far  as  he  (the  landlord)  knew, 
the  fakir  remained  in  his  room  nearly  all  the  time, 
except  while  on  the  exhibition  grounds. 

This  ended  the  testimony,  and  Mr.  Harvey  argued 


283  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

that  there  Avas  reaily  no  evidence  to  connect  the 
prisoner  with  the  crime. 

"  That  he  conducted  a  _^ame  which  could  hardly 
be  called  honest  is  admitted,"  he  said;  "but  it  has 
nothing  to  do  with  the  case.  Prejudice  should  not 
be  allowed  to  take  the  place  of  facts,  and  I  insist 
that  my  client  be  released." 

"I  reckon  there's  sufficient  ground  for  suspicion," 
the  'Squire  replied,  "an'  I  don't  see  any  other  way 
out  of  it.  A  jury  must  decide,  an'  I  shall  hold  him 
in  the  sum  of  three  thousand " 

At  this  moment  the  dignity  of  the  court  received 
a  severe  shock,  as  a  most  unseemly  disturbance  sud- 
denly occurred  at  the  door,  and  the  'Squire  paused  to 
learn  who  was  so  bold  as  to  disturb  the  representa- 
tive of  the  law  at  the  very  instant  when  he  was  de- 
livering an  opinion. 

"It's  nobody  but  a  boy,"  Uncle  Nathan  replied  as 
he  held  the  door  firmly  closed,  while  the  would-be 
visitor  kicked  so  vigorously  as  to  threaten  the  de- 
struction of  the  panels. 

"Bring  him  in  here,  an'  we'll  see  whether  such  a 
row  can  be  kicked  up  in  a  court  of  law  with  impu- 
nity." 

"Better  let  me  throw  him  into  the  street,"  Uncle 
Nathan  snarled. 

"Mr.  Constable,  bring  that  boy  before  me,"  the 
'Squire  said,  sternly,  and  an  instant  later,  to  the 
consternation  of  all  those  who  had  seen  him,  the 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  283 

boy  who  was  supposed  to  have  been  drowned  two 
days  before  entered,  looking  decidedly  the  worse 
for  having  existed  so  long  without  water  and  soap. 

"Why,  it's  Sam,  an'  he  ain't  dead  I"  Teddy  cried 
as  he  rose  to  his  feet. 

"Of  course  I  ain't;  but  it  wouldn't  been  many 
days  before  I  turned  into  a  corpse  if  I  hadn't  got 
away  from  them  thieves,"  the  amateur  detective  re- 
plied. 

"Who  are  you,  an'  what  do  you  want  here?"  the 
'Squire  asked,  sternly,  as  he  rapped  on  the  table  for 
the  spectators  to  remain  silent. 

"Why,  I'm  Sam  Balderston,  the  feller  who  come 
to  the  fair  to  work  for  the  Davis  Boat  an'  Oar  Com- 
pany of  Detroit,  an'  if  what  Long  Jim  told  me  was 
true,  folks  have  been  tryin'  to  find  me  in  the 
creek." 

"  This  is  the  boy  who  was  reported  to  have  been 
drowned  on  the  day  when  those  lads,"  here  the  law- 
yer pointed  to  Teddy  and  Dan,  "claim  to  have  seen 
two  men  carrying  goods  into  an  old  barn  on  the 
marshes.  I  fancy  he  can  give  us  information  rela- 
tive to  the  true  burglars." 

"You  bet  I  can,"  and  now  that  he  was  the  central 
figure  in  the  scene,  all  Sam's  old  assurance  re 
turned.  "If  you  mean  the  fellers  what  broke  into 
Teddy's  uncle's  store,  I  can  flash  one  of  them  up. 
The  other  come  to  the  fair  an'  didn't  get  back,  so 
Phil  thought  he  was  arrested." 


284  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

''Who  do  you  mean  by  the  other  fellow?"  Mr. 
Harvey  asked. 

"Why,  Lon^  Jhn,  the  same  man  what  swindled 
Teddy  out  of  his  fifteen  dollars  at  Waterville." 

"Have  you  been  with  him  since  your  disappear- 
ance ?" 

"Most  of  the  time  he  hung  around,  an'  then  ag'in 
Phil  was  there." 

"Who  is  Phil?" 

"Long  Jim's  partner.  They've  got  a  slat  of  stuff 
what  has  been  stole  'round  here,  an'  I  know  where 
all  of  it  is." 

"Tell  the  'Squire  the  whole  story." 

This  was  Sam's  opportunity,  and,  in  order  to  cover 
himself  with  glory,  he  slaughtered  the  truth  in  the 
most  shocking  manner. 

"Well,"  he  said,  in  a  consequential  way,  "when 
Dan  an'  me  an'  Teddy  sa.w  the  thieves  carry  in'  stuff 
down  to  that  old  barn  I  wanted  to  rush  in  an'  ar- 
rest both;  but  the  other  fellows  was  scared  an' 
come  ashore  to  talk  with  Hazelton  so's  he'd  tell  'em 
what  to  do.  Then  I  jes'  made  up  my  mind  to  carry 
on  the  job  myself,  an'  went  back." 

"Where?"  the  'Squire  asked. 

"To  the  barn  to  get  the  stuff.  While  I  was  diggin' 
it  up  the  men  come  back,  an'  the  minute  they  saw 
who  was  on  their  trail  they  got  frightened." 

"And  who  was  on  their  trail?"  the  'Squire  inter- 
rupted. 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  285 

"Why,  me,  of  course.  They  rushed  in,  an'  I  had 
the  awfullest  row ;  but  it  was  two  to  one,  an'  so  I 
got  the  worst  of  it.  They  had  to  workinighty  hard 
before  gettin'  me  ti^'ed,  an'  then  all  the  stuff  was 
dug  up  an'  put  in  the  boat.  My  craft  was  upset  an' 
sent  adrift,  so's  to  make  it  look  as  if  I  was  dead,  an' 
we  went  down  the  creek  six  or  seven  miles,  where 
we  hid  in  the  woods.  Phil  came  back  here  after 
more  goods  what  had  been  stolen,  an'  they  was  go- 
in'  to  skip  the  country,  when  there  was  a  big  row, 
an'  Long  Jim  allowed  he'd  come  to  the  fair  once 
more.  Phil  was  mad,  an'  got  pretty  drunk,  an' 
after  that  I  had  my  innings.  I  turned  to  an'  lashed 
him  up  same's  I'd  been ;  but  we  had  an'  awful  fiaht. 
It  takes  more'n  one  man  to  git  away  with  me." 

"Where  is  this  fellow  now?"  the 'Squire  inter- 
rupted again. 

"  Down  the  creek,  tied  up  so's  he  can't  hardly 
breathe,  an'  he  must  be  pretty  near  sober  by  this 
time." 

"If  he  was  very  drunk  I  do  not  understand  how 
he  could  have  fought  so  hard." 

"Well,  he  did;  but  I  got  the  best  of  him,  an' 
what's  more,  I  know  where  all  the  stuff  that's  been 
stolen  is  hid." 

"Mr.  Constable,  bring  into  court  the  prisoner  who 
is  charged  with  swindling,  and  let  us  see  if  this  ex- 
traordinary boy  can  identify  him,"  the  'Squire  said, 
with  an  unusual  amount  of  dignity. 


286  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

"If  it's  Long  Jim,  you  bet  I  can,"  Sam  said,  as  he 
turned  toward  the  spectators  that  they  might  have 
a  good  opportunity  of  seeing  such  a  wonderful  de- 
tective as  he  claimed  to  be. 

Teddy  and  Dan  could  hardly  control  their  impa- 
tience to  speak  privately  with  Sam.  As  a  matter  of 
course,  they  understood  that  he  was  embellishing 
the  story,  and  both  were  eager  to  make  him  tell  the 
exact  truth. 

Just  at  that  moment,  however,  Sam  had  no  time 
to  spend  on  ordinary  boys.  He  had  come  out  of  a 
bad  scrape  with  apparently  flying  colors,  and  in- 
tended to  enjoy  his  triumph  to  the  utmost  before 
sinking  back  to  his  rightful  plane. 

The  jail  was  near  at  hand,  and  Sam  had  not  ex- 
hibited himself  as  much  as  he  desired  when  Long 
Jim  was  brought  in. 

On  seeing  the  boy  the  burglar  gave  a  start  of  sur- 
prise, and  allowed  the  incriminating  question  to  es- 
cape his  lips : 

"Has  Phil  been  pinched,  too?" 

"I  took  care  of  that  business,  an'  we'll  bring  him 
in  some  time  to-day.  Say,  what  about  that  awful 
lickin'  you  was  goin'  to  give  me?" 

"I'll  cut  your  throat  before  this  job  is  finished," 
was  the  angry  reply,  and  there  was  no  longer  any 
necessity  of  asking  Sam  if  he  recognized  the  pris- 
oner. 

"  You  say  you  can  show  us  the  stolen   goods,  and 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  287 

the  other  burglar  is  where  the  officers  can  get  him?" 
Mr.  Harvey  asked. 

"That's  just  what  I  can  do,"  Sam  replied,  proudly. 

"Then  you  will  have  earned  fifty  dollars,  for  Mr. 
Hargreaves  has  promised,  even  sworn,  that  he  will 
pay  that  amount  for  the  return  of  his  property," 
Mr.  Harvey  continued. 

"  He  might  as  well  give  me  the  money  now,  for 
I'm  ready  to  turn  the  stuff  up,  an'  when  there's 
more  big  detective  work  to  be  done,  come  to  me." 

"I  don't  know  about  payin' any  reward  till  I'm 
certain  the  little  villain  isn't  one  of  the  thieves  him- 
self, an'  is  doin'  this  to  swindle  me,"  Uncle  Nathan 
cried,  quickly. 

"  He  shall  have  the  reward  if  the  story  is  true," 
the  'Squire  replied.  "You  can't  go  back  on  what 
you've  sworn  to,  an'  must  pay  up.  Mr.  Constable, 
get  two  or  three  men  an'  go  with  this  boy.  Don't 
lose  sight  of  him  for  a  minute  until  he  has  given  all 
the  information  in  his  power," 


288  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 
IN  CONCLUSION 

SAM  was  led  away  before  either  Teddy  or  Dan 
could  speak  privately  with  him;  but  they  went 
at  once  to  congratulate  Hazelton  on  his  apparently 
happy  escape,  and,  in  response  to  Mr.  Harvey's  re- 
quest, the  'Squire  said: 

"  The  prisoner  can  remain  here,  or  in  your  cus- 
tody, until  the  party  returns.  If  the  boy  has  told 
the  truth  there  is  nothing  for  me  to  do  but  discharge 
him,  and  I  am  really  ^lad  that  he  has  come  out  so 
fortunately." 

"  Don't  think  I'll  ever  forget  what  you've  done  for 
me,"  Hazelton  whispered  to  Teddy. 

"  But  it  isn't  me  at  all.  Sam  seems  to  have  fixed 
everything." 

"I've  got  an  idea  that  I  know  pretty  near  the 
truth  of  the  whole  story,  never  mind  how  he  tells 
it.  At  all  events,  we've  no  reason  to  complain,  for 
if  the  scoods  and  the  other  burglar  are  found,  we 
are  out  of  our  trouble.  Your  uncle's  charges  can't 
hold  after  that." 

It  was,  as  Teddy  now  realized  for  the  first  time,  a 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  289 

happy  conclusion  to  the  trouhles  of  both,  and  his 
heart  was  hghter  than  it  had  been  at  any  time  since 
the  accusation  was  made. 

There  was  no  question  that  those  who  had  gone 
with  Sam  would  be  absent  several  liours,  and 
the  little  party  in  the  court-room  had  more  time  at 
their  disposal  than  could  well  be  occupied  by  the 
discussion  of  their  affairs. 

After  the  different  phases  of  the  case  had  been 
gone  over  in  detail,  tiazelton  asked  Teddy : 

"How  did  you  come  out  at  the  fair?" 

"I  haven't  figured  up;  but  I  know  I've  made  a 
good  deal,  an'  it  must  be  almost  enough,  countin' 
the  money  Deacon  Jones  gave  us,  to  pay  the  debt 
on  the  place." 

Until  this  moment  Teddy  had  had  so  much  on  his 
mind  that  the  principal  cause  of  his  turning  fakir 
was  absent  from  his  mind ;  but  now,  with  nothing 
better  to  do,  he  began  to  count  ujj  the  week's  work, 
announcing  the  result  a  few  moments  later  by  say- 
ing : 

"I  took  in  two  hundred  an' fifty-two  dollars  an' 
fifty  cents  during  the  week.  Out  of  that  must  come 
the  money  I  lost  at  Waterville,  what  I  paid  Uncle 
Nathan,  the  privilege,  the  money  I  paid  Mr.  Reaves 
for  the  stock,  Tim's  wages,  an'  my  board.  That 
leaves  one  hundred  an'  forty-five  dollars  an'  ninet3'- 
eight  cents.  With  what  came  in  from  the  testimo- 
nial I'll  have  enough  to  pay  off  the  debt  on  the  house, 


290  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

an'  pretty  near  eight  dollars  for  aiyself,  which  is 
what  I  call  a  hig  week's  work." 

"I'm  glad  you  have  made  it,"  Hazelton  replied, 
heartily.  "  There  is  a  little  matter  between  you  an' 
I  which  yet  remains  to  be  settled,  and  when  that 
has  been  done  you  should  be  considerably  better 
off." 

"I  don't  Avant  you  to  do  a  thing,"  Teddy  said, 
quickly.  "  So  many  people  have  helped  me  since 
the  fair  opened  that  it  seems  as  if  I  was  nothing 
more  or  less  than  a  beggar." 

"You  come  very  far  from  deserving  that  title," 
the  fakir  replied,  and  then  the  entrance  of  Mr. 
Keaves  interrupted  the  conversation.  After  talking 
with  the  lawyer,  the  merchant  said  to  Teddy : 

"  I  am  more  than  pleased  to  learn  that  you  will  be 
freed  from  all  your  troubles  in  a  short  time.  JSText 
week  I  shall  be  in  need  of  a  clerk,  and  if  you  wish 
to  take  the  situation  it  shall  be  left  open  until  you 
are  ready  to  go  to  work.  The  vv^ages  are  six  dollars 
a  week  for  the  first  year,  with  an  increase  as  soon 
as  you  can  earn  it,  and  I  will  really  be  pleased  to 
have  you  in  my  employ." 

"I'd  like  to  come,"  Teddy  replied;  "but  it  don't 
seem  just  right  to  leave  mother." 

"There  is  no  necessity  of  doing  so.  You  can  ride 
back  and  forth  on  the  stage,  unless  your  mother 
should  decide,  as  I  think  she  will  eventually,  to 
make  her  home  in  Waterville." 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  291 

"If  she  approves  of  the  plan  I'll  come  to  work 
next  week." 

"Make  it  two  weeks,,  so  that  there'll  be  plenty  of 
time  to  arrange  matters,  and  I  will  expect  you,"  the 
merchant  replied  in  a  tone  which  showed  that  he 
was  more  than  satisfied  with  the  arrangement.  "  I 
only  came  over  to  see  if  you  needed  any  assistance ; 
but  Mr.  Harvey  says  you'll  soon  be  free  from  the 
charge  your  uncle  made,  therefore  I  will  go  back 
at  once." 

About  an  hour  after  the  merchant  departed  Sam 
and  the  constables  returned  with  Phil  and  the  stolen 
goods. 

The  amateur  detective  was  in  the  best  possible 
spirits,  and  now  that  the  burglar  had  been  appre- 
hended through  his  assistance  the  boy  felt  abso- 
lutely certain  he  was  the  greatest  detective  in  the 
country. 

As  a  matter  of  course,  there  was  nothing  the 
'Squire  could  do  save  discharge  Hazelton  from  cus- 
tody, and  after  Mr.  Harvey  had  2:iven  his  word  that 
he  would  take  care  Sam  should  appear  when  wanted 
as  a  witness,  the  boy  rejoined  his  friends,  saying  as 
he  did  so : 

"If  you  fellers  had  done  as  I  wanted  you'd  be  way 
up  now,  the  same  as  I  am.  Of  course,  I  don't  blame 
you  for  being  afraid ;  but  Y>dien  you  go  out  on  such 
work  the  only  way  is  to  hold  on." 

"I   wonder  how  long  you'd   liave   held  on  if  the 


292  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  A  COUNTRY 

men  hadn't  made  you  stay  with  them?"  Dan  asked. 

"Who  told  you  that?"  Sam  said.  "If  I  staid,  it 
was  because  I  knowed  it  wouldn't  be  long  until  I 
got  the  upper  hand  of  the  gang,  an  I've  done  it." 

Bf^fore  the  party  separated,  and  while  Uncle 
Nathan  was  identifying  the  goods  which  had  been 
stolen  from  him,  Mr.  Harvey  insisted  that  the  re- 
ward should  be  paid,  and  although  it  was  very  much 
like  drawing  a  tooth,  the  old  man  was  finally  in- 
duced to  make  his  word  good. 

"It's  a  pile  of  money,  but  I  earned  it,"  Sam  said, 
as  he  tucked  Uncle  Nathan's  grudgingly  bestowed 
cash  in  his  trousers  pocket.  "There  ain't  many 
'round  this  part  of  the  country  who  could  have  done 
what  I  did,  an'  it's  only  right  detectives  should  be 
well  paid." 

Then,  with  many  protestations  of  friendship,  the 
laAvyer  started  for  home,  after  returning  to  Hazel- 
ton  the  money  which  Teddy  had  given  Mr.  Reaves 
for  safekeeping,  and  the  fakir  said  as  he  walked 
out  of  the  court-room  with  the  four  boys : 

"Now,  I  want  you  to  come  with  me,  until  my  busi- 
ness is  settled,  and  then  I'll  shake  the  dust  of 
Peach  Bottom  from  my  feet  in  the  shortest  possible 
time." 

Not  understanding  what  he  meant,  the  boys  ac- 
companied him  to  the  nearest  jewelry  store,  and 
there  he  bought  two  silver  watches,  which  he  pre- 
sented to  Teddy  and  Dan.  as  he  said: 


BOY  AT  A  COUNTRY  FAIR.  293 

"  These  are  only  to  remind  you  that  I  am  grateful 
for  what  has  been  done.  It  isn't  much  of  a  present; 
but  it  will  suffice  to  show  I'm  not  ungrateful.  Some 
time  in  the  future  I  may  meet  you  again,  and  then 
the  full  debt  shall  be  paid  if  I'm  solid  enough  lo  do 
it." 

He  was  gone  almost  before  the  astonished  boys 
could  thank  him,  and  with  his  departure  this  story 
should  properly  be  concluded,  since  Teddy  has 
made  his  last  appearance  as  a  fakir. 

A  few  more  words,  and  "the  end"  shall  be  written. 

Sam,  still  believing  himself  especially  designed 
for  a  detective,  is  yet  displaying  his  "  style"  as  an 
oarsman  in  the  employ  of  the  Davis  Boat  and  Oar 
Company,  and  he  believes  he  has  guessed  the 
weight  of  the  yacht  which  is  so  soon  to  be  given 
away. 

Dan  accepted  an  offer  from  Mr.  Reaves  last  week, 
and  he  and  Teddy  are  learning  the  same  business, 
both  looking  forward  to  the  time  when  they  shall 
own  a  store  equally  as  large. 

Uncle  Nathan  is  still  at  the  Run,  but  his  trade  has 
decreased  very  materially,  and  Hazelton  has  not 
been  seen  since  the  day  he  left  Peach  Bottom ;  but 
it  is  quite  possible  that  when  the  fair  opens  this  sea- 
son all  the  fakirs  may  again  meet  tlie  country  boy 
who  made  such  a  successful  venture  at  the  country 
fair. 

[the  end.] 


CHARLfSf  .BflOW/i  &gQ:5PU^LieATiQ/ls,£)?5T?/i| 


RIDPATHS  U/^ITED  SfAtES.     ^ 

eioM|3.7J   Siieep-J-OO  JleslLNorocco_6.00 


Size  of  Volumes  7K  x  lOX  Inches. 


Facsimile  Volume  deduced* 


Y'=>1{  SALE  5Y  ALLBOOJlSEklfKS  01^  Se/iriiPO/l  fifCflPT  Of  Pf\lCE  DY  m  PUBUSHEAS 


f^ 


Charles  f.SROWAiSCo-SPuBLieATio/is.B^f^Til 


HALL:SlRELAND.3V0LS.mi.  j 

^^f^GiotliSlJ   Sf^eepJ.OO   hcMLMorocco  6.00' 


Size  of  Volumes  7K  x  lOX  Inches. 


lS#'"S) 


TORY 
CENERY 

AND 

EOPLE 


Facsimile  Volume  Reduced, 


r^n  SALE  Br  A[L ^Booj(5Ekutfia,  Qi^  si/ii  lipo/i  fitcfiPi  Qf  PF^icf  B-Y  ^m  m^rnm^ 


[ObiS 


CHARLtSf.SRQWAiSgQ:SPU^LieATiQ/1s,BQ5T?>^ 

MissPARLgAS  Cook  Book". 

5^^^^^!^'     Cloth, silverdnd  blc^cK  §[cje  dqcl  B6c|\  1.25 


Size  of  Volumes  5H  x  7K  Inches. 


Facsimile  Volume  Heduced* 


r<^RSALE  BY  AIL  BOOJ^^EliUf K^  01\  SEAT  liPO/l  fiECflPT  Of  Pf\IC£  By  TH&  PUBIISITE^ 


K 

RY